C max T3

Operation and maintenance manual

ORIGINAL INSTRUCTIONS CHAPTER

Valid for tractors equipped with
TABLE OF CONTENTS
cab or ROPS models: TRACTOR IDENTIFICATION
INTRODUCTION, WARRANTY
1
C max T3
75*-80-90-100-105*- SAFETY NOTES
110 2
Powerfour
Powershuttle INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

* Only certain markets

3
OPERATION

4
ROUTINE MAINTENANCE

5
SPECIFICATIONS

6
CAB

POWERSHUTTLE
8

CMAX HC
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
9
Argo Tractors S.p.A.
42042 Fabbrico [RE] Italia
via G. Matteotti, 7
t. +39.0522.656111 - f. +39.0522.656476
webmaster@argotractors.com Publication N. 6502 892M3
www.argotractors.com Release 09/2012

1
This manual was compiled in compliance with the the ISO 3600 standards and the here contained instructions
comply the requirements of the Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC and Directive 2010/52/EC in force in the Euro-
pean Community. For tractors sold or used outside the European Community, local laws will prevail.

Main protections on the tractors discussed in this manual.

[4.1.o] [4.1.p] [4.1.q] [4.5.b]

FOOTSTEP CAB

ROPS (protection against overturning) YES YES

FOPS (protection against objects falling from above) NO YES
OPS (protection against penetration of objects from sides) NO NO
Protection against hazardous chemicals CLASS 1* CLASS 2*

* In compliance with EN 15695-1:2009

The 75 - 105 models are not on sale in EC countries and in North America, therefore they cannot be equipped
with some of the specific features of these markets.

This operation and service manual is valid for all countries and all models. It contains photos, notes and direc-
tions both for standard and optional equipment. Therefore it can give details for parts not installed on your
tractor with respect to the local laws in force and according to ordered optional equipment.
The tractor is supplied complete with safety devices according to national or international laws. For your own
safety, please always use correctly such devices and check them for function. If you have any doubts concer-
ning their operation or use, do not hesitate to ask your Dealer for details.

WARNING: If the tractor is fitted with a cab that is

not approved by the tractor’s maker, the warranty
concerning the modified functional units becomes
null and void (safety frame, electric and hydraulic
systems, etc.). Further, it is not possible to check
for compliance with noise level standards and with
technical approvals.

CALIFORNIA
Proposition 65 Warning

Diesel engine exhaust and some of its

constituents are known to the State
of California to cause cancer, birth
defects, and other reproductive harm.

2
Table of contents Page n.
Section 1 Contents................................................................................................... 3
Tractor identification................................................................................. 6
Introduction.............................................................................................. 7


Warranty, pre-delivery inspections and installation................................. 7
Warranty claim.......................................................................................... 7
1
Spare parts warning................................................................................. 8
If you move............................................................................................... 8
Post-warranty service............................................................................... 8
Safety........................................................................................................ 8

Section 2 Safety Notes............................................................................................. 9

Regular use............................................................................................... 9
Safety alert symbols and terms............................................................. 10
Safety - tractor and implement.............................................................. 10
Safety - Introduction .............................................................................. 10
Safety - Advice for the operator............................................................. 10
Safety - Danger, Warning and Caution................................................... 11
Safety - Decals........................................................................................ 11
Safety - Following a safety program...................................................... 11
Safety frame........................................................................................... 12
Safety - Cab............................................................................................ 12
Safety precautions................................................................................. 13
Check your equipment........................................................................... 15
Cleaning the tractor................................................................................ 16
Save the environment............................................................................ 16
Safety - Tractor maintenance................................................................. 16
Safety - Starting up................................................................................. 17
Working in safety.................................................................................... 19
Correct manoeuvres............................................................................... 19
Working in safety.................................................................................... 19
Beware of other people......................................................................... 20
Risk of overturning................................................................................. 21
To avoid side overturning....................................................................... 21
To avoid back overturning...................................................................... 23
Dangerous operations............................................................................ 25
Implements and attachments................................................................ 26
Road transport........................................................................................ 27
Road circulation rules............................................................................. 27
Safety - After use.................................................................................... 28
Additional notes..................................................................................... 29
Risks from noise..................................................................................... 31
Positions of safety decals - All markets ................................................ 32

Section 3 Controls and instruments....................................................................... 37

Controls on platform with mechanical reverse shuttle
and mechanical hitch............................................................................ 38
Controls in cab with mechanical reverse shuttle and mechanical hitch.39
Instrument panel ................................................................................... 40
Controls on the dashboard..................................................................... 44
Seat......................................................................................................... 45
Operator present sensor........................................................................ 45
Miscellaneous........................................................................................ 46
Tractor access........................................................................................ 47

3
 Table of contents Page n.

Chapter 4 Operation................................................................................................ 49
Starting and stopping the engine........................................................... 50
Starting the tractor................................................................................. 51
Clutch..................................................................................................... 51
Standard gearbox................................................................................... 52
Gearbox with 12x12 reverse shuttle...................................................... 54
Gearbox with 24x12 reverse shuttle and creeper.................................. 55
Gearbox with 24x12 reverse shuttle and underdrive............................. 56
Gearbox with 24x12 reverse shuttle and overdrive............................... 57
Power take-off........................................................................................ 58
Brakes..................................................................................................... 61
Hydraulically controlled trailer brake...................................................... 62
Differential lock...................................................................................... 63
2WD........................................................................................................ 63
Front wheel track adjustment, 2WD ..................................................... 64
4WD front axle - Adjusting the steering angle....................................... 66
Front wheel track adjustment, 4WD...................................................... 66
Rear wheel track adjustment................................................................. 68
Wheels and tyres.................................................................................... 70
Wheel removing procedure.................................................................... 70
Tyre inflation procedure.......................................................................... 71
Ballast..................................................................................................... 73
Three-point linkage................................................................................. 76
Mechanically controlled hydraulic power lift......................................... 79
Auxiliary control valves........................................................................... 82
Protection frame against overturning.................................................... 84
Tractor transport..................................................................................... 85

Chapter 5 Routine maintenance............................................................................. 87

Routine maintenance table.................................................................... 88
Lubrication and maintenance................................................................. 90
Running in.............................................................................................. 90
Oil and fuel filling in................................................................................ 92
Access for inspection and maintenance................................................ 93
Maintenance at request......................................................................... 94
Routine maintenance, 100 hours......................................................... 107
Routine maintenance, 250 hours......................................................... 110
Routine maintenance, 500 hours......................................................... 111
Routine maintenance, 1000 hours....................................................... 114
General maintenance........................................................................... 120
Bleeding air from the fuel system........................................................ 120
Bleeding air from the brake system..................................................... 121
Dashboard covering............................................................................. 123
Electric system - Battery...................................................................... 124
Headlights............................................................................................ 127
Changing lamps.................................................................................... 128
Fuses.................................................................................................... 130
Trailer power socket............................................................................. 132
Preparing for long idle periods............................................................. 133

4
Tabel of contents Page n.

Chapter 6 Tractor specifications........................................................................... 135

Weights and dimensions...................................................................... 136
Engine................................................................................................... 138
1
Transmission........................................................................................ 139
Gearbox................................................................................................ 139
Rear axle............................................................................................... 139
Differential lock.................................................................................... 139
Power take-off...................................................................................... 140
Brakes................................................................................................... 140
2WD front axle (if installed).................................................................. 140
4WD front axle .................................................................................... 141
Track adjustment.................................................................................. 141
Steering components........................................................................... 142
Hydraulic system.................................................................................. 142
Mechanical hydraulic power lift........................................................... 142
Three-point linkage............................................................................... 142
Safety frame......................................................................................... 142
Seat....................................................................................................... 142
Bonnet.................................................................................................. 142
Electrical system.................................................................................. 143
Optional extras..................................................................................... 143
Noise levels.......................................................................................... 144
Vibration levels..................................................................................... 145
‘CE’ Declaration of Conformity............................................................. 146
Issue of authorization........................................................................... 147
Weights................................................................................................ 147
Lubricants and quantities, Techno....................................................... 148
Towing attachments............................................................................. 149

Section 7 Cab....................................................................................................... 151

Section 8 Powershuttle & hydraulic PTO.............................................................. 163
Lubricants and quantities, Powershuttle.............................................. 196

Section 9 HC - High Clearance tractors................................................................ 201
Low Profile............................................................................................ 211
Pick Up Hitch........................................................................................ 213

Alphabetical index................................................................................ 217

Contents directive 2010/52/EC............................................................. 219

5
Tractor identification
Machine identification data
The tractor and its main components are identified
by serial numbers and/or manufacturing codes. Here
under the positions of the various identification data
are illustrated.

NOTE: Identification data should be communicated to your

Dealer for requests of spare parts or service.

Tractor identification plate (Fig.1-1)

The manufacturer’s plate is placed on the right-hand side
on the front of the tractor and features the following data:
- Manufacturer
- Machine type Fig.1-1 Tractor identification plate
- Number of authorization for road circulation
- Frame number
- Manufacturing year
- Weights
- Rated engine power in kW
- CE mark

Other data are indicated on the authorization certificate.

Tractor identification number

The vehicle identification number is punched both on the
data plate and on the right-hand front side of the weight
frame. (Fig.1-2.)

Tractor identification data

The engine has its own serial number stamped on the
engine data plate (Fig.1-3).

IMPORTANT: Keep with care this operation and maintenan-

ce manual on your tractor. Before driving or operation your
tractor, it is mandatory to read this manual very carefully,
with special attention to the chapter concerning safety
rules. Keep the manual always ready at hand in the manual
storage compartment for easier reference (Fig. 1-4). Fig.1-2 Tractor type and chassis serial number (on
radiator core support).

Fig.1-4 Fig.1-3 Engine serial number

6

INTRODUCTION
NOTE: This manual is distributed with tractors all over
the world. The equipment indicated as standard or
optional may vary according to the country where the
tractor operates. Please ask your Dealer for full details of
the equipment available in your country.
The purpose of this book is to enable the owner and
driver to operate the tractor in a safe manner. Provided
that the instructions are followed carefully, the equip-
ment will give years of service in our tradition.
If you should not understand any part of this booklet,
please do not hesitate to ask your Dealer for advice, as
these instructions must be correctly understood and
complied with. It is advisable to perform a daily mainte-
nance routine and to keep a register to record the work
hours of the machine.
When new parts are required it is important that only
genuine service parts are used. Authorized Dealers sup-
ply genuine parts and can give advice regarding their
fitment and use. . Customers are therefore required to
buy their service parts only from an authorized Dealer.
Introduction - Warranty
Also compliance with and strict adherence to the ope-
ration service and maintenance conditions specified by
the Manufacturer are substantial part of the intended
use.
If the tractor must be used in very heavy-duty condi-
tions (e.g. deep water or extremely muddy soils), you
should ask your Dealer for specific instructions, to avoid
invalidating the guarantee.
For the operation, service and maintenance of this trac-
tor you need to know perfectly its specific features and
to be precisely informed about the pertaining safety
standards (injury prevention).
Customers are strongly advised to turn to an official De-
aler in connection with any problem regarding service
and adjustments.
WARRANTY, PRE-DELIVERY IN-
SPECTIONS AND INSTALLATION
The Company, when selling new goods to their Dealers,
gives a warranty that, subject to certain conditions,
guarantees that the goods are free from defects in ma-
terial and workmanship. As this manual is published for
worldwide diffusion, it is impossible to give a precise
and detailed description of the terms and clauses of
the warranty granted in each country for retail sale. The
buyers of new tractors should therefore ask their Dealer
for full details.

According to the Company’s policy of continuous

improvement to its machines, changes in their technical
features may be made at any time without notice. The
Company accepts no responsibility for discrepancies
which may occur between the specifications of its
machines and the descriptions thereof contained in its
These tractors are designed exclusively for normal
publications.
an typical agricultural operations, following the ope-
rating instructions contained in this manual.
A Dealer is required to carry out certain activities when
THE TRACTOR IS UNSUITABLE FOR USE IN FORE-
supplying a new tractor. These consist of a full pre-
STAL OPERATIONS. [4.5.b]
delivery inspection to ensure that the tractor supplied
It may become suitable for such use if a forestal kit
is ready for immediate use, and full instruction in the
is installed which is CE marked and approved and
basic principles of operation and maintenance of the
whose installation is approved by the manufacturer.
tractor. These instructions will cover instruments and
The installation and modification of the tractor
controls, routine maintenance and safety precautions.
must be carried out with the highest technical
All persons who will be concerned with the operation
standards by specialised workshops with qualified
and maintenance of the machine should be present for
personnel. Such workshops must be able to gua-
these instructions.
rantee and attest the risk analysis provided for in
the Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC concerning the
foreseen and predictable use of the tractor for fore- NOTE: The Manufacturer will not accept responsibility for
stal work and environment, in order to carry out all any claim resulting from the fitment of non-approved parts
required adaptations of the tractor. This specific fo- or attachments, or unauthorized modification or alteration.
restal kit must protect the driver’s seat from falling
and penetrating objects.

Use in any other way is considered as contrary to the

intended use. The Manufacturer of the tractor accepts
no liability for any damage or injury resulting from misu-
se; any resulting risks must be borne solely by the user.

7
Introduction - Warranty
WARRANTY CLAIM
A correct installation, followed by a regular maintenance,
can do much to prevent malfunctions or breakdowns. If
operation problems should be however encountered du-
ring the warranty period, the warranty should be claimed
with the following procedure.
The Dealer by whom you purchased the tractor should
be promptly informed, stating model and serial number.
It is most important that there should be no delay, and
you should realise that, even where the original failure is
covered by warranty, if the failure is not repaired imme-
diately, warranty cover may not apply.
You should give your Dealer as many information as
possible, for instance work hours, current type of work
and warning signs.
It should be noted that normal maintenance services such
as tuning, brake/clutch adjustments, and the supply of
materials used to service the tractor (oil, filters, fuel and
antifreeze) are not covered by terms of the warranty.
SPARE PARTS WARNING
The fitment of parts of inferior quality may not only impair
machine performances, but also be dangerous for opera-
tor’s health and safety. The manufacturer of the tractor will
not take the responsibility for any loss, damage or liability
resulting from the fitment of such parts, and, if fitted
during the normal warranty period, the manufacturer’s
warranty may be invalidated.
IF YOU MOVE
The Dealer by whom you bought your tractor is sole
responsible for the protection given by your warranty.
We recommend that any repair of your machine should
be made by the Dealer. If you, however, move to another
area or the tractor must momentarily operate in an area
far from the original Dealer, you should ask your Dealer
for name and address of the Dealer nearest to the new
work site, so that the warranty is transferred to the latter.
If you moved from the area of your original Dealer without
any arrangements with the new Dealer, the latter will give
you assistance for emergencies, but will charge normal
prices, unless:
a. You make it clear that the warranty has not expired,
and
b. the Dealer making the repair can make the due arran-
gements with the original Dealer.
8
POST-WARRANTY SERVICE
During the warranty period it is advisable to let your Dealer
perform every repair and servicing. In this way the Dealer
is able to keep under control operation and performances
of your new tractor.
In order to obtain the best performances from your tractor,
it is important to go on with regular checks and servicing
even after the warranty is expired. Make use of your local
Dealer for all major tractor services: a trained engineer
will spot any problems between one service and the next.
Our engineers are regularly trained and updated on the
product, servicing techniques and the use of modern
service tools and diagnostic equipment. They receive
regular Service Bulletins, have all Workshop Manuals and
other such technical information to ensure that the repair
or service is to the standard required.
SAFETY
The safety of the operator is one of the main concerns in
designing and developing a new tractor. Designers build
in as many safety features as possible. However, every
year many accidents occur which could have been avoided
by a few seconds thought and a more careful approach
to handling farm machinery and implements. Therefore
you are required to read through and implement the
safety instructions detailed in the Safety Notes section
of this book.
CAUTION: In some of the illustrations used
in this Operator Instruction Book, panels or
guards may have been removed for clarity.
Never operate the tractor without these com-
ponents in position. If the removal of panels
or guards is necessary to make a repair, they
MUST be replaced before operation.
 Safety notes

Chapter 2
Safety notes
2

REGULAR USE

This is an agricultural tractor, whose function consists essentially in traction power. It is therefore specially designed to
push, pull, carry or operate some interchangeable implements for agricultural purpose, or to tow agricultural trailers.

This machine must be driven and operated by an operator suitably instructed, firmly seated and wearing a fastened seat belt.

This machine is NOT designed:

- To be driven or operated standing or from outside the cab or the operator’s seat, or without a fastened seat belt.
- To lift persons.
- To transport persons, within or outside the cab or the operator’s seat, in any condition (work or road transport).
- To be used in hazardous atmosphere.
- To be used in forestry.
- To be equipped with front loaders if the tractor is not provided with a suitable structure to protect the operator’s seat
from falling and projected objects.
- For tractors equipped with collapsible safety frame, see specific instructions in the next pages.

More basic rules

- Keep the cab doors closed while the machine is being used.
- The machine must be used only by a skilled operator who knows perfectly controls and driving technique.
- External controls of hitch and electro-hydraulic power take-off (if equipped) must be operated standing on one side
outside the tractor and keeping oneself out of the overall width of mudguards. It is expressly forbidden to operate the
controls from the rear of the tractor or standing on the inner side of wheels.

WARNING: Improper use of the machine, specially on rough terrain or slopes, can make it tilt over. Pay
particular attention in case of rain, snow, ice or anyway on slippery ground. It may be necessary to step
out of the tractor to check personally ground quality. In the described conditions, always keep the load
as close as possible to the tractor and the ground.

WARNING: Do not try to get off the moving tractor, even if it is overturning, to avoid being crushed un-
der it, but remain seated with the well fastened seat belt and hold firmly the steering wheel.

WARNING: If the safety frame mounted on the tractor is the front two-post type, the tractor must always
be used with the frame in upright (vertical) position.

9
Safety notes

SAFETY ALERT SYMBOLS AND TERMS

This safety symbol means WARNING! BEWARE! YOUR SAFETY IS IN DANGER!

This alert symbol draws your attention on important warnings on the implement, in the manual or anywhere else. Pay
great attention whenever you see this symbol: there is a great danger of serious or deadly injuries. Follow the instruc-
tions given in the warning.

WHY IS SAFETY IMPORTANT FOR YOU?

« ACCIDENTS CAN MAIM and KILL «
« ACCIDENTS COST A HIGH PRICE «
« ACCIDENTS can be AVOIDED «

SAFETY - TRACTOR AND IMPLEMENT [4.2.a]

• The tractor is a source of mechanical and hydraulic power.
• This Operator’s Manual is compiled to cover safe working practices that are associated with the basic trac-
tor operation.
• It does not cover all operation and safety instructions relevant to all known implements and attachments that
may be fitted to your tractor in the future.
• All implements connected to the tractor must bear the CE mark (Europe only). All equipment must be accom-
panied by a operation and maintenance handbook, to be read before assembling and using the equipment.
• It is essential that operators use and understand the relevant Operator’s Manual which accompany such im-
plements and attachments not treated in this book.
• The above mentioned tractor is not suitable for forestry.

SAFETY - INTRODUCTION SAFETY - ADVICE FOR THE OPERA-

This safety section of your Operator Instruction Book is
intended to point out some of the basic safety situations
that may be encountered during the normal operation and
maintenance of your FOOTSTEP or CAB tractor, and to
suggest possible ways of dealing with these situations.
This section is NOT a replacement for other safety prac-
tices featured in other sections of this book.
Additional precautions may be needed according to the
implements used and to work conditions in the field or
in repair or maintenance areas. The Manufacturer of the
tractor has no direct control over application, operation,
inspection, lubrication or maintenance of utility tractor.
Implementation of correct safety practices in such areas
is therefore YOUR own responsibility.
TOR
It is YOUR responsibility to read and understand the sa-
fety section in this manual before operating your tractor.
You must follow these safety instructions that take you
step by step through your working day. DO NOT USE THE
MACHINE IF YOU HAVE ANY DOUBTS:
In reading this section, you will note that illustrations have
been used to highlight certain situations. Each illustration
is numbered and the same number appears in the text in
parenthesis. This reference number is at the end of the
written text concerning the picture and is composed of
two digits separated by a dash: the first digit before the
dash identifies the section, the second one the progres-
sive number of the picture in the section. (e.g. Fig.2-34
= Figure 34 of Section 2).

Remember that YOU are the only key to safety. Good

safety practices not only protect you, but also the people
around you. Study the features in this manual and make
them a working part of your safety program.

10

Keep in mind that this safety section is written only for this
type of machine. Practice all other usual and customary
safe working precautions, and above all - REMEMBER -
SAFETY IS YOUR RESPONSIBILITY. YOU CAN PREVENT
SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH.
SAFETY - DANGER, WARNING AND
CAUTION
Whenever you see the words and symbols shown below,
used in this book and on decals, you MUST take note of
their instructions as they relate to personal safety.
DANGER: The symbol and the word DANGER
indicate an imminently hazardous situation
which, if not avoided, will result in DEATH
OR VERY SERIOUS INJURY.
WARNING: The symbol and the word WAR-
NING indicate a potentially hazardous
situation. If the instructions or procedures
are not correctly followed, it could result in
DEATH OR SERIOUS INJURY IN EXTREME
CASES.
CAUTION: The word CAUTION indicates a limited risk
situation which, if not avoided, will result in MATERIAL
DAMAGES AND/OR MINOR INJURIES.
IMPORTANT: The word IMPORTANT is used to identify
special instructions or procedures which, if not strictly
observed, could result in damage to, or destruction of
the machine, of the work carried out or its surroundings.
NOTE:The word NOTE is used to indicate points of parti-
cular interest for more efficient and convenient repair or
operation.
SAFETY - DECALS
WARNING: DO NOT remove or efface Dan-
ger, Warning, Caution or Instruction decals.
Any lost or effaced Danger, Warning, Caution or Instruction
decals must be replaced. Replacement decals are availa-
ble from your Dealer in the event of loss or damage. The
actual location of these Safety Decals is illustrated at the
end of this section.
If a second-hand tractor has been purchased, refer to
the illustrations at the end of this section to ensure that
all the safety warning decals are in the correct position
and readable.
Safety notes
SAFETY - FOLLOWING A SAFETY
PROGRAM
Safe use of the tractor
Only qualified and authorized operators are able to use
farming tractors in safety. To be qualified you must under-
stand the written instructions supplied in this Operator
Instruction Book, have training in the work area, and know
the safety rules and regulations for the job.
Some regulations stat, for instance, that no one younger
than 18 may use machines with engines (according to
European directives). Tractors are such machines. It is
your responsibility to know these regulations and comply
with them in the area or the situation in which the tractor
is used.
2
Such regulations include, without limitation, the following
instructions for a safe use of the tractor.
WARNING: The operator must not be under
influence of alcohol or drugs that can im-
pair his/her coordination or alert conditions.
An operator under prescription for narcotic
drugs needs a medical certificate stating if
he/she is able to use the tractor safely.
Take the following precautions:
• Do not allow children or unauthorized persons to drive
or use your tractor. Keep others away from your area
of work.
• Fasten your seat belt if the tractor is fitted with an
upright safety frame or a cab.
• Whenever possible, do not operate the tractor near
ditches, pits or holes in the ground. Slow down when
steering, driving on slopes or driving over rough, slip-
pery or muddy terrain.
• Keep clear from slopes too steep to operate safely.
• Drive carefully, specially on headlands, on road and
around trees.
• Never let anyone else get on to the tractor or the
implement.
• Hitch only to the drawbar and recommended hitch
points. Never hitch above the central line of the rear
axle.
• Operate the tractor smoothly, with no sudden turns,
starts or stops. Apply the parking brake whenever the
tractor is stopped.
• Do not modify or remove any part of the equipment,
and do not use couplings not designed for your trac-
tor.
11
Safety notes

SAFETY FRAME
[4.1.q]

A safety frame is fitted as standard equipment to the

tractor at the time of factory assembly. It the safety frame
was removed or modified, the tractor should be equipped
with a new original and approved safety frame. The safety
frame reduces the risk of injury should the tractor tip over.
Tipping over without a safety structure can cause damage
and serious injury (Fig.2-1).

WARNING: Always wear the safety belt with

the protective structure in the upright posi-
tion.
If the front two-post safety frame is
mounted, it may be collapsed only to park
the tractor or enter low spaces. Do NON
wear the safety belt when the frame is Fig.2-1
collapsed. NEVER keep the safety frame in
the collapsed position when working with
the tractor. For further prescription,see the
Chapter Safety structure - ROPS in the Ope-
ration Section.

Use
• Before using the tractor ensure that the safety frame is
not damaged, that it is securely fastened to the tractor
and, if a hinged section is fitted, that it is in upright
position and secured.
• If the safety frame has been removed from the trac-
tor, or collapsed for a specific operation, it must be
refitted or erected immediately using proper tools and
applying the recommended torque value.
• DO NOT ATTACH chains, ropes or cables to the safety
frame for pulling purposes; this will cause the tractor Fig.2-2
to tip backwards. Always pull from the tractor drawbar.
• Seat belts must always be worn and adjusted snugly
except when operating with a folded down safety
frame (Fig.2-2).
• From time to time, check the seat belt for damage and
replace it if worn or damaged (Fig.2-2).
SAFETY - CAB
Damaged safety frames The safety cab is designed on purpose for this tractor
If the tractor has rolled over or the safety frame has been series and complies with all law requirements concerning
damaged (such as striking an overhead object during safety and noise level.
transport), the safety frame must be replaced to provide
the original degree of protection. The safety cab complies with international safety stan-
After an accident, check the safety frame, the driving seat, dards prescribed by laws in force. It must NEVER be drilled
the safety belts and the anchor points of the safety belts. or modified in order to install accessories or implements.
Replace all damaged parts before using the tractor again. The cab components MUST NOT be welded, nor repaired
if damaged. Never attach tow chains or ropes to the cab
DO NOT WELD, DRILL, BEND OR STRAIGHTEN main frame.
THE SAFETY FRAME. To do so reduces the degree
WARNING: Tractors equipped with cab have
of protection ensured by the original equipment. a protection against objects and loads that
might fall from above in typical work condi-
WARNING: Tractors equipped with safety tions, but not against objects and loads that
frame have no protection against objects might be projected into the area normally
and loads that might fall from above or be occupied by the operator [4.1.o].
projected into the area normally occupied
by the operator [4.1.o].

12
 Safety notes

PRECAUTIONS FOR WORKING IN

SAFETY

Protect yourself
Wear all protective clothing and any personal protection
devices called for by the work conditions. Never take any
risks (Fig. 2-3).
You need the following protective clothing:
- A hard hat.
- Safety goggles or mask.
- Hearing protection.
- Respirator or filter mask.
- Clothing for bad weather.
- Reflective clothing.
2
- Heavy-duty gloves (neoprene for chemicals, leather for
rough work). Fig.2-3
- Safety shoes.

DO NOT wear loose clothing, jewellery or other items

and tie up long hair that could get entangled in controls
or moving parts.

A first aid kit should be available on any work site (Fig.2- - Use safety goggles
3b). - Use a protective mask
- Use protective headsets on all tractors wi-
WARNING: The tractor is designed and built to avoid thout cab.
any fire risks during normal operation. Therefore, it - Use heavy-duty gloves.
is not provided of a self-extinguishing system or a fire - Use safety footwear.
extinguisher on board as a standard. The tractor is - Use a hard hat.
anyway designed to install a 1 kg dust fire extinguisher
complying with UNI EN 3/7 2004 standard. The fire
extinguisher must be mounted in the reserved and First aid box
indicated position (Fig.2-4a & Fig.2-4b). If the tractor’s owner or safety manager provides the
The fire extinguisher with its support can be bought tractor with a first aid box, we recommend storing the
as a kit by our Dealers or authorized workshops. The box in a suitable place when the tractor is not used for a
kit consists in a fire extinguisher, support, fastening long time, owing to its highly perishable content.
means, directions for its mounting and a decal to be
applied in the indicated area. The decal, when applied,
declares that the tractor may not be used if the ire
extinguisher is not in its place.
It is up to the owner of the farm or to the person
responsible for safety at the farm to judge the oppor-
tunity of using the tractor in areas at high fire risk.
They are also responsible for use of the tractor with
the extinguisher duly mounted.
Fig.2-3b

Fig.2-4a Fig.2-4b

13
Safety notes

Know your equipment

Know your tractor. Know how to operate all equipment
on your machine and the implements and attachments
used with it. Know the purpose of all the controls, gauges
and dials. Know the rated load capacity, speed range,
braking and steering characteristics, turning radius, and
operating clearances.

Keep in mind that rain, snow, ice, loose gravel, soft

ground, etc. can change the way your tractor operates..
Under poor conditions, slow down and be extra careful,
engage four-wheel drive, if fitted.

Study the DANGER, WARNING or CAUTION safety Fig.2-5

signs on your tractor and the information signs also.

READ THIS OPERATOR INSTRUCTION BOOK BEFORE

STARTING THE ENGINE.

STUDY IT BEFORE YOU START WORK (Fig. 2-5).

IF THERE IS SOMETHING YOU DO NOT UNDERSTAND,

ASK SOMEONE SPECIALISED (e.g. your Dealer) FOR
EXPLANATION.

IMPORTANT: This manual covers general safe practices

for agricultural tractors. It must always be kept with the
tractor. For further copies contact your Dealer.

Use all available protective devices

Keep all protective devices in place and securely faste-
ned. Make certain all guards, shields and safety signs are
properly installed, as specified, and are in good condition.

Fig.2-6

In order to guarantee safety for all bystan-

ders and for yourself, always keep your
tractor in top service condition and check
that the following devices are provided:

• A safety frame which must always be mounted in the • Means to access the driver’s seat.
upright position (Fig.2-6). • Driver’s seat.
• Safety belts complying with law requirements of the • Controls.
• Operator’s manual.
various countries.
• Power take-off shields. • Slow Moving Vehicle emblem (SMV). Additional
safety guards, lights or decals and a back-up alarm
• Shields against heat. (Fig.2-38 and 2-39) (North America).
• Shields and guards against shearing and pinching.
• Rear view mirrors. Know which devices are required for safe operation of
• Anti-deflagration shields on tubes, if required.
• Dust filters in the cab your tractor. Use them. Make sure they are in place and
• Decals and pictograms. in good condition. Never remove or disconnect any safety
device.

14
 Safety notes

Check the equipment WARNING: Diesel fuel or hydraulic fluid under

Before you begin your working day, take time to check
your tractor and ensure that all systems are in good ope-
rational condition.
• DO NOT smoke while refuelling the tractor. Keep any
type of open flame away (Fig. 2-7). [4.1.l]
• Check for loose, broken, missing, or damaged parts.
Have everything put into good repair. Make certain
all safety devices are in place.
pressure can penetrate the skin or eyes and
cause serious personal injury, blindness or
death. Fluid leaks, under pressure, may not
be visible. Use a piece of cardboard or wood
to find leaks. Never use your bare hand. Wear
safety goggles for eye protection. If any fluid
is injected into the skin, it MUST be surgically
removed within a few hours by a doctor fami-
liar with this type of injury (Fig. 2-8).

• Check safety frame and seat belt for damage. A da-
maged safety frame or seat belt MUST be replaced.
• Ensure that implements and attachments are properly
installed and that the tractor and implement PTO RPM
ratings match.
Before applying pressure to the fuel or hydraulic system,
be sure all connections are tight and that lines, pipes, 2
and hoses are not damaged. Before disconnecting fuel
or hydraulic lines, be sure to relieve all pressure.

• Check the tires for cuts, bulges and correct pressure. Make sure that all hydraulic lines are correctly installed
and not tangled.
Replace worn or damaged tyres. Check foot and par-
king brakes for proper operation. Adjust if necessary.
WARNING: Liquid cooling systems build up
• Stop the engine and wait for it to cool before refuelling. pressure as the engine gets hot. Before remo-
• Check the engine oil level and add oil if required. ving the radiator cap, stop the engine and let
the system cool.
• Perform all maintenance procedures outlined in the
maintenance and adjustment section of this manual.  • Check the engine cooling system and add coolant as
required.
• Check that the PTO drive locking devices are latched.
• Check that the tractor PTO shield and driveline guards
are in place and operating properly.

• Check the tractor and implement hydraulic system.

Have any leaks or damaged parts repaired or renewed.

• HYDRODYNAMIC SYSTEMS: HOSES Hoses are an

important component in modern machines. Hoses
can change their characteristics in the course of time
because of pressure, vibrations, weather etc. Laws
in force prescribe that hoses are replaced within 6
years from their construction. WE RECOMMEND
COMPLIANCE WITH THIS RULE. [4.1.i]

Fig.2-7

WARNING: When auxiliary control valves

are used, their quick couplings can reach
high temperatures. Therefore, safety glo-
ves suitable for such temperatures must be
worn every time the connected implements
are connected to or disconnected from the
couplings.

Fig.2-8

15
Safety notes
Clean the tractor
• Keep work surfaces and engine compartments clean.
• Before cleaning the machine, always lower imple-
ments to the ground, place transmission in neutral,
engage the parking brake, shut off the engine and
remove the key.
• Clean steps, pedals and floor. Remove grease or oil.
Brush away dust or mud. In winter, scrape away snow
and ice. Remember - slippery surfaces are dangerous.
• When plastic parts need to be cleaned (such as con-
sole, instrument panel, monitors, indicators etc), do
not use petrol, paraffin, diluents etc.
They could cause discoloration, cracking or warping
of the cleaned parts..
These parts should ONLY be cleaned with water,
neutral soap and a soft cloth.
• Remove and store implements, keys, hitches etc. in
their proper places.
Protect the environment
• It is illegal to pollute drains, water courses or soil.
Use authorized waste disposal facilities, including
civic amenity sites and garages providing facilities
for disposal of used oil. If in doubt, contact your local
authority for advice.
• To get to know the correct methods to dispose of
oils, filters, tyres etc. contact your Dealer or the local
agency for waste recycling.
• Only for North America:
The safety sheets of each material give information
on chemicals contained in a product, procedures to
use it safely, first-aid and procedure to be followed
in case of leakage or spills. In all North America such
safety sheets are available at the Dealer's.
Before any maintenance on the machine, refer to
the above mentioned safety sheets for fluids, oils
etc. used in this machine. The sheets inform about
risks and safe maintenance procedures. We strongly
recommend to follow these indications during any
maintenance operations.
• Disposal of the tractor: The tractor is made up of
parts subject to rules and laws for their disposal.
When the tractor is not used any more, it must be
disposed of through proper agencies according to
such rules. Do not pollute the environment with the
tractor or its parts.
Fig.2-9
16
SAFETY - TRACTOR MAINTENANCE
[4.1.h]
CAUTION: With exception of normal service, as ex-
plained in the Maintenance section, all other servicing
or reparations must be carried out by properly skilled
personnel in authorised workshops.
• DO NOT carry out maintenance operations while the
engine is hot or the tractor is moving (Fig.2-9).
WARNING: Hot parts of the machine are suit-
ably guarded, wherever possible. This does
not exclude, however, that great care should
be used when working on the machine, to
avoid burns or scalding [4.1.n].
• Before any adjustments or servicing on the electrical
system, disconnect the battery by operating the mas-
ter disconnect switch (if equipped) or disconnecting
the cables of the battery. See the section concerning
battery servicing.
• To prevent fire or explosion, do not go with free flames
near the battery or cold starting device. Carefully fol-
low the directions for the use of coupling cables to
avoid sparks that may cause an explosion.
• Consult your Dealer for any repairs or adjustments;
such works should be carried out by specialised
workmanship.
• Check regularly that all nuts and bolts are securely
tightened, specially the nuts in wheel hubs, disks or
rims. Tighten to the prescribed driving torques.
• Check the oil level at regular intervals and top up
if required.
• Check the brakes regularly, top up the reservoir
and/or adjust where necessary. Make sure that the
brakes are evenly adjusted, especially when using
a trailer.
WARNING: When it is necessary to carry out
service, filling up, cleaning or adjustment
operations in places at an height above 1.5
m (e.g. engine coolant reservoir or cab air
filters, work light lamps etc.) a stable and safe
mean (e.g. a ladder) is required to reach the
service point.
WARNING: Work and road lights can be very
hot and dangerous if on since a long time.
Take care to avoid contacts that could cause
burns. If work on these lights is needed, turn
them off and let them cool down.
Always use safety gloves suitable for high
temperatures.
 Safety notes

If the tractor must be lifted for servicing, take it to a sui-

tably equipped workshop.
Carry out the following operations before any operation
about the tractor: engage the four-wheel drive, the first
gear and the parking brake and put chocks to the wheels
touching the ground.
Before lifting the tractor, avoid its swinging by means of
wooden wedges applied to the front axle (Fig.2-9b): the
chocks must avoid any swinging of the tractor.
Use jack lifts of suitable capacity and apply them at the
centre of the front and rear axles (Fig. 2-9b and Fig.2-9c)
paying due attention to weight distribution. [4.1.k]
No decals for the lifting point are applied on the tractor, as
they would be too difficult to apply in the available spaces
2
and would be all too easily removed or effaced during Fig.2-9b
normal operation of the tractor. Apply the jack lift to the
lifting points (Fig. 2-10a ) according to the type of operation
and following the safety procedures given before.

WARNING: DO NOT raise the tractor using the tow-

ing hook.

WARNING: Never work under a vehicle only

supported by rams

Fig.2-9c
SAFETY - STARTING UP
Warn bystanders before starting the engine.
Before starting, walk around the whole tractor and any
attached equipment. Make sure that no one is under, on,
or close to the tractor or equipment. Let other workers
and bystanders know you are starting up and don’t start
until everyone is clear of the tractor, implements and
towed equipment.

Make sure that everyone, particularly children, is in a

safe position before starting the engine.

Mount and dismount safely [4.1.e].

Always use ‘three point contact’ with the machine, and
face the machine when you mount it. Three point contact Fig.2-10a
means both hands and one foot or one hand and both
feet are in contact with the machine at all times during
mounting and dismounting.

Clean your shoes and wipe your hands before climbing on.
Use handrails, grab handles, ladders or steps (as provided)
when mounting or dismounting.

NEVER use control levers as a hand hold and NEVER step

on foot controls when mounting or dismounting.

NEVER try to go on or off the moving tractor.

17
Safety notes

Safety at starting [4.1.c]

WARNING: Make sure that there is enough
ventilation before starting the engine. Never
start the engine in an enclosed space. Exhaust
fumes may cause asphyxiation (Fig.2-10b).

Make sure that the tractor dual brake pedals are locked
together at all times unless you are making turns in the
field which require independent use of the brakes. Make
sure the brakes are properly adjusted so that both brakes
engage at the same time.

Adjust the seat and fasten your seat belt (if applicable, Fig.2-10b
according the description in this book),

Always start the engine from the operator’s seat, after de-
pressing the clutch pedal, with all the transmission levers
and PTO and auxiliary spool valve control levers in neutral.

DANGER: The engine must be started with

the ignition key only from the driver’s seat.
DO NOT attempt to start the engine by
shorting across the terminals of the starter
motor. If the starter circuit is bypassed to
neutral, the tractor could start with an en-
gaged gear, with danger of serious injury or
death to bystanders (Fig.2-11).

Fig.2-11

Follow recommended starting procedures.

Follow the starting procedures recommended in the
Operation section of this Operator Instruction Book. This
includes normal starting, cold starting, and the use of
starting fluids.

Overhaul the controls.

After engine ignition, overhaul all instruments and lights.
Be sure that all are operating correctly. If the machine
does not respond properly to controls, DO NOT use it
until the fault is mended.

Make sure that the starter motor solenoid valve fuse is Fig.2-12
always installed.

Starting fluid

CAUTION: Do not inject fluids (ether) to make the

engine easier to start in cold weather. The tractor is
equipped with a cold weather starting system (Fig.2-
12).

Before starting the tractor, make sure that there are no

persons or hindrances in its operating range (Fig.2-13).

Fig.2-13

18
 Safety notes
DIRECTIONS TO AVOID IMPROPER USE OF THE TRACTOR

WORKING IN SAFETY Do not start the tractor without ensuring a perfect com-
mand of speed and steering controls (Fig.2-14).
WARNING: An unbalanced tractor could over-
turn and cause injury or death. If required, put
ballast weights on their front support and on
rear wheels as described in this section of the
Operation chapter. Ballast weights must be used
according to the manufacturer’s directions.
NEVER add extra counterweights to compensate
for an overload. It is better to reduce the load.

WARNING: Keep all parts of your body inside

the operator's compartment while operating
2
the tractor.

Follow the rules when using your tractor.

Make sure your tractor is ready for the job it must do.
Know the rated load capacities of your tractor and never
exceed them. Be certain that any equipment or imple-
ments you intend to use DO NOT exceed the load rating
of your tractor. Be sure the tractor and implement PTO
rev/min match. Fig.2-14

Keep in mind that tractors normally operate on uneven,

unpaved, and often bumpy or sloping surfaces. Operating
conditions can reduce the amount of weight you should
carry or pull.
Follow safe operating practices
• Operate the controls smoothly - don't jerk the steering
wheel or other controls.
• Before starting, inspect the work area to establish
the best and safest procedure. Plan your work
so that you drive as straight as possible forward.
Beware of trenches, pits, ditches, slopes, trunks
or stumps, ponds etc. Watch for any possibly
dangerous condition. If you are using a front loader
or foldable implements or implements with high
components, watch out for obstacle in the tractor's
way.

• DO NOT get on or off a moving tractor. Keep a firm
grip on the steering wheel at all times, with the thumbs
clear of the spokes when driving the tractor.
• Make sure you have adequate clearance in all direc-
tions for tractor, cab, asfety frame and implement.
• NEVER play games with a tractor or equipment.
WARNING: Accidental contact with high-volta-
ge lines causes death. In case of contact with
high-voltage conductors DO NOT leave the
tractor, but move the tractor and/or the loader
in such a way as to eliminate the contact and
reach a safe distance (Fig.2-15).

• NEVER attempt to work the controls except from the

operator's seat.  
 
• Before getting off the tractor, always disengage the 
PTO, lower all attachments and implements to the
ground, place the tractor in neutral, engage parking 

brake, shut off the engine and remove the key.



DO NOT touch, lean on, or reach through any implement

mechanism or permit others to do so.

Stay alert. Should something break, come loose, or fail to

operate in your equipment, stop work, shut off the engi-
ne, inspect the machine and have repairs or adjustments
made before resuming operation.

Fig.2-15

19
Safety notes

Beware of other people

• Think about what you are going to do. Never al-
low persons that are not qualified or suitably skilled
to operate your tractor. They could be a danger for
themselves or for others.

WARNING: Your tractor is designed to be ope-

rated by one person. DO NOT allow others to
ride on the tractor or the implement (Fig.2-
16). Never allow anyone to ride on the imple-
ments or other equipment including trailers,
except on certain harvesting equipment, spe-
cifically designed for riders during the actual
harvest operation only (not during transport).
Such equipment must have provision for a safe
riding area. NEVER allow children on a tractor.

WARNING: Make sure you can safely control

speed and driving direction of the tractor
before moving it. Start slowly until you are Fig.2-16
sure everything is operating regularly. After
starting, turn the steering right and left to
check for correct operation. Check steering
and brake system for operation. If differential
is locked, DO NOT operate at high speed or
turn the tractor until the differential lock is
disengaged.

• Keep others away from your operation area. Never

allow anyone to stand or pass under a raised imple-
ment (Fig.2-17).

• DO NOT lift objects that cannot be contained safely

in the bucket, get the appropriate attachment. Never
allow anyone to stand on the safety frames or fend-
ers.

• When using a loader, avoid sudden stops, starts,

turns, or changes of direction. Keep loads as near
as possible to the ground during transport.

• Never stand (or allow anyone else to stand) in front

of, under, or behind loaded or loading equipment. Fig.2-17
Never drive a tractor up to someone standing in
front of a fixed object.

WARNING: NEVER lift a load over anyone

(Fig.2-17).

• Keep others away from articulation joints, hitches,

drawbar, lift arms, PTO drives, cylinders, belts, pul-
leys, and other moving parts. Keep safety guards in
place.
WARNING: NEVER stand, or allow anyone else
to stand between the tractor and implement
or between the tractor and trailer, unless the
engine is turned off and the parking brake
is engaged, a gear is engaged and all attach-
ments or implements are lowered to the
ground [4.2.m].
WARNING: Footstep tractors equipped with
just a safety frame are never equipped with
an approved sun roof at the factory. If the
owner wants to mount a device as protection
from sun or rain, such device must not be a
danger during normal operation or in case of
overturning. Sun roofs normally available on
the market are no protection for the driver
against falling or penetrating objects. The
decal associated to the sun roof indicates that
it is not a protection against objects falling
from above (FOPS).

20
 Safety notes

Risk of overturning
[4.1.m]

For your safety, it is mandatory that all footstep tractors

are fitted with original Roll Over Protective Structures and
seat belts (Fig.2-18).

In the event of overturning with a tractor fitted with a cab

or ROPS, hold the steering wheel firmly and DO NOT at-
tempt to leave the seat until the tractor has come to rest.
If the doors are locked, leave the tractor through the duly
indicated emergency exits (Fig.2-18).

IMPORTANT: The safe working practices listed hereunder

2
concerns only a few cases of overturning risk. The list is
therefore NOT comprehensive of all possible cases.

To avoid side overturns

• Set the wheel track at the widest setting suitable for Fig.2-18
the job being done.

• Lock the brake pedals together before driving at

transport speeds.

• Reduce speed to match operating conditions. If the

tractor is equipped with a front-end loader, carry the
bucket and load as low as possible.

• Make wide slow turns at reduced speed. DON'T let

your tractor bounce. You may loose steering control.

• DON'T pull a load too heavy for your tractor. It could

run away on the down slope or the tractor could
jackknife around a towed load.

• DON'T brake suddenly. Apply brakes smoothly and

gradually.

• When going down a slope use the throttle to slow

the tractor engine and use the same gear you would Fig.2-19
use to up the slope. Shift into gear before you start
downhill.

• Engage four-wheel drive (if equipped); this will give

greater stability.

WARNING: NEVER disengage the clutch or

attempt to shift gear after you have started
downhill.

• It is always preferable to travel straight up or down a

steep slope rather than across it.

• Do not overload a front implement or a trailer. Use

suitable counterweights to keep the tractor stable
(Fig.2-20).

• If a load is towed at transport speed, the drawbar

must be locked in central position.

• NEVER use the tractor to round up animals or cattle.

Fig.2-20

21
Safety notes

• Avoid crossing steep slopes if possible. If you

must do so, avoid any holes or depressions on the
downhill side. Avoid any stumps, rocks, bumps or
raised areas on the uphill side. When operating near
ditches or banks, always keep your tractor behind
the shear line (A, Fig.2-22). Avoid ditches, embank-
ments and river banks which might cave in (Fig.2-21).

Fig.2-21 Fig.2-22

• If it is necessary to cross a steep slope, avoid tur-

ning uphill, slow down and make a wide turn. Travel
directly up or down the slope, never across it. When
travelling up or down a slope, keep the heavy end of
the tractor pointed uphill. (Fig.2-23).

• When travelling across a slope with side mounted

implements, keep the implement on the uphill side.
Don't raise the implements. Keep them as low to the
ground as possible when crossing a slope.

• Avoid crossing steep slopes if possible. If you must

do so, avoid any holes or depressions on the downhill
side. Avoid any stumps, rocks, bumps or raised areas
on the uphill side (Fig.2-25).

Fig. 2-25

Fig. 2-24

Fig. 2-23

22
 Safety notes

To avoid rear overturns

IMPORTANT: The safe working practices listed hereunder

concerns only a few cases of overturning risk. The list is
therefore NOT comprehensive of all possible cases.

WARNING: Hitching to the rear axle, or any

other point above the swinging drawbar, can
cause a rear overturn.

• DO NOT pull anything using the top link connection,

or from any point above the centre line of the rear
axle. Always use an approved drawbar, and only use
a drawbar pin that locks into place.
2
• High hitching can cause rear overturn, which may
cause serious injury or death. Hitch loads to the Fig. 2-26
drawbar only.

• If the transversal drilled drawbar mounted on the

three-point linkage is used for towing operations on
the field, the lower links must be kept in the lowered
position.

• Use front counterweights to increase tractor stability

when towing a heavy load or to counter balance a
heavy rear mounted implement (Fig.2-26).

• DO NOT overload your tractor and DO NOT ballast it

beyond its carrying capacity. Never add ballast weight
to conterbalance an overload. Reduce the load instead
(Fig.2-27).

WARNING: Overload is ALWAYS dangerous.

Check the load capacity of your tractor and
NEVER exceed it (Fig.2-28). See the Technical
Specifications section.
Fig. 2-27

Fig.2-28

23
Safety notes

• Start slowly and increase your speed gradually. DO

NOT rev the engine or drop the clutch. If the tractor
is attached to a heavy load, or immovable object,
improper clutching may cause overturn (Fig.2-30 and
2-31).

• If the front part of the tractor begins lifting, disengage

the clutch at once (Fig.2-29).

• If your tractor is bogged down in mud or frozen to

the ground, DO NOT attempt to drive forwards. The
tractor can rotate around its rear wheels and overturn
(Fig.2-29). Lift any attached implement and attempt
to BACK OUT. If this is not possible, tow it out with
another vehicle.

• If you get stuck in a ditch, BACK OUT, if possible. If

you must go forward, do it slowly and carefully.
Fig.2-29
• When driving on a slope, with or without an implement
mounted on the back, you should drive in reverse when
moving uphill and forward when moving downhill.

• A tractor with a loaded front-end should be backed

down the slope and travel forward uphill. Keep the
loader bucket as low as possible. (Fig.2-31b)
• Always keep the tractor in gear when going downhill.
Never let the tractor coast with clutch disengaged or
transmission in neutral.

Fig.2-30

Fig.2-31

Fig.2-31b

24
 Safety notes

General operating hazards [4.2.e]

• Ensure that the PTO shield (1) is in place and that the
cap (2) is fitted when the PTO driveline is not in use
(Fig. 2-32).

• Before connecting, disconnecting, cleaning or

adjusting implements driven by the power take-off,
disengage the PTO, turn the engine off, remove the
ignition key and make sure that the PTO shaft is at
standstill (Fig.2-33).

• Ensure that all the PTO driveline guards are in place

and observe all safety signs (Fig. 2-33).

• Make sure that everyone stands clear of the tractor 2

before engaging the PTO. During stationary use of
your tractor, always shift the gear lever, the reverse
shuttle and the ranges to neutral, engage the parking
brake and secure the wheels of tractor and implement
with wooden wedges or chocks.

• When operating mobile PTO driven equipment, never

leave the tractor seat until the PTO drive is disengaged,
the transmission is in neutral, the parking brake is Fig.2-32
engaged, the engine shut off and the key removed.

• DO NOT use PTO adaptors, reducers or extensions

as they extend the PTO coupler and universal joint
out beyond the protection offered by the PTO shield.

• The top link and lift rods must not be extended beyond
the point where threads begin to show.

DANGER: NEVER attempt to unplug the

hydraulic connections, or adjust an imple-
ment with the engine running or the PTO
drive in operation. There is a great danger of
serious or deadly injuries (Fig.2-34).

• When using chemicals, carefully follow the chemical

manufacturer's instructions for use, storage and dispo-
sal. Also follow the chemical application equipment
manufacturer's instructions.

• When operating under poor visibility conditions, or Fig.2-33

in the dark, use your tractor field lights and reduce
your ground speed. (DO NOT use your field lights
when travelling on a roadway because rear pointed
white lights are illegal except when reversing and
may confuse following drivers).

• Operate your tractor with the wheels set at the widest

setting possible, consistent with the particular task
you are performing. To adjust wheel settings refer to
Maintenance and Adjustment section.

• Reduce your speed when operating over rough or

slippery ground and when foliage restricts your view
of hazards.

• DO NOT make sharp turns at high speed.

Fig.2-34

25
Safety notes

Implements and attachments

[4.5.1.1]

WARNING: Use exclusively front loader ap-

proved by the tractor’s manufacturer, with CE
mark and parallelogram type. The installation
and modification of the tractor must be car-
ried out with the highest technical standards
by specialised workshops with qualified
personnel. Such workshops must be able to
guarantee and attest the risk analysis provi-
ded for in the Machinery Directive 2006/42/
EC concerning the foreseen and predictable
use of the tractor with front loader, in order Fig.2-35
to carry out all required adaptations of the
tractor. Use the front loader and all supplied
WARNING: When a tractor with safety frame
equipment as prescribed by the loader’s ope-
is equipped with a front loader, there is a re-
rator manual.
sidual risk due to incorrect and improper us
of the implement. The risk is due to objects
IMPORTANT: Keep the loader’s operation manual together
falling from above. THE OPERATOR HAS NO
with the tractor’s manual, always at hand in the storage
PROTECTION AGAINST SUCH DANGER.
compartment of the tractor. Before driving or operation
your tractor, it is mandatory to read this manual very ca- To reduce risks, the following precautions are to be
refully, with special attention to the chapter concerning strictly observed:
safety rules. - Do not lift the front loader to such a height that
objects could fall on the operator.
WARNING: Use of the front loader and of - Use only loaders equipped with load self-leveling
the tractor equipped with front loader, if system, commonly defined as parallelogram type.
not correctly carried out, and handling not - Use only implements that are specifically dedi-
secured loads constitute a serious danger for cated to the work to be done. Strictly follow all
the operator and everyone standing by, due directions and warnings mentioned by the loader
to possible objects falling from above. (Fig. handbook [4.1.g].
2-35) [4.5.a] - Use the tractor and implement carefully. Drive on
• Three-point hitch and side mounted implements make flat ground and avoid holes, ditches and trenches.
Do not turn, start or stop abruptly.
a much larger arc when turning than towed equipment.
Make certain to maintain enough clearance for safe
turning [4.2.b].
• To use mounted, semi-mounted or towed equipment
and trailers it is required to use exclusively CE marked
implements, after reading their operation handbooks
carefully, giving maximum attention to risks connected
with their association to the tractor.
• Implements must be hitched to the tractor by means
of the three-point linkage [4.2.a]. It is therefore neces-
sary to check couplings for compatibility according
to their classes.
The implement has to be fitted with suitable supports
in order to avoid tipping or accidental shifting during
hitching.
Always check three-directional fastening to the tractor
of the mounted or semi-mounted implement, to avoid
dangerous swinging and shaking during transport and
work that could jeopardize the stability of the tractor- Fig. 2-36
implement assembly.
• The cardan shaft must be always CE-marked, provided
with suitable guards and suitable to tractor-implement
coupling. Follow all directions of the operation manual, • Improper use of the drawbar, even if correctly posi-
concerning both the fastening according to connection tioned, can cause a rear overturn.
direction and safety rules to avoid rotation of protec-
tions and overlaying of the telescopic tubes and the
technically allowable slant. An excessive slant could
damage the power take-off guards [4.2.e] [4.2.k].
• Hitch loads to the drawbar only. Towing or attaching
to other locations may cause the tractor to overturn
(Fig.2-36)

26
 Safety notes

• Check for correct coupling between tow hook and

trailer. See the Towing Attachments chapter.
• Use ballast weight as recommended. NEVER add more
ballast to compensate a higher load than allowed.
Reduce load.
• Only North American markets. A safety chain will
help control drawn equipment should it be acciden-
tally separated from the drawbar while transporting.
Using the proper adaptor parts, attach the chain to
the tractor drawbar support or other specified anchor
location. Provide only enough slack in the chain to
permit turning. See your Dealer for a chain with a
strength rating equal to, or greater than the gross
weight of the towed machine (Fig.2-37).
2
Fig.2-37
Road transport
Before operating your tractor on a public road, a number
of precautions must be taken.

• Family yourself - and comply - with all local bye-laws,

and national laws appropriate to your tractor.
• Lock both brake pedals together.
• Raise all implements to their transport position and
lock them in place.
• Place all implements into their narrowest transport
configuration.
• Disengage the PTO and differential lock.
• Make sure tractor and equipment are equipped with
slow moving vehicle (SMV) signs or beacon if the
law requires them (Fig.2-38 and 2-39).
• Make sure any required clearance flags or hazard
lights are in place and in working order.
• Make sure you use a proper safety hitch pin with a
safety clip retainer.
• Clean off all reflectors and road lights, front and rear,
and be certain they are in working order.
• Three-point hitch and implements jutting out from
Fig.2-38 - Use the symbol in force in your country
the sides make a much larger arc when turning than
towed equipment. Make certain to maintain enough
clearance for safe turning.

Road circulation rules

Before operating your tractor on a public road, a number
of precautions must be taken.

WARNING: DO NOT allow any passengers on

the tractor or towed equipment.

• Know the route you are going to travel.

• Use the prescribed lights or, if required, the rotating
beacon, both in the daytime and in the night-time
(Fig.2-39).
• North America - Use regulation lights and blinking
hazard lights when travelling on road.
• Use caution when towing a load at transport speeds
especially if the towed equipment is NOT equipped
with brakes.
• Observe all local or national regulations regarding the
road speed of your tractor.
• Use extreme caution when driving on snow-covered
or slippery roads.

Fig.2-39

27
Safety notes

• Wait for traffic to clear before entering a public road.

• Beware of blind intersections. Slow down until you
have a clear view.
• DO NOT attempt to pass at any intersection.
• Slow down for turns and curves.
• Make wide, gentle turns.
• Signal your intent to slow, stop or turn.
• Shift to a lower gear before going up or downhill.
(Fig.2-40)
• Keep tractor in gear. Never coast with the clutch
disengaged or transmission in neutral (Fig.2-40).
• Check for correct coupling between power steering on
the tractor and corresponding system on the tractor.
• STAY OUT of the path of oncoming traffic.
• Drive in your correct lane keeping as near to the curb
as possible.
• If traffic builds up behind you, pull off the road and
let it go by.
• Drive defensively. Anticipate what other drivers might
do.
• When towing a heavy load, start braking sooner than
normal and slow down gradually.
• Watch out for overhead obstructions (bridges, trees Fig.2-40
etc.).

SAFETY - AFTER USE [4.2.c]

Always stop the tractor safely (DO NO park the tractor on

a slope). Engage the parking brake, engage the Park-Lock
(if equipped), disengage the PTO, engage the lowest gear,
lower any implement to the ground, stop the engine and
remove the ignition key BEFORE leaving the driver’s seat
(Fig.2-41).

Fig.2-41

28

Further notes
The following notes are designed to complete the Opera-
tion and Maintenance Manual to ensure that your tractor
always works safely, reliably and efficiently.
Tractors are mainly designed for towing implements that
are held by a drawbar or three-point linkage or for driving
implements using the PTO.
To obtain the greatest possible towing force, particularly
when using a tractor with dual rear wheels, you should
observe the following rules concerning axle loads and
wheel slip.
If an extra implement is attached, the extra loads must
conform to the specifications given in the Manual or by
your dealer.
1. Front axle payload: 4WD tractors.
The front axle normally bears 40% of the tractor
weight on the road without implements; it may thus
be necessary to add an extra weight on the front end
to ensure that the front axle has traction.
If an implement is mounted on the front end of the
tractor, check the weight of the fully loaded implement
by placing the front axle on a scale: the maximum
axle load must be less than the capacity of the front
axle.
Check the maximum payload capacity of the front
axle (maximum weight allowed on it) in your Opera-
tion and Maintenance Manual).
2. Rear axle payload.
The maximum permissible payload for the rear axle
depends on whether or not the tractor is carrying a
weight or towing a load.
When the tractor is only carrying a load, without tow-
ing, the wheels must have sufficient capacity that is
ensured if the tyres are of the exact size and have
the specified number of plies.
In certain conditions, extra weight may be applied to
the rear axle but it is not normally necessary unless
the ground offers very little grip.
When fully loaded, the weight of the tractor must be
less than the maximum permissible ballasted weight
since the tractor cannot be loaded right up to the
maximum static payload for each of the axles, front
and rear, at the same time.
3. Ballast and wheel slip.
Wheel slip must be measured for the tractor to oper-
ate efficiently during tillage.
On normal terrain in good operating conditions, wheel
slip should be between 4 and 10%.
Safety notes
On loose soil, wheel slip can exceed 12%.
If wheel slip is found to be greater than this amount,
proceed with care as operating conditions might
quickly become unstable and cause early tyre wear.
In certain conditions, it might be better to add ballast
in order to reduce wheel slip, but this increases the
workload of the transmission and thus reduces the
working life of the tractor.
Read the operation handbook or ask your Dealer who
will be able to help you ascertain the maximum ballast
weight you can use in normal working conditions.
Using dual wheels or wider tyres, the tractor will have
greater grip but the workload on the transmission will
2
also be greater in dry and difficult soil conditions.
Dual wheels or wider tyres can sometimes be
mounted for use on slippery or sandy terrain but the
axle weight on hard, dry surfaces must be limited as
the greater grip provided by wider tyres can damage
the transmission.
The only torque limiter in transmission is wheel slip.
4. Front axle lead when four-wheel drive is en-
gaged.
In a 4WD tractor, the ground speed of the front wheels
must be slightly greater than that of the rear wheels,
in order to ensure traction.
The front wheel advance must be preferably between
1% and 4%, at an rate not over 5%.
Greater percentages may be used only on very soft
ground.
The tyres supplied with your tractor have been checked
for the correct advance of the front wheels, but when
you change them, make sure you use tyres of the
same make and size in order to maintain the same
speed ratio between front and rear wheels.
If tyres of different makes are used, their size and
internal pressure may modify this ground speed ratio,
or advance. This could increase the load on the front
axle and lead to unacceptable operating conditions,
excessive tyre wear and, in extreme conditions, dam-
age to the front axle or to the transmission.
Changes in the weight of the tractor, in the pressure
or size of the tyres can cause the tyres themselves
to bounce. This is not only annoying for the driver
in the cab, but it can also cause a loss of grip and
excessive wear in the transmission unit.
29
Safety notes
5. Economy PTO.
As shown in the Operation and Maintenance Manual,
the economy PTO on large tractors is a feature that
makes it possible to use the PTO at standard speed
using lower engine RPM rates.
This feature can only be used when the implements
powered by the PTO are to be used only for light
operations, such as for sprinklers or rakes, which
require less than 30 H.P.
The economy PTO does not need to use the maximum
power of the engine but it is designed to save fuel.
When using the Economy PTO, make sure that the
implement input shaft RPM NEVER exceeds the
recommended RPM for the implement, e.g. max.
610 RPM for a 6 spline shaft (540 RPM), and max.
1170 RPM for a 21 spline shaft (1000 RPM).
6. Working on slopes.
The Operation and Maintenance Manual provides
information on using the tractor on slopes in a safe
manner
It is also important to note that, when working on
very steep slopes, the lubrication conditions in the
transmission may be reduced. This is caused by
the oil flowing towards the front or rear part of the
transmission unit.
Special measures and extra lubrication may be re-
quired when using the tractor under extreme condi-
tions.
Your dealer will be able to assist you if you expect to
work on slopes of over 15°.
7. Remote hydraulic controls.
The hydraulic system of the tractor may be used in
some particular applications to operate the hydraulic
motors.
When using these applications, note that the hydraulic
motors can generate considerable heat and the oil
cooling system of the tractor may not be sufficient
when these high-power hydraulic motors are used.
Some remote applications have an extra cooling sys-
tem. However, every time they are used, make sure
that the oil is cooled and filtered sufficiently in order
to avoid damage to the tractor's hydraulic system.
8. Towing heavy loads (trailers, etc.)
When heavy loads are towed, the road rules in some
countries require a supplementary braking system
(e.g. air or hydraulic trailer brakes).
Check with your dealer possible additional require-
ments for special spplications
30
9. Operating a dry-disc clutch.
Most tractors with a manual gearshift are equipped
with a dry-disc clutch for changing gear.
Since the clutch slips every time the gear is changed,
it can cause a certain amount of wear and thus cre-
ate heat. To ensure long life for the clutch, it is thus
advisable to reduce the load of the tractor and reduce
engine speed when starting up the tractor from a
standing position.
Prolonged slipping at high engine speed with large
loads will cause the clutch disc to heat up, thereby
reducing its working life.
10. Further instructions for the operator.
The Operation and Maintenance Manual provides
instructions to ensure that the tractor is always used
in safe conditions.
If your tractor is also driven by other people, make sure
that they are fully aware of these accident prevention
instructions.
It is forbidden to carry anyone on the outer structure
of the tractor in any circumstances.
This is because the safety frame that protects against
overturning is only designed to protect persons inside
the cab or roll-over protection structure.
11. Chemical filters for the cab. [4.5.c]
Use of a filter with chemical absorbent in air-condi-
tioned cabs can increase the degree of protection in
certain applications.
PERSONAL PROTECTION EQUIPMENT MAY BE
HOWEVER NECESSARY WHEN USING CHEMICAL
SUBSTANCES.
Wash the tractor and driver’s seat accurately according
to the directions on the product label.
ALWAYS follow the instructions on the labels of the
chemical substances and on the filters to be used.
12. Battery
For detailed information, see the sections Maintenan-
ce - Electric system.
 Safety notes

Risks deriving from exposure to Other effects

Noise does not just determine aural sensation. For levels
noise exceeding* 70 dBA, it causes stress by means of the
Noise characteristics and measurement
cerebral integration centers and determines a specific
Noise is a pressure variation in an elastic medium, gener-
neurovegetative reaction responsible for effects that lead
ally the air, produced by the vibration of a material body
to cardiocirculatory and gastroenteric diseases.
(source) that determines an undesired and often annoy-
Amongst these, it is worthwhile noting: an increase in
ing acoustic sensation. Noise is mainly characterized by:
• sound intensity or level: expresses the entity of the
gastric acidity, a decrease in the heart rate, visual range
and reflex speed; a sensation of discomfort and weariness
pressure variation due to the sound wave. Measured in
with an increased sense of fatigue.
decibels (dB), it doubles the sound intensity and, thus,
These effects are dangerous because they also increase
the energy that reaches the ear.
• the risk of accidents.
frequency: expresses the number of pressure varia-
tions of the wave per second and is measured in Herz
Personal equipment to protect
2
(Hz) - acute noises have high frequencies (2000-4000 Hz
or more) while low-pitched noises have low frequencies against noise
(250 Hz or less). Individual protective equipment attenuates the sound
energy transmitted to the ear through the air.
How the risk is evaluated This equipment is used when dangerous exposure cannot
The higher the sound level and exposure time, the greater be avoided in any other way.
the noise risk will be. There are different types of devices with different attenuat-
Two parameters are used: ing capacities: helmets, ear muffs, ear plugs (Fig. 2-42).
• LAeq (Equivalent continuous weighted level A): this Helmets and headsets have the highest dampening ca-
is a sound level measurement that takes into account pacity and their use is mandatory when working off road
noise fluctuations and the varying sensitivity of the ear and noise is over the above limits.
to the frequencies: LAeq is measured with a sound-level Earplugs are generally better tolerated and are particularly
meter; useful for prolonged exposition to lower noise levels.
• PEL (Personal Exposure Level): this is a measurement
that takes the various noise levels into account along CAUTION: It is prescribed that suitable personal
with the time the worker remains on the individual hearing protection be used if exposed every day to a
machines or working at determined processes: PEL noise level equal or higher than 85 dBA.
is calculated mathematically.
Consult the “Technical specifications” section of
this manual in relation to tractor noise measured
Noise pathologies in instantaneous conditions in compliance with the
Damage to the hearing laws in force.
Noise causes hypacusia or deafness because it destroys
the acoustic receptors, nervous cells able to transform CAUTION: Do not open the windscreen, the doors or
the mechanical sound vibrations into nervous impulses the side and rear windows during work. The noise
that, on reaching the brain, determine the aural sensation. in the cab could rise to such level as to oblige the
These receptors are irreplaceable if they are destroyed and operator to wear headsets or other individual pro-
the resulting damage is irreversible: hypacusia worsens if tection against noise.
exposure to noise continues and does not improve even
if this terminates.
Moreover, it is also bilateral since it can be accompanied
by annoying buzzing and whistling sounds, and by intoler-
ance to loud noise.
The damage is insidious since it proceeds slowly and
unexpectedly: in the initial phase, when it is limited to a
diminished ability to perceive acute sounds (music, bells)
or the spoken voice when there is a background noise,
it can only be detected by means of an audiometric test.
Pulsating noises of great intensity lasting a very short time
are highly damaging since the ear is unable to actuate any
physiological protective measures in time.
Hypacusia from noise generally arises after several years
of exposure and depends on the PEL (risk almost null
below 80 dBA) and on individual characteristics. It is an
incurable disease: the only efficacious means of protec-
tion against it is prevention. Fig.2-42

31
Safety notes
POSITIONS OF THE SAFETY DECALS
All markets (North America excluded)
WARNING: Decals must be always readable. Failing this, ask your Dealer for new ones.

Fig.2-43a Position on footstep tractors and tractors with safety frame

* Only for footstep tractors

** According to model

Fig.2-43b Position on tractors with cab

** According to model

32

Decal 1
WARNING: Hot surfaces. Risk
of burns to hands and fingers.
Warning. Keep well clear of
hot components, keep at a safe
distance.
Decal 3
DANGER: Hot steam or water jets.
Protect your face. Radiator under
pressure when engine is hot. Re-
move cap with caution only when
engine is cold.
Decal 4
WARNING: Danger of
damaging tractor com-
ponents and the brake
circuit in particular.
Before servicing, it is
essential for you to
have read through the
warnings and the in-
structions in the Ope-
rator’s Manual.
Decal 5
WARNING: Danger of being
crushed. When safety belts are
worn, the safety frame must al-
ways be in the upright position.
Decal 6
WARNING: Take care. Read this
book through before using the
machine. Read the directions
for a safe usage with the greatest
attention.
Safety notes
Decal 2
WARNING: Danger of entangle-
ment. Keep hands well clear
of moving parts and be careful
not to get caught up in belts or
pulleys when engine is on. Keep
guards in place.
Decal 7
On safety frame (only for tractors
2
with platform).
WARNING: Risk of overturnig and
crushing. Always keep the safety
frame mounted during work.
Never use the tractor without the
safety frame.
Decal 8
DANGER: Risk of entanglement.
Keep clear of rotating shafts. Be
careful NOT to get caught up by
the cardan shaft of the PTO drive-
line. Keep all guards in place on
the transmission shafts on the
tractor and implements.
Decal 9
DANGER: Danger of being cru-
shed. Always pull the parking bra-
ke lever and engage the Park Lock
(if equipped) when you stop the
tractor and before getting off it.
Decal 10
WARNING: Risk of being cru-
shed. DO NOT allow any passen-
ger to sit on the fenders or on
any other part of the tractor or
towed implements.
33
Safety notes
Decal 11
DANGER: Risk of overturning
and crushing the chest. If the
tractor is tipping over, hold
tightly on to the steering wheel.
DO NOT leave your seat or jump
off the tractor.
Decal 12
DANGER: Risk of
being crushed. DO
NOT short across
starter terminals
to start the engine.
This operation could
put your life at risk.
Start engine only
from driving seat.
Decal 13
WARNING:
Risk of electrocution.
Always disconnect the
negative terminal of the
battery before remov-
ing the solenoid cover
and before servicing the
electrical system.
Decal 17
Only with electronic power lift.
DANGER: Risk of blows and seri-
ous accidents. Keep to one side of
the tractor when using external lift
controls. NEVER STAND between
tractor and implement - you could
be hit by the implement.
34
Decal 14
WARNING:Danger of entangle-
ment and shearing. Keep your
hands well clear of the fan blades
when the engine is running. Al-
ways keep the guards and screens
mounted.
Decal 15
WARNING: Risk of electrocution.
Always disconnect the negative
lead before the positive lead
when removing the battery or
servicing the electrical system.
Decal 16
Only with electronic power lift.
DANGER: Risk of blows and seri-
ous accidents. Keep to one side of
the tractor when using external lift
controls. NEVER STAND between
tractor and implement - you could
be hit by the implement.
DECAL 18
WARNING: Danger of being
crushed. Enter or leave the
tractor through the left-hand
door. If entering or leaving the
tractor through the right-hand
door, avoid any contact with
control levers.
 Safety notes

Decal 23

WARNING: General warning. Turn off

the engine and remove the ignition
key before any servicing operations
Decal 19
and before getting off the machine for
WARNING: Use individual protections during work, any reason.
such as overalls, heavy duty gloves and safety foo-
twear.

Decal 24
2
WARNING: Danger of liquid under
pressure being ejected from hydraulic
Decal 20
circuits.
WARNING: Use protective headsets on all tractors
without cab.

Decal 25

Decal 21 [4.1.p][4.5.c] WARNING: Emergency exit indication.

WARNING: Tractors without cab have no protection
against harmful substances and dusts (protection level
1). If the tractor is used in dusty environment and to
spray phytosanitary products or chemicals generally
thought of as hazardous to health, the operator must
wear individual protections (mask, goggles) suitable
to the harmfulness of the actual product used. Decal
Used only when the fire extinguisher
is mounted (supplied as kit).

WARNING: General warning. Po-

sition where the fire extinguisher
and its support are placed. The fire
extinguisher must be in this position
during work.

Decal 22 [4.1.p][4.5.c] Decal 26

WARNING: Tractors with cab have no protection Located near the front hitch (if
against harmful substances, but is protected from equipped).
dust (protection level 2). If the tractor is used to
spray phytosanitary products or chemicals generally DANGER:Beware of hanging lo-
thought of as hazardous to health, the operator must ads. Keep at a safe distance to
wear individual protections (mask) suitable to the avoid being hit or crushed.
harmfulness of the actual product used.

35
Safety notes

Page left blank intentionally

36
 Safety notes
POSITIONS OF THE SAFETY DECALS
Only North American markets
NOTE: Decals in English language only for the North American market.

ATTENZIONE: Le decalcomanie devono essere sempre leggibili, in caso contrario richiederne di nuove al Con-
cessionario di zona.

Fig.2-44b Location on platforms tractors with safety frame

* Only for footstep tractors

** According to model

Fig.2-44a Location on cab tractors

* According to model
** According to model

36b
Safety Notes

WARNING Decal 1
WARNING
Hight pressure steam and
hot water.
Remove filler cap with
extreme care.

Beware hot parts Decal 2

WARNING WARNING
Use only mineral type brake fluid as ROPS upper frame missing.
specified in the Operator’s Manual.
To avoid injury or death from
Incorrect fluid could cause brake sys- tractor rollover, reinstall upper
tem fallure and loss of control, resulting
in personal injury or death. frame before using tractor.
To avoid personal in-
jury, keep all shields,
covers and guards in Decal 3 Decal 4
place whili engine is Located to the ROPS safety frame (only
running.
on footstep tractors).

WARNING WARNING
Personal injury could result from PTO driveline separation.
1. Drawbar supplied provides standard distance “A”. Do not change.
PTO SHAFT SIZE DISTANCE “A”
540 35mm (1.38 in) 356mm (14.0 in)
1000 35mm (1.38 in) 406mm (16.0 in)
Wheneverclearance permits:
- Keep Rollover Protection Structure 2. Three-point link distance “C” and mounter implement distance “D” may not be standard.
fully extended and locked. Measure distance “B” over complete lift range for
tractor and implement combination. Select driveline
- Keep seat belt fastened. length to ensure that driveline will not bottom out at
minimum distance “B” and will have sufficient overlap
When structure must be lowered: at maximum distance.
- Drive with extra care.
- Seat belt use is not recommended.
No ROPS protection is provided in the Decal 6
lowered position.

Decal 5 DANGER DANGER

Located to the ROPS safety frame (only on
footstep tractors).

Decalcomania 7
WARNING
Serious personal injury or ma-
chine damage may result from Pull only from approv­ Rotating driveline con-
overspeed of PTO driven equip- ed drawbar or lower tact may cause serious
links of 3-point linkage injury or death.
ment.
at horizontal position Keep all driveline, tractor
and equpment sheilds in
Never use the 1000 rpm setting or below.
place during operation.
WARNING with the 6 spline shaft installed.

Serious personal injury Decal 8

or machine damage
may result from over-
speed of PTO driven
equipment.

Select tractor PTO speed

to match implement
specified speed.

Do not operate PTO

above recommended
maximum speed. Decal 9
Nominal
Maximum
540 630
Decal 10
1000 1170

36c
 Safety notes

WARNING Decal 11 Decal 13

CAUTION

Read the operator instruc-

USE SEAT BELT. tion Book for safety in-
Keep seat belt adjusted snugly formation and operating
instructions.

Fasten your seat belt be-

fore tractor operation.

Start engine only when

seated in operator’s seat.

Make sure everyone is

clear of tractor and equpe-
2
Decal 12 ment before starting en-
gine or operation.
Do not jump if
Keep all shields, covers
tractor tips and guards and place and
stay away from moving
parts while engine is run-
ning.

DANGER Place transmission shift

lever in neutral and apply
parking brake before us-
ing external 3-point hitch
Start only from seat controls.
with transmission and
PTO in neutral. Apply parking brake,
lower equpment, stop
engine and remove key
Starting in gear kills. before leaving the tractor
unattended.

Decal 14 Wait for all movement to

stop before servicing trac-
tor or equpment.

WARNING Securely support or block

lifted implements which
must be in the raised
Remove negative ca- position for servicing or
bles from batteries adjustment.
before removing sole- Couple brake pedals to-
noid cover and before gether for road travel.
servicing the electrical
Use flashing warning
system. lights and SMV emblem
when on public roads,
except where prohibited
Decal 15 by law.

Always drive with care and

attention.

Decal 16 WARNING

Keep hands clear of fan

and belts while engine Decal 18
is running. WARNING Located behind the cab on the
rear fenders.

Keep at a safe distance from the

tractor when using external lift
DANGER

Shield Explosive Avoid sparks Sulphuric

eyes gas and flame acid controls.
EXPLOSIVE GASES POISON causes severe bums
Always shield eyes and face from
battery. Cigarettes, flames or sparks Contains sulphuric acid. Avoid contact
could cause battery to explode. with skin, eyes or clothing. Stand clear when
Do not charge or use booster cables or In event of accident flush with water
adjust post connections without proper and call a physician immediately. using switch to
instructions or training. Keep out of reach of children. move 3-point
hitch.
Decal 17

36d
Safety Notes

Page left blank intentionally

36e
Instruments and controls

Chapter 3
Instruments and controls 3

37
Instruments and controls

Platform - Gearbox with mechani-

cal reverse shuttle
Instruments and controls -
Front zone - Fig.3-1a

1. Control and instrument panel

2. Accelerator hand lever

3. Differential lock button (if installed, according to

model)

4. Ignition switch

5. Accelerator pedal

6. Brake pedals

7. PTO clutch disengagement lever Fig.3-1a

8. Light switches

9. Clutch disengagement pedal

10. Steering wheel slant adjustment (optional)

11. Lever to control the reverse shuttle and options

12. Light switch and horn

Instruments and controls -

Rear zone - Fig.3-1b

1. Joystick (optional)

2. Hydraulic power lift control levers

3. Auxiliary control valve levers.

4. PTO speed selector lever

5. 4WD engagement lever

6. Parking brake lever

7. Lift lowering speed adjustment

8. Auxiliary control valves adjustment knobs Fig.3-1b

9. Range selector levers

10. Speed selector lever

38
 Instruments and controls

Fig.3-2a

Cab with mechanical reverse

shuttle
Instruments and controls
Fig. 3-2a and 3-2b

1. Reverse shuttle control lever

2. Control and instrument panel
3. Differential lock engagement button
4. Speed control lever
5. PTO clutch engagement/disengagement lever
6. Range selector lever
7. Joystick lever (optional)
8. Auxiliary 12V power socket
9. Pick-Up Hitch control lever (optional)
10. Hydraulical power lift control levers
11. Auxiliary control valve levers
12. Lift power sensing adjustment
13. Main clutch disengagement pedal
14. Lever to lock steering wheel tilt adjustment (optio-
nal)
15. PTO control lever
16. 4WD engagement sleeve
17. Parking brake lever Fig.3-2b

39
Instruments and controls

Fig. 3-3 Instrument panel

Instrument panel
Warning lights (Fig.3-3)

1 - Battery charging warning light - red. Should go out as
soon as engine starts.
2 - Engine oil pressure warning light - red. Should go out
as soon as engine starts. It is quite normal for this light
to come on if a hot engine is left to idle.
3 - Red warning light. This comes on whenever the par-
king brake is engaged.
4 - Red warning light for low pressure in trailer brake
system (if fitted and depending on the market).
5 - Dry air filter blockage warning light - red. When this
comes on, the cartridge must be cleaned or replaced.
6 - Warning light for low pressure in transmission
hydraulic circuit - red fixed light. If this light comes
on during work, contact your Dealer’s Specialized
Workshop.
7 - Red warning light. This comes when the oil in the
brake fluid reservoir drops to a low level. In this
case, top up with the required fluid.
8 - Warning light for transmission and hydraulic circuit
oil filter blockage - orange fixed light.
9 - Engine cooland high temperature - red. (See Engine
coolant temperature gauge).

Warning buzzer

The buzzer comes on whenever the red warning light for

low pressure in hydraulic transmission system should
come on. In this case, ask your Dealer’s specialized
workshop for help.

40
 Instruments and controls

3
Fig. 3-4 Instrument panel

Instrument panel
Operation indicator lights (Fig.3-4)

1 - 4WD indicator light - orange (if installed). 10 - ECO 540RPM Economy PTO engaged - orange.

2 - Creeper engaged indicator light - orange. 11 - Synchronized PTO engaged - orange.

3 - Diff lock indicator light - orange. 12 - PTO speed selector lever engaged - orange.

4 - Main beam indicator - blue. 13 - Front PTO engaged - orange (if installed).

5 - Direction indicator light for 2nd trailer - green. 14 - Left turn indicator.

6 - Sidelights indicator - green. 15 - Right turn indicator.

7 - Direction indicator light for 1st trailer - green. 16-17 Adjuster buttons.

8- Glow plug preheating indicator - green (if installed).

9 - Rear independent PTO engaged - orange.

41
Instruments and controls
Fig.3-5
RPM meter
The engine rate is displayed by a pointer on the outer
graduated scale. The pointer should never reach the
2450 RPM zone which shows excessive engine speed
Power take-off speed indicator
[4.2.d]
The instrument shows three scales for different PTO
speeds. Each scale is subdivided into two areas:
• Green area - PTO normal operation.
• Red area - Danger area. NEVER use the PTO when
the instrument hand points at this area.
1 - Outer scale for 1000 RPM PTO
Green area for use from 1916 to 2220 engine RPM.
1916 engine RPM = 1000 PTO RPM
2220 engine RPM = 1159 PTO RPM, NEVER c. Build-up of deposits in coolant circuit.
exceed this engine speed.
2 - Middle scale for 540ECO PTO RPM
The 540ECO PTO is obtained at 1390 RPM: never exce-
ed 1890 engine RPM (corresponding to 630 RPM of the
PTO shaft ). Otherwise the shaft and machine can be
seriously damaged and persons severely injured.
3 - Inner scale for 540 RPM PTO
Green area for use from 1944 to 2250 engine RPM.
1944 engine RPM = 540 PTO RPM
2250 engine RPM = 625 PTO RPM, NEVER
exceed this engine speed.
42
Clock - Hour counter.
Fig. 3-6
Clock (1)
See the “Dashboard regulations” chapter to set the
clock.
Hour counter (2)
The hour counter (2) is positioned on the lower part of
the dashboard and indicates the hours actually worked,
independently of engine speed.
• 5 white digits = hours.
• 1 yellow digit = 1/10th of an hour.
Engine coolant temperature gauge
Fig. 3-7
• Blue area = ambient temperature. Wait for the
instrument hand to reach the green area (normal
operating temperature).
• Green area = normal operating temperature.
• Red area = temperature too high.
The overheating warning light (1) comes on at 105-
110°C (221-230°C). Possible causes of overheating:
a. Low engine coolant level.
b. Radiator caked with mud, dust, straw, etc.
d. Loose fan belt.
e. Faulty thermostat.
CAUTION: If the engine temperature is too high, let
the engine idle immediately but do not switch it off.
If the temperature gauge stays in the red, identify
the cause immediately and seek expert advice if
necessary.
Fuel gauge
Fig.3-8.
When the pointer moves into the yellow zone and the
red reserve warning light (1) comes on, there are still
about 10 liters of fuel in the tank.
 Instruments and controls

Controls of the instrument - Fig.3-9

LCD1, refers to the digital display, while P1 and P2 refer
to the left and right selection buttons, respectively.
When the machine is off (key set to OFF) LCD1 displays
the time and the total hours of work.
By turning the ignition key from Key OFF to Key ON, the
tool will conduct an initial check and turn on all the lights
and the characters of LCD 1. After a few seconds it will
position itself to the default status, where LCD1 displays
the time and the total hours of work.
By turning the key ON-OFF-ON, this always takes the tool Fig.3-9
to the default condition illustrated above.
The P1 left and P2 right key allow to make adjustments NOTE: if you wait more than 10 seconds without con-
to the instrument Set Parameters Mode. ducting any operation, the panel automatically exits the
setup procedure. To resume the procedure, it is neces-
sary to start the procedure to access the setup menu
Setup Mode from the beginning.
Access to the setup menu Fig.3-9.
To access the menu, follow the procedure below: P2 right button to change the menu
- Ignition key OFF (instruments cluster OFF).
- Press and hold the P1 button on the instruments cluster, AC2 - Size of rear tyres - Fig.3-10a
turn ignition key left to ON (cluster start-up)
NOTE: - Press and hold the P1 button P1 for at least 6
To the figure corresponding to installed rear
tyres see table Fig.3-10b.
3
seconds after turning the ignition key to the ON position.
- Press the P1 left button to go to the next line: the digit
- The central display will indicate the software of the lin-
starts to flash.
struments cluster for two seconds and will then display
- P2 right button to to change the number from 0 to 5.
the setup menu.
- Press the P1 left button to go to the next number: use
the P2 right button to change the value.
The central display show two lines:
- Press the P1 left button to go to the next number: use
- The top line indicates the number of the menu.
the P2 right button to change the value.
- The bottom line indicates the setup value for the menu
- To save the size of the rear tyres, press and hold the P1
displayed.
left button for 5 seconds.
With the P2 right button, select the AC2 menu - Rear tyres
or the AC8 menu - Clock settings

NOTE: The menus from AC1 to AC8 appear on the in-

strument’s display, but the vehicle’s operator can ONLY
enter menus AC2 and AC8. DO NOT enter in the other
menus, as these are not menus for the operator: go
directly to the AC2 or AC8 menu you want to edit.
AC8 - Clock - Fig.3-11a
- Press the P1 left button to go to the next line: the
minutes start to flash.
- P2 right button to increase the numer of minutes from
0 to 60.
- Press the P1 left button to go to the number of hours: P2
right button to change the value from 01 to 24h.
- To save the time press and width of the tool, press and
hold the P1 left button for 5 seconds.
- To exit the setup menu, turn off (ignition key set to OFF).
Fig.3-11a
Fig.3-10a
Rear tyres R Index N.
12.4 R 36 700 15
13.6 R 36 725 21
13.6 R 38 750 22
14.9 R 28 650 9
14.9 R 30 675 13
16.9 R 28 675 13
16.9 R 30 700 15
16.9 R 34 750 22
18.4 R 30 725 21
480/65 R 28 650 9
480/70 R 30 700 15
480/70 R 34 750 22
540/65 R 34 750 22
Table Fig.3-10b

43
Instruments and controls

Dashboard controls
Hand throttle lever (Fig.3-11)
1 - Forwards: idling speed
2 - Back: max. speed.

Ignition switch (3-Fig.3-11)

STOP - No circuit powered. Engine stopped. The

key can be removed.

- Contact position. Various users powered.

Indicators and controls on.

- Thermostarter preheating position for cold Fig. 3-11

weather starting.

- Engine start position. Key automatically

START returns to power on position when relea-
sed.

Light switch (1-Fig. 3-12)

Operation (Fig. 3-13)
A - Light switch for direction indicators and horn.
Only operates with ignition switch in the contact
position.
- Forwards: right hand direction indicator.
- Back: left hand direction indicator.
- Pressed: horn.

B - Road light switch

1 - Down: side lights on. Fig. 3-12
2 - Center: dipped beams and flashing
3 - Down: driving beams.

Switches (Fig. 3-12)

2 - Not used:

3 - Rear field light switch:

- 0. Off
- 1. Light on

4 - Hazard light switch:

- 0. Off
- 1. Hazard lights on
Fig. 3-13- Light switch: direction indicators (A) and road
lights (B)
5 - Rotating beacon switch:
- 0. Off
- 1. Beacon on

Steering wheel adjustment (1 -

Fig.3-14) (if equipped)
1 - Push the lock lever (1) upward to unlock the stee-
ring wheel.
2 - Adjust steering wheel tilt.
3 - Release the lever to lock the steering wheel in
position.
Fig. 3-14

44
 Instruments and controls

Seat
[4.1.a]

Various types of seat are available depending on tractor

model (Fig.3-15a and Fig.3-15b).

The driver’s seat has devices to adjust the suspension,

height and distance from the controls.

Seat suspension
This can be modified to suit the driver’s weight by means
of the adjuster lever, which is easily accessible from the
driver’s seat (3).
- Rigid suspension: Turn the knob in a clockwise direction
(+). Fig. 3-15a - Seat
- Supple suspension: Turn the knob in an anti- clockwise
direction (-).

Regulating the distance

The seat can be moved forwards or backwards by relea-

3
sing the relative lever (2).

Seat height adjustment

Use knob (1) to raise or lower the seat.

Operator present sensor

The seat cushion acts as a switch. The moment no load
is sensed (the operator’s own weight) an alarm sounds
(Fig.3-15c). Fig. 3-15b - Seat de luxe

WARNING: To warn the operator of incorrect

usage, the tractor has an automatic alarm
system that sounds when the operator is not
correctly seated in driving position while the
machine is being used.

In all machines, both with mechanic and hydraulic

gearbox, this alarm sounds whenever the operator
leaves his/her seat without turning off the engine, and
is silenced only after engaging the parking brake and
shifting the gear to neutral.

Machines with hydraulic reverse shuttle are equipped

with a further restraint that acts (whenever the opera-
tor gets off his/her seat without turning off the engi-
ne) with inhibition of forward and reverse hydraulic
clutches if the tractor is at standstill. If the tractor is
moving, the system inhibits the same clutches as soon Fig.3-15c
as the neutral position of the reverse shuttle lever is
sensed: in such a condition it is therefore required to
shift the shuttle in neutral to stop the tractor.

WARNING: Do not tamper with this compo-

nent in any way.

Contact your Dealer immediately if the system is not

operating correctly.

45
Instruments and controls

Second passenger seat - Fig.3-16a

(optional)

Fold the seat down when not used.

CAUTION: For machines with a seat for a second pas-

senger. The seat for a second passenger (with a seat
belt that must be worn at all times) may be occupied
only when driving on road, but not when working in
the field.

Fig.3-16a

Miscellaneous (Fig. 3-16b)

Tool kit (2): A box containing a set of tools and other

materials for the tractor.

Trailer power socket (3).

Quick couplings (4). Quick couplings of the «Push-Pull»

type for auxiliary spool valves are supplied on request
for remote controls.

Field light (1).

Fig.3-16 - Various users:

1 - Power socket; 2 - “Push-Pull” quick couplings; 3 -
Field light; 4 - Tool kit.

46

Access to the tractor with cab
[4.1.e]
WARNING: Do not jump on or off the tractor.
It may cause injuries. Always face the tractor,
use the hand rails and steps, and get on or
off slowly. Maintain a minimum three point
contact to avoid falling (both hands on rails
and one foot on the step, or one hand on the
hand rail and both feet on the steps).
Enter or leave the tractor through the left-hand door.
Cab emergency exit [4.1.d]
The rear window of the cab may be used as an emer-
gency exit.
If you have to get out the cabin an emergency and it is
not possible to use the left door: turn the engine off,
open the rear door by means of the central handle and
get out quickly.
Instruments and controls
Access to the tractor with footstep
[4.1.e]
WARNING: Do not jump on or off the tractor.
It may cause injuries. Always face the tractor,
use the hand rails and steps, and get on or
off slowly. Maintain a minimum three point
contact to avoid falling (both hands on rails
and one foot on the step, or one hand on the
hand rail and both feet on the steps).
Climb into or down the tractor with the left-hand ladder.
47
Instruments and controls

Page left blank intentionally

48
Operation

Chapter 4
Operation
4

49
Operation
OPERATION
WARNING: Carefully read the starting instruc-
tions before starting the tractor.
WARNING: Always take into account the use
of the machine and the work place. Take
every precaution, specially if there is a high
risk of fire.
WARNING: DO NOT start the tractor from the
ground. Always start the tractor only from the
operator’s seat.
WARNING: DO NOT start the tractor if the
bonnet is open or the guards are removed.
WARNING: The operator must always seat in
his/her place when driving the tractor both in
the field and on roads. DO NOT stand up from
your seat when the tractor is moving.
ENGINE
Starting the engine
[4.1.c]
WARNING: The engine may be started only in
the conditions given here under. If this fails
to occur, have the tractor repaired by your
Dealer or authorized service centre.
A- Check that the reverse shuttle and gearshift levers
are in neutral.
B1- For tractors with mechanical PTO, shift the inde-
pendent/synchronised PTO lever to neutral.
B2- For tractors with hydraulic PTO, disengage the
control (switch).
For tractors with front PTO, disengage the control
(switch).
C- Make sure the auxiliary valve levers are in neutral.
D- Depress the clutch pedal all the way.
TURBO ENGINE: Allow the engine to run for a few
seconds with the starter motor to allow the turbo com-
pressor to be lubricated.
As soon as the engine starts, accelerate to a 1000-1200
RPM rate without increasing further until the engine has
reached the normal operating temperature.
E- Turn the ignition key to the contact position. Then
turn the ignition key to the “START” position. Rele-
ase the key as soon as the engine fires and quickly
set the accelerator lever to the idling speed.
50
Cold weather starting (temperatures
below 0°C)(32°F)
CAUTION: When outdoor temperatures drop to
around or below 0°C. (32°F), check the cooling sy-
stem and if necessary add the recommended antifre-
eze.
WARNING: Do not inject fluids (ether) to make the
engine easier to start in cold weather. The tractor is
equipped with a cold weather starting system.
Proceed as follows:
- Perform operations A,B, C, as instructed above.
- Turn the ignition key to the pre-heat position (the
indicator light (1 - Fig.4-1a) comes on and keep it
there for 20 seconds, then turn the ignition key to the
“START” position. If the engine fails to start within 15
seconds, return the key to the pre-heating position.
- Wait a further 10 seconds and then turn the ignition
key to the “START” position again.
- As soon as the engine starts, release the key.
- If the engine fails to start, repeat the pre-heating or
starting procedure as described above.
NOTE:
- If the engine fails to start after two or three attempts
and smoke can be seen coming out of the exhaust,
repeat the starting procedure without the thermostar-
ter pre-heating phase.
- Do not keep the key turned to the start position for
more than 10 seconds at a time.
- Wait at least 1 minute between one attempt at starting
and another.
If the engine does not start regularly and easily, do not
continue as for you may run down the battery. Bleed
any air that may have accumulated in the fuel system
and, if the problem persists, check that:
- The fuel filters are not blocked.
- The battery and thermostarter are efficient.
- The fuses of the ignition circuit are in good conditions
and that the fuel shut-off valve is open (contact your
dealer or a specialized workshop).
Fig.4-1a

Starting the tractor
WARNING: Before moving off, make sure
you are perfectly familiar with the brakes,
transmission, PTO, diff lock and engine shut
off.
After starting the engine:
1 - Fully depress the clutch pedal, select the gear
required and then select the speed range.
WARNING: Make sure that the reverse shut-
tle lever is set for the direction required.
2 - Release the parking brake.
Desengage the Park Lock (if equipped).
WARNING: Look out of bystanders, especial-
ly when backing up.
3 - Accelerate the engine slightly and gradually release
the gearshift clutch pedal.
4 - Move your foot completely off the clutch pedal and
slowly accelerate until you have reached the speed
you need.
CAUTION: Do not keep your foot on the
gearshift clutch pedal when driving and
remember to check and adjust the clutch to
prolong its life and avoid sudden damage to
it.
CAUTION: If your tractor is equipped with
a mechanical reverse shuttle, always bring
the tractor to a complete standstill before
changing direction.
Accelerator pedal
The accelerator pedal can over-ride the setting of the
hand throttle lever to accelerate the engine. However,
when you release the pedal, the engine returns to the
speed set by the hand lever.
When using the accelerator pedal, always set the hand
throttle lever to the idling position.
Operation
Stopping the tractor
- Reduce the engine speed.
- Depress the gearshift clutch pedal to disengage
drive.
- Once the tractor has come to a stop, move the gear
lever and speed range lever to neutral before relea-
sing the gearshift clutch pedal.
- Use both pedal brakes to stop the tractor and then
apply the parking brake.
- Engage the Park Lock (if equipped).
Turning off the engine [4.1.c]
- Turn the hand throttle lever to the “Idling” position.
- Stop the engine by turning the ignition key to the
STOP position to disconnect all electrical circuits.
TURBO ENGINE: Take care when stopping the engine
after a period of operation at full load. It is advisable
to allow it to idle for 3 or 4 minutes before stopping it.
This allows the overheated compressor to cool down to
an acceptable temperature.
Running in
For a correct running in, it is necessary to observe all
precautions called for in the Maintenance section.
4
Clutch
Gearshift clutch pedal (Fig. 4-1).
- Position 1 up = drive engaged.
- Position 2 down = drive disengaged.
Make your gear changes gradually. When the engine
is under load, do not slip the clutch to accelerate, but
change to a lower gear.
WARNING:
Never keep your foot resting on the gear-
shift clutch pedal when driving.
Never coast down slopes with the gear lever
in neutral.
Fig. 4-1 - Clutch pedal
51
Operation

Gearbox with reverse shuttle and

options
The gearbox is available with a certain number of op-
tions. Each user can therefore choose the combination
best suited to his requirements.

Possible combinations:

Max. speed 30 Kph:

1 - Basic gearbox with reverse shuttle.................. 12+12
2 - Reverse shuttle + underdrive.......................... 24+12
3 - Reverse shuttle + creeper................................ 24+12

Fig.4-2 - Gearshift levers

Max. speed 40 Kph:
1 - Reverse shuttle + overdrive............................ 24+12

Gearbox and speed range selector: 12 forward

speeds - 12 reverse speeds Speed range selector lever (2 - Fig. 4-2)
The basic tractor version is equipped with a gearbox The speed range selector lever has three possible
and reverse shuttle giving a total of 12 forward speeds positions corresponding to the low, standard and high
and 12 reverse speeds as follows: speed ranges. Each speed range is identified by a sym-
bol on the knob of the lever.
12 standard forward speeds from 1.7 Kph to
29.5 Kph. (from 1.1 to 18.4 mph)


12 standard reverse speeds from 1.7 Kph to
29.8 Kph. (from 1.1 to 18.6 mph) Fig. 4-3
Gating layout of the speed range
The gearbox and speed range selector are controlled selector lever showing three spe-
separately by means of two levers: the gear lever (1) ed ranges.
and the speed range selector lever (2). The reverse
shuttle is controlled by the lever on the the left side of
the steering wheell (Fig.4-6).

Gearshift lever (1 - Fig. 4-2) To change from one speed range to another, depress
the gearshift clutch pedal and bring the tractor to a
The lever has four different positions corresponding to complete standstill before moving the speed range
four totally synchronized gears. selector to its new position.
With the engine at maximum power, the available
Fig. 4-4 speed ranges are:
4 gear lever positions equivalent
to four totally synchronized Slow Range: - Four gears: 1.6 to 4.9 Kph
gears. (1 to 3.1 mph)

Normal Range: - Four gears: 4.0 to 12.2 Kph

(2.5 to 7.6 mph)

Fast Range: - Four gears: 10 to 29.3 Kph

To change from one gear to the other within the same (6.2 to 18.3 mph)
speed range, simply depress the gearshift clutch pedal
and move the gear lever to its new position. There is no
need to stop the tractor.

52
 Operation

Reverse shuttle and “Option” lever (Fig. 4-5)
The lever has two or three positions that correspond to
precise requirements as to use of the forward speeds
of the tractor.
The driver can choose from 12 different forward speeds
per selection.
Each position of the lever is identified by a symbol on
the knob of the lever.
Always choose a gear that ensures a certain power
reserve, so that any extra workload can be absorbed by
the engine.
Warning: make sure that the safety device
only allows the engine to start when the
gearshift, reverse shuttle and PTO levers are
in the neutral position. Never ever cut out
the safety device. If it fails to operate regu-
larly, have it adjusted by specialized person-
nel.

Fig. 4-5 NOTE: the ground speeds given by the various gears
2 or 3 positions of the reverse and ranges are listed in the Technical Specifications at
shuttle control lever depending on the end of this manual.
the option mounted.

Basic reverse shuttle

12 standard forward speeds

4
12 reverse speeds with reverse shuttle

Options available on request

the CREEPER is mounted

(12 forward gears with speed reduced by 80%
in relation to the standard speed)

the UNDERDRIVE is mounted

(12 forward gears with speeds reduced by
22% in relation to the standard speed) Fig. 4-6. Reverse shuttle and option selector lever.
A. Forward gears.
the OVERDRIVE is mounted N. Neutral.
(12 forward gears with speeds increased by R. Reverse gears.
29% in relation to the standard speed). O. Ootions.

Warning: disengage the gearshift clutch, stop the

tractor and move the lever to the required position
to engage the creeper unit and reverse shuttle (even
when this latter has a synchronized clutch).
Just disengage the clutch to engage the underdrive
or overdrive.

The gear speed must be chosen according to the job in

hand, the type of implement used and the soil condi-
tions.

53
Operation

GEARBOX WITH REVERSE SHUTTLE 12 FWD - 12 REV SPEEDS

The basic tractor version is equipped with a gearbox The levers controlling the gearbox and the low, standard
and reverse shuttle giving a total of 12 forward speeds and high range selection are placed on the right of the
and 12 reverse speeds as follows: driver’s seat. The lever at the steering wheel controls the
recerse shuttle.
12 standard forward speeds from 1.7 Kph to To engage the reverse shuttle, disengage the clutch, stop
29.5 Kph. (from 1.1 to 18.4 mph) the tractor and move the control lever to the required
position. The engagements are synchronized (creeper
excepted).
12 standard reverse speeds from 1.7 Kph to The following tables show speeds in Kph with engine at
29.8 Kph. (from 1.1 to 18.6 mph) max RPM and with rear tyres as indicated.

Fig.4-7
Speeds are in Kph with engine at max. RPM and with rear tyres as indicated.

MODEL 75 80-90-100 105-110

2200 RPM 2200 RPm 2200 RPM

Range

GEAR

16.9R34 18.4R30 13.6r38

14.9R28 16.9R28 16.9R30 540/65R34 540/65R34
480/65R28 480/70R30 480/70R34 480/70R34

1st 1.60 1.67 1.74 1.73 1.67 1.67
Low

2nd 2.51 2.63 2.73 2.71 2.62 2.62

3rd 3.18 3.32 3.45 3.43 3.31 3.31
FORWARD SPEEDS

4th 4.69 4.90 5.09 5.05 4.88 4.89

STANDARD

Standard

1st 3.82 4.00 4.15 4.12 3.98 3.98

2nd 6.01 6.29 6.52 6.48 6.26 6.26
3rd 7.59 7.94 8.24 8.18 7.91 7.91
4th 11.19 11.72 12.16 12.07 11.67 11.67

1st 9.43 9.87 10.24 10.17 9.83 9.83

High

2nd 14.82 15.51 16.09 15.98 15.44 15.45

3rd 18.71 19.59 20.32 20.18 19.51 19.52
4th 27.61 28.90 29.98 29.78 28.77 28.77

1st 1.62 1.69 1.76 1.74 1.68 1.69
Low

2nd 2.54 2.66 2.76 2.74 2.65 2.65

3rd 3.21 3.36 3.48 3.46 3.34 3.34
4th 4.73 4.95 5.14 5.11 4.93 4.93
REVERSE SPEEDS

STANDARD

Standard

1st 3.86 4.04 4.19 4.16 4.02 4.02

2nd 6.07 6.35 6.59 6.54 6.32 6.32
3rd 7.66 8.02 8.32 8.26 7.99 7.99
4th 11.31 11.84 12.28 12.19 11.78 11.79

1st 9.52 9.97 10.34 10.27 9.93 9.93

High

2nd 14.97 15.67 16.25 16.14 15.60 15.60

3rd 18.90 19.79 20.53 20.39 19.71 19.71
4th 27.89 29.20 30.29 30.08 29.06 29.06

54
 Operation

Gearbox with reverse shuttle and creeper 1:5,12

Fig.4-8
Speeds are in Kph with engine at max. RPM and with rear tyres as indicated.

MODEL 75 80-90-100 105-110

2200 RPM 2200 RPM 2200 RPM

Range

GEAR

16.9R34 18.4R30 16.9R38

14.9R28 16.9R28 16.9R30 540/65R34 540/65R34
480/65R28 480/70R30 480/70R34 480/70R34

1st 0.31 0.33 0.34 0.34 0.32 0.33
2nd 0.49 0.51 0.53 0.53 0.51 0.51
Low

3rd 0.62 0.65 0.67 0.67 0.65 0.65

4th 0.92 0.96 0.99 0.99 0.95 0.95
CREEPER

1st 0.75 0.78 0.81 0.80 0.78 0.78

Standard

2nd 1.17 1.23 1.27 1.27 1.22 1.22

3rd 1.48 1.55 1.61 1.60 1.54 1.54
4th 2.19 2.29 2.37 2.36 2.28 2.28
4
FORWARD SPEEDS

1st 1.84 1.93 2.00 1.98 1.92 1.92

2nd 2.89 3.03 3.14 3.12 3.02 3.02
High

3rd 3.65 3.82 3.97 3.94 3.81 3.81

4th 5.39 5.64 5.85 5.81 5.60 5.62

1st 1.60 1.67 1.74 1.73 1.67 1.67

2nd 2.51 2.63 2.73 2.71 2.62 2.62
Low

3rd 3.18 3.32 3.45 3.43 3.31 3.31

4th 4.69 4.90 5.09 5.05 4.88 4.89
STANDARD

1st 3.82 4.00 4.15 4.12 3.98 3.98

Standard

2nd 6.01 6.29 6.52 6.48 6.26 6.26

3rd 7.59 7.94 8.24 8.18 7.91 7.91
4th 11.19 11.72 12.16 12.07 11.67 11.67

1st 9.43 9.87 10.24 10.17 9.83 9.83

2nd 14.82 15.51 16.09 15.98 15.44 15.45
High

3rd 18.71 19.59 20.32 20.18 19.51 19.52

4th 27.61 28.90 29.98 29.78 28.77 28.77

1st 1.62 1.69 1.76 1.74 1.68 1.69
2nd 2.54 2.66 2.76 2.74 2.65 2.65
Low

3.a 3.21 3.36 3.48 3.46 3.34 3.34

4th 4.73 4.95 5.14 5.11 4.93 4.93
REVERSE SPEEDS

STANDARD

1st 3.86 4.04 4.19 4.16 4.02 4.02

Standard

2nd 6.07 6.35 6.59 6.54 6.32 6.32

3rd 7.66 8.02 8.32 8.26 7.99 7.99
4th 11.31 11.84 12.28 12.19 11.78 11.79

1st 9.52 9.97 10.34 10.27 9.93 9.93

2nd 14.97 15.67 16.25 16.14 15.60 15.60
High

3rd 18.90 19.79 20.53 20.39 19.71 19.71

4th 27.89 29.20 30.29 30.08 29.06 29.06

55
Operation

Gearbox with reverse shuttle and overdrive

Fig.4-9
Speeds are in Kph with engine at max. RPM and with rear tyres as indicated.

MODEL 75 80-90-100 105-110

2200 RPM 2200 RPM 2200 RPM

16.9R34 13.6R38 16.9R38
Range

GEAR

14.9R28 16.9R28 16.9R30 540/65R34 540/65R34

480/65R28 480/70R30 480/70R34 480/70R34

1st 1.60 1.67 1.74 1.73 1.67 1.67
2nd 2.51 2.63 2.73 2.71 2.62 2.62
Low

3rd 3.18 3.32 3.45 3.43 3.31 3.31

STANDARD

4th 4.69 4.90 5.09 5.05 4.88 4.89

1st 3.82 4.00 4.15 4.12 3.98 3.98

Standard

2nd 6.01 6.29 6.52 6.48 6.26 6.26

3rd 7.59 7.94 8.24 8.18 7.91 7.91
4th 11.19 11.72 12.16 12.07 11.67 11.67
FORWARD SPEEDS

1st 9.43 9.87 10.24 10.17 9.83 9.83

2nd 14.82 15.51 16.09 15.98 15.44 15.45
High

3rd 18.71 19.59 20.32 20.18 19.51 19.52

4th 27.61 28.90 29.98 29.78 28.77 28.77

1st 2.10 2.18 2.28 2.26 2.15 2.15

2nd 3.30 3.43 3.58 3.56 3.38 3.38
Low

3rd 4.17 4.33 4.52 4.49 4.26 4.27

4th 6.15 6.39 6.67 6.63 6.29 6.29
OVERDRIVE

1st 5.01 5.21 5.44 5.41 5.13 5.13

Standard

2nd 7.88 8.19 8.56 8.50 8.06 8.07

3rd 9.95 10.34 10.81 10.73 10.19 10.19
4th 14.68 15.26 15.94 15.84 15.03 15.03

1st 12.36 12.85 13.43 13.34 12.66 12.66

2nd 19.44 20.20 21.11 20.96 20.89 19.90
High

3rd 20.55 25.50 26.66 26.47 25.13 26.14

4th 36.22 37.63 39.33 39.06 37.06 37.07

1st 1.62 1.69 1.76 1.74 1.68 1.69

2nd 2.54 2.66 2.76 2.74 2.65 2.65
Low

3rd 3.21 3.36 3.48 3.46 3.34 3.34

4th 4.73 4.95 5.14 5.11 4.93 4.93
REVERSE SPEEDS

STANDARD

1st 3.86 4.04 4.19 4.16 4.02 4.02

Standard

2nd 6.07 6.35 6.59 6.54 6.32 6.32

3rd 7.66 8.02 8.32 8.26 7.99 7.99
4th 11.31 11.84 12.28 12.19 11.78 11.79

1st 9.52 9.97 10.34 10.27 9.93 9.93

2nd 14.97 15.67 16.25 16.14 15.60 15.60
High

3rd 18.90 19.79 20.53 20.39 19.71 19.71

4th 27.89 29.20 30.29 30.08 29.06 29.06

56
 Operation

Gearbox with reverse shuttle and underdrive

Fig.4-10
Speeds are in Kph with engine at max. RPM and with rear tyres as indicated.

MODEL 75 80-90-100 105-110

2200 RPM 2200 RPM 2200 RPM

Range

GEAR

16.9R34 18.4R30 16.9R38

14.9R28 16.9R28 16.9R30 540/65R34 540/65R34
480/65R28 480/70R30 480/70R34 480/70R34

1st 1.33 1.39 1.44 1.43 1.38 1.38
2nd 2.08 2.18 2.26 2.25 2.17 2.17
Low

3rd 2.63 2.76 2.86 2.84 2.74 2.74

UNDERDRIVE

4th 3.88 4.07 4.22 4.19 4.05 4.05

1st 3.17 3.32 3.44 3.42 3.30 3.30

Standard

2nd 4.98 5.21 5.41 5.37 5.19 5.19

3rd 6.29 6.58 6.83 6.78 6.56 6.56
4th 9.28 9.71 10.08 10.01 9.67 9.67
4
FORWARD SPEEDS

1st 7.81 8.18 8.48 8.43 8.15 8.15

2nd 12.28 12.86 13.34 13.25 12.80 12.80
High

3rd 15.51 16.24 16.84 16.73 16.17 16.18

4th 22.88 23.96 24.85 24.68 23.84 23.85

1st 1.60 1.67 1.74 1.73 1.67 1.67

2nd 2.51 2.63 2.73 2.71 2.62 2.62
Low

3rd 3.18 3.32 3.45 3.43 3.31 3.31

4th 4.69 4.90 5.09 5.05 4.88 4.89
STANDARD

1st 3.82 4.00 4.15 4.12 3.98 3.98

Standard

2nd 6.01 6.29 6.52 6.48 6.26 6.26

3rd 7.59 7.94 8.24 8.18 7.91 7.91
4th 11.19 11.72 12.16 12.07 11.67 11.67

1st 9.43 9.87 10.24 10.17 9.83 9.83

2nd 14.82 15.51 16.09 15.98 15.44 15.45
High

3rd 18.71 19.59 20.32 20.18 19.51 19.52

4th 27.61 28.90 29.98 29.78 28.77 28.77

1st 1.62 1.69 1.76 1.74 1.68 1.69

2nd 2.54 2.66 2.76 2.74 2.65 2.65
Low

3rd 3.21 3.36 3.48 3.46 3.34 3.34

4th 4.73 4.95 5.14 5.11 4.93 4.93
REVERSE SPEEDS

STANDARD

1st 3.86 4.04 4.19 4.16 4.02 4.02

Standard

2nd 6.07 6.35 6.59 6.54 6.32 6.32

3rd 7.66 8.02 8.32 8.26 7.99 7.99
4th 11.31 11.84 12.28 12.19 11.78 11.79

1st 9.52 9.97 10.34 10.27 9.93 9.93

2nd 14.97 15.67 16.25 16.14 15.60 15.60
High

3rd 18.90 19.79 20.53 20.39 19.71 19.71

4th 27.89 29.20 30.29 30.08 29.06 29.06

57
Operation

Power take-off clutch

Gearshift-power take-off clutch control lever (1 - Fig.
4-11):

Pull the lever to its coupling point to disengage the PTO

clutch. To engage it, release the lever by pressing on
the control on the lever itself.

2 - Mechanical PTO clutch lever.

• Pos. A up = PTO disengaged.

• Pos. B down = PTO engaged.

2 - Coupling of PTO clutch engagement lever.
Fig. 4-11 - PTO clutch disengagement lever (1).

Warning: When working with PTO, only

disengage the clutch for the time strictly
required to carry out manoeuvres.

Power take-off
The tractor is equipped with a standard power take
off that complies with international regulations. It is
installed at the rear of the transmission housing.

The PTO shaft (4 - Fig. 4-13) can be driven in either of

two ways:
Fig. 4-12 - PTO engagement lever (2) .
• Directly from the engine: independent PTO mode;

• Via the gearbox: synchronized ground drive PTO

mode. PTO engagement lever (2 - Fig.4-12).

The PTO is engaged in the following way by using the
hand lever (2 - Fig. 4-12):
• disengage the relative clutch by pulling back the
control lever (1) to the OFF position (A). A ratchet
will retain the lever in this position;
• set the PTO engaging lever (2 - Fig. 4-12) to the
required position after a few seconds;
• engage the clutch by slowly moving the lever (1)
forward to the ON position (B).
A - Independent PTO engaged - lever 2 back.
B - PTO in neutral position - lever 2 in center.
C - Synchronized PTO engaged - lever 2 forwards.
Warning: When the PTO is not used, keep
the control lever (1 - Fig. 4-11) of the relative
clutch in the forward position (clutch enga-
ged) and disengage the PTO with the relative
control (2 - Fig. 4-12). When working with the
PTO, only disengage the relative clutch for the
time strictly required to carry out the various
manoeuvres.

Warning: When using the PTO and the tractor

is stationary, always make sure that the lever
of the speed range selector is in neutral and
that the parking brake is engaged.

58
 Operation

Indepentend power take-off Synchronized power take-off

[4.2.d]
The independent power take-off can operate at 540
RPM with a 1944 RPM engine rate or at 1000 RPM with
a 1916 RPM engine rate (540E RPM with a 1392 RPM
engine rate is available on request).
It is directly driven by the engine and its operation is
totally independent of tractor advancement.
The PTO can be used with the tractor both at a stan-
dstill and moving. It is therefore possible to:
• stop the tractor without stopping the PTO driveline
(by disengaging the gearshift clutch);
• stop the PTO driveline without stopping the tractor
(disengaging the gearshift-power take-off clutch).
[4.2.d]
Use of the synchronized rear power take-off with the
gearbox is solely designed for towing self-driven trailers
and, more generally, for all those farming implements
which have to operate synchronised with tractor move-
ment and which do not require more than 40 - 45% of
rated engine power.
Whichever forward gear is engaged, the splined shaft
of the PTO accomplishes, for each turn of the rear
wheels:
Type of PTO driveline revolutions
PTO 75 80-90-100 105-110
540 9.185 9.914 10.265
540E 12.822 13.839 14.479
1000 17.252 18.620 19.264

The former option is used when the machine blocks
and the tractor must be momentarily stopped, allowing
the PTO to turn until the machine has been disengaged.
The latter option is used during short no-load move-
ments or headland manoeuvres where the PTO must be
stopped while allowing the tractor to move.
NAO Market only 540 RPM PTO available
IMPORTANT: When using the synchronized PTO and if
you are forced to reverse once or several times, remem-
ber that the driveline inverts its spinning direction. Thus,
with certain implements, it is advisable to disengage the
PTO when reversing in order to avoid major damage.

PTO speed selection

4
To switch from the 540 RPM speed to the 1000 RPM
speed (or 540E RPM) and vice versa, use the speed
selector lever (3, Fig. 4-13) which can assume two
positions (Only 540RPM PTO available in NAO
Market):

• forwards (1) = 540 RPM PTO.

• back (2) = 1000 RPM PTO or 540E RPM PTO.

The speed must be changed with the PTO disengaged.

Economy PTO
A PTO speed of 540 RPM can be obtained for imple-
ments that do not require maximum power, such as
fertilizer spreaders, sprayers, etc.) by using the PTO at
540ECO RPM and decelerating to 1390 RPM. The PTO
economy mode has a number of advantages, including
a reduction in fuel consumption, noise and vibrations.
Fig. 4-13
WARNING: Only use PTO at 540 RPM (or 540ECO) or
at 1000 RPM to drive implements designed for such
respective rotation speeds.(NAO market available
only 540 RPM PTO).

WARNING: Economy PTO 540 ECO runs at

1375 RPM. Never exceed 1890 RPM engine
rate (corresponding to 630 RPM of the PTO
driveline) to avoid damages to the driveline
itself, to the connected implement and to
persons.

59
Operation

Interchangeable PTO shaft

For Models 100 and 105-110 only
Different PTO output shafts are available (Fig. 4-14):
• diameter 1 3/8” (34.9 mm.) shaft with 21 splines for
1000 RPM power take-off, standard assembly
(2).
• diameter 1 3/8” (34.9 mm.) shaft with 6 splines for
540 RPM power take-offs, supplied with the tractor
(1).
• diameter 1 3/4” (44.4 mm.) shaft with 6 splines for
the 1000 RPM PTO (on request).
Remove the four fixing bolts (3) to replace the output
shaft.
After mounting the shaft, select the correct rotation
speed by means of the relative lever. Fig.4-14-PTO driveline replacement - Mod.100 and 105-
110
Caution: never use the PTO driveline for 540 RPM if
the implement used requires a power greater than 56
kW (75 HP) since damages to the driveline itself and
to the connected implements could injure bystanders.
Implements requiring 56 kW (75 HP) may be used only
with PTO drivelines at 1000 RPM.

North America: 1000 RPM PTO with 540 RPM

shaft, 6 splines. 1000 RPM PTO only allowe with
1000 RPM shaft, 21 splines.

To change the output shaft (1), first remove the spring

ring (2 - Fig. 2-14b) using special nippers.
Take out the shaft. Thoroughly grease the new shaft
and fit it in place, making sure that it is fully inserted in
its housing.
Fit the spring ring correctly back in place: replace it if it Fig. 2-14b - Changing the PTO driveline - Mod.100-105-
is damaged or deformed. 110.NAO
1 - PTO driveline. 2 - Spring ring.
After installing the required shaft, select the correct
RPM rate by means of the selector lever.

Precautions when using the PTO

WARNING: PTO shafts and implements
operated by means of the PTO can be ex-
tremely dangerous. It is therefore advisa-
ble to comply with the following important
instructions:
WARNING: Check to make sure that all
implements operated by the PTO are fitted
with the correct protections, are in a good
condition and comply with the provisions
established by law.

WARNING: NEVER operate without the PTO WARNING: Before driving an implement
cap or shield mounted. These parts protect through the PTO, ALWAYS make sure that
persons from injuries and the shaft splines all bystanders are well away from the trac-
from damage. tor.

WARNING: Before connecting, adjusting or WARNING: Fix the drawbar in the central
working on implements operated by the position when using implements that are
PTO, disengage the PTO, stop the engine, driven by the PTO of the tractor.
remove the key from the dashboard and
engage the parking brake. Do not work
under raised implements.

60
 Operation

WARNING: When using the PTO drive with
a stationary tractor, ALWAYS make sure
that the gears are in neutral and that the
parking brake is applied.
WARNING: Before starting up any PTO-driven
implement hitched to the three-point linka-
ge, lift the implement to its full height using
position control and check that at least 1/4 of
the total length of the telescopic section of the
drive shaft is engaged. .
Use in paddy fields
When using the tractor in water-logged soil or in paddy
fields where the water level could rise above the height
of the PTO shaft, ask you dealer for instructions on all
necessary waterproofing and sealing measures. If such
measures are not taken, the guarantee could be rende-
red invalid.

Brakes
The tractor is braked by means of two pedals (1 - Fig.
4-15) which separately control the brake of each rear
wheel. Braking on one side assists steering in tight
manoeuvres. By locking the rear wheel on the inside of
a curve, you can virtually turn the tractor around on its
own axis. For simultaneous braking during normal use
and for on-road use, simply lock the two pedals togeth-
er with the special brake coupling lock (2 - Fig. 4-16).

The parking brake consists of a hand lever (3 - Fig. 4-16)

which acts on the brake discs by means of a mechani-
cal control. It is fully independent of the foot brakes and
4
can therefore also be used as an emergency brake. The
lever is held in the parking position by a ratchet mecha-
nism. To release it, simply press the button (4 - Fig.
4-16) at the end of the lever and then lower this latter. Fig. 4-15

Warning: If you notice the brakes becoming,
less effective, identify the cause immediately
and repair.

Warning: Always keep the brake pedals cou-
pled with the relative lock (2) before leaving
the field and driving on public roads.

Warning: Always engage the hand brake

when the tractor is used for work at a stan-
dstill, even if only for brief periods of time.

Front brakes
On request, the tractors can be equipped with a braking
system for the front axle. This type of braking system is
of particular use when the tractor is driven on the road
Fig. 4-16
or when it it used in mountain areas.
The front brakes are only operated when both brake
NOTE: Always keep the brake pedals coupled for on-
pedals are used at the same time. When the tractor is
road driving to ensure simultaneous braking on all four
driven on the road, the brakes must be latched together
wheels. Never use the brakes independently when driv-
by means of the relative lock.
ing on public roads.
The front brakes are not activated when, during work on
When working on slopes, avoid using the front brakes
the field or in tight manoeuvres, only one pedal of the
as much as possible and select a lower gear in order to
independent brakes is used.
use engine braking.

61
Operation

Hydraulic trailer brake (approved

for ITALY) [4.2.i]
To operate the hydraulic trailer brake system, connect
the hose of the trailer brakes with the connection on
the back of the and join the pedals. This allows the
trailer itself to be braked along with the tractor.

Warning: If the engine is running, it is abso-

lutely necessary to operate che hand brake
before connectiong the trailer brake system
to the quick connection (2 - Fig. 4-17).

There is a specific indicator light (3 - Fig. 4-17) on the

control panel that keeps the operator informed about
the operating conditions of the trailer brake oil tap.
Fig.4-17 Hydraulic trailer brake tap.
1 - Valve unit;
Indicator light is off: when the oil tap is not connected 2 - Oil tap union;
to the trailer; when the trailer is connected and oil pres- 3 - Indicator light on dashboard.
sure in the circuit is regular.

Indicator light is on: when the engine is at a standstill

and the ignition key is turned to the first position; when
the hand brake is engaged with the engine running.

Caution: If the indicator light should come on

in conditions differing from those mentioned
above, this means that there is a fault in the
braking system and that, for obvious safety
reasons, the system must be serviced.

Hydraulic trailer brake (approved

for EXPORT market)

The braking system of the tractor can be equipped with

a hydraulic valve and tap (1, Fig. 4-18) that, if connected
to the hydraulic circuit of the trailer brakes, allows the
trailer to be braked along with the tractor.
Attach and detach the hydraulic trailer brake tubes to
and from the union (2, Fig. 4-18) installed at the rear of
the tractor. This operation should be carried out with
the utmost care: your safety and that of others is at
stake.
The trailer brake tubes can be attached and detached
whilst the tractor engine is running..

Fig.4-18 Hydraulic trailer braking tap

1 - Valve unit and tap
2 - Hydraulic tap

62
 Operation

Differential lock
The rear axle differential is equipped with a locking
device to be engaged when one of the rear wheels
slips owing to lack of grip. To lock the differential, slow
the tractor down and briefly depress the button (1 - Fig.
4-19) placed under the control panel of the electronic
lift. For tractors with 4WD and front axle equipped with
the “Hydralock” hydraulic control, the button controls
the engagement both of the rear and front differential
lock.
A yellow function indicator on the instrument panel
lights up to indicate that the diff lock is engaged.

NOTE: For best results, engage the differential lock

before the wheels are likely to slip. Do not engage the
lock while one of the wheels is actually slipping. Always
depress the clutch pedal before locking the differential. Fig.4-19 (1) Differential lock engagement button
(electro-hydraulic).
The differential must remain locked until both driving
wheels are no longer slipping. Depress one or both
brake pedals to disengage the lock.

WARNING: Disengage the diff lock when you

need to turn the tractor. Disengage the lock
when driving on a road.

4
4WD front drive
The purpose of the front drive is to increase traction
on broken ground, mud and slippery surfaces, etc.
The control lever (1, Fig. 4-20) is used to engage and
disengage the front drive. Both manoeuvres can be car-
ried out whilst the tractor is driving in a straight line and
never under stress.

NOTE: Only use four-wheel drive when strictly neces-

sary. Avoid use of 4WD when maximum traction is not
required, e.g.on hard ground, roads. etc., since this
would only increase tyre wear unnecessarily. Always
leave the 4WD lever engaged when parking on slopes
with the trailer connected.

Fig.4-20 A - Front drive engaged - Lever forward

B -Front drive disengaged - Lever back

63
Operation

Track adjustment

Front track adjustment for 2-wheel drive HD He-

avy Duty - Max. steering angle 58°

WARNING: When you lift up the tractor to

adjust the wheel tracks, follow the directions
for lifting in the Safety Notes section.

The interflange between front wheels, i.e. the front

track of the 2WD tractor, can be adjusted to different si-
zes with increments of 100, 200 and 200 cm. See table
at the bottom of the page.
(Fig. 4-22).

Proceed as follows to adjust the track (Fig4-21).

• Use wooden wedges to block completely any axle
swing.
• Use a jack lift of suitable capacity at the centre of the
axle to lift the front axle. Fig.4-21 Front track adjustment for Heavy Duty tractors -
• Loosen and remove the bolts (1), nuts and washers Max. steering angle 58°
fixing the sliding ends.
• Remove the fixing bolts (2) of the clamps on the stee-
ring cylinder rods.
• Let the right-hand end slide to one side and fix it in
the position corresponding to the desired track width.
• Let the head of the right-hand rod of the steering
IMPORTANT: After removing and fitting the wheels back
cylinder slide to the side until it reaches the position
again, it is important to check the torques of all bolts by
corrensponding to the selected track width.
means of a torque wrench at the following intervals:
Tighten the retainer screw of the clamp at 110 Nm.
- First check after 10 work hours.
• Repeat the preceding operations for the left-hand end
- Second check after 50 work hours.
and for the left-hand rod of the steering cylinder.
- Third check and further checks every 500 work hours.
Tightening torque of the fixing bolt of the wheels: 13 to
15 daNm.

64
 Operation

Fig. 4-22: X - Interflange - mm

Position Increments X - Total
0 - 1550
1 50+50 1650
2 100+100 1850
3 100+100 2050

4
Fig. 4-22 Front track adjustment for 2WD Heavy Duty tractors - Max. steering angle 58°

65
Operation

Adjusting the max. steering angle

for 4WD axle
The maximum steering angle of the 4WD front axle can
be varied depending on the type of tyre mounted and
the way the tractor is used. The angle is changed by
adjusting the stop screw (1 - Fig. 4-23) on the final drive
of the axle.
This adjustment is very useful when adopting minimum
track since it prevents the wheels from interfering with
the engine housing.
The maximum steering angle is 55°.

Fig.4-23 - Adjusting the steering angle.

1 - Adjuster screw.
2 - Check nut.

Adjusting wheel track

4WD axle - Adjusting wheel track

The front track on 4WD tractors can be adjusted by

changing the position of the hubs and central wheel
discs as shown in the table below (Fig. 4-25).

Make sure that the wheel nuts are correctly tightened

to the prescribed torque wrench setting (Fig. 4-24):
Disc to hub: 270 Nm
Rim to disc: 210 Nm

WARNING: When you lift up the tractor to

adjust the wheel tracks, follow the directions
for lifting in the Safety Notes section.

WARNING: Maximum attention must be used

when dismounting the front wheels: because
of their weight, a suitable hoist must be used Fig.4-24
to remove and handle the wheels.

IMPORTANT: After removing and fitting the wheels back

again, it is important to check the torques of all bolts by
means of a torque wrench at the following intervals:
- First check after 10 work hours.
- Second check after 50 work hours.
- Third check and further checks every 500 work hours.

66
 Operation

Fig.4-25 Wheel track adjusting for 4WD axle

Wheel disc pointing inwards Wheel disc pointing outwards

A E

B F

C G

D H
4
Interflange 1687 mm - Wheel tracks for 4WD front axle - mm - Fig.4-25
Mod Tyres Rims A B C D E F G H
75-80 12.4R20 W11-20 1541 1635 1759 1853 - - - -
80-90 360/70R20 W11-20 1541 1635 1759 1853 - - - -
80-90 14.9LR20 W11-20 1541 1635 1759 1853 - - - -
80-90-100 13.6R24 W12-24 1427 1540 1595 1686 1708 1799 1854 1967
90-100 380/70R24 W12-24 1427 1540 1595 1686 1708 1799 1854 1967
90-100 440/65R24 W13-24 1427 1540 1595 1686 1708 1799 1854 1967
75-80-90-100 12.4R24 W10-24 1440 1553 1608 1673 1721 1786 1841 1954
80-90-100 360/70R24 W12-24 1440 1553 1608 1673 1721 1786 1841 1954
75-80-90-100 11.2R24 W10-24 1440 1553 1608 1673 1721 1786 1841 1954
90-100 400/70R24 W13-24 1427 1540 1595 1686 1708 1799 1854 1967
90-100 320/70R24 W10-24 1440 1553 1608 1673 1721 1786 1841 1954
90-100 360/70R20 W11-20 1427 1540 1595 1686 1708 1799 1854 1967

Interflange 1887 mm - Wheel tracks for 4WD front axle - mm - Fig.4-25

Mod Tyres Rims A B C D E F G H

105-110 14.9R24 W12-24 1627 1740 1795 1886 1908 1999 2054 2167
105-110 13.6R24 W12-24 1627 1740 1795 1886 1908 1999 2054 2167
105-110 380/70R24 W12-24 1627 1740 1795 1886 1908 1999 2054 2167
105-110 440/65R24 W13-24 1627 1740 1795 1886 1908 1999 2054 2167
105-110 12.4R24 W10-24 1640 1753 1808 1873 1921 1986 2041 2154
105-110 360/70R24 W12-24 1627 1740 1795 1886 1908 1999 2054 2167
105-110 11.2R24 W10-24 1640 1753 1808 1873 1921 1986 2041 2154
105-110 420/70R24 W13-24 1627 1740 1795 1886 1908 1999 2054 2167


67
Operation

Rear track width adjustment

The rear track width can be adjusted by changing the
position of the rim fixing points or the central wheel
discs, as shown in the Fig. 4-27 below.

Torque the nuts and bolts (Fig. 4-26) that fix the rim to
the disc to 240 Nm (1) and those that fix the disc to the
wheel hub to 320 Nm (2). Always check tyre pressure.

Certain track widths cannot be obtained with some tyre

types (see table Fig. 4-28).

WARNING: When you lift up the tractor to Fig.4-26

adjust the wheel tracks, follow the directions
for lifting in the Safety Notes section.
WARNING: Maximum attention must be used
when dismounting the rea wheels: because of
their weight, a suitable hoist must be used to
remove and handle the wheels.
IMPORTANT: After removing and fitting the wheels back
again, it is important to check the torques of all bolts by
means of a torque wrench at the following intervals:
- First check after 10 work hours.
- Second check after 50 work hours.
- Third check and further checks every 500 work hours.

Adjusting rear track widths - Rim and disc position

Wheel disc pointing inwards Wheel disc pointing outwards

A E

B F

C G

D H

Fig.4-27

68
 Operation

Table Fig.4-28

Mod. 75-80 - Wheel tracks for rear axle in mm. Interflange 1540mm - Fig.4-27

Mod. Tyres Rims A B C D E F G H

75-80 14.9R28 W12-28 - - - 1508 1590 1702 1796 1908

75-80 16.9R28 W14-28 - - - 1508 1590 1702 1796 1908
- 80 480/65R28 W14-28 - - - - 1590 1702 1796 1908
75 - 14.9R30 DWW13-30 - - - 1505 1595 1708 1792 1905
75-80 16.9R30 DW14L-30 - - - 1508 1592 1705 1795 1908
- 80 480/70R30 DWW15-30 - - - 1508 1592 1705 1795 1908
- 80 16.9R34 DWW15-34 - - - 1512 1592 1709 1795 1912
75-80 12.4R36 W11-36 - - 1404 1504 1600 1700 1804 1904
- 80 13.6R36 W11-36 - - - 1504 1600 1700 1804 1904
- 80 13.6R38 DWW12-38 - - - 1504 1600 1700 1804 1904

Mod. 90-100 - Wheel tracks for rear axle in mm. Interflange 1640 mm - Fig.4-27

Mod. Tyres Rims A B C D E F G H

90-100 16.9R30 DW14-30 - - - 1608 1692 1805 1895 2008

90-100
90-100
16.9R30
500/70R34
DW14L-30
DWW15-34
-
-
-
-
-
-
1515
1604
1785
1700
1825
1820
1895
1904
2008
2004 4
90-100 18.4R30 DWW15-30 - - - 1608 1692 1805 1895 2008
90-100 16.9R34 DWW15-34 - - - 1612 1692 1809 1895 2012
90-100 480/70R34 DWW15-34 - - - 1612 1692 1809 1895 2012
90-100 540/65R34 DWW15-34 - - - 1612 1692 1809 1895 2012
90-100 13.6R38 DWW12-38 - - 1504 1604 1700 1800 1904 2004
90-100 13.6R36 DW14-36 - - - 1604 1700 1800 1904 2004

Mod. 105-110 - Wheel tracks for rear axle in mm. Interflange 1640 mm - Fig.4-27

Mod. Tyres Rims A B C D E F G H

105-110 16.9R30 DW14-30 - - - 1608 1692 1805 1895 2008

105-110 16.9R30 DW14L-30 - - - 1515 1785 1825 1895 2008
105-110 500/70R34 DWW15-34 - - - 1604 1700 1820 1904 2004
105-110 18.4R30 DWW15-30 - - - 1608 1692 1805 1895 2008
105-110 16.9R34 DWW15-34 - - - 1612 1692 1809 1895 2012
105-110 480/70R34 DWW15-34 - - - 1612 1692 1809 1895 2012
105-110 540/65R34 DWW15-34 - - - 1612 1692 1809 1895 2012
105-110 13.6R38 DWW12-38 - - 1504 1604 1700 1800 1904 2004
105-110 18.4R34 DWW15-34 - - - 1612 1692 1809 1895 2012
105-110 520/70R34 DWW15-34 - - - 1612 1692 1809 1895 2012
105-110 16.9R38 DWW15-38 - - - 1604 1700 1800 1904 2004
105-110 13.6R36 DW14-36 - - - 1604 1700 1800 1904 2004

69
Operation

Wheels and tyres Wheel removing procedure

Regularly check that the front and rear wheel nuts are WARNING: If a wheel has to be removed (e.g.
fully tightened. to remove a punched tyre), this operation
must be carried out by a suitably equipped
Tyre pressure must be checked and adjusted before workshop. If the suitable equipment or such
using the tractor. Make further checks at regular inter- a workshop are not available, take the tractor
vals. to a specialised workshop, where the tractor
will be lifted with an equipment suited to its
NOTE: Tractors are supplied by the manufacturer with weight and dimensions.
tyres inflated at higher pressures then recommended.
The pressure should be adjusted afterwards by the user
Procedure
according to values given in the tables of tyre manufac-
- Turn off the engine, engage the parking brake and the
turers and to the use anticipated for the tractor.
first gear. Engage the Park Lock (if equipped).
- To remove a front wheel apply a jack lift of suitable ca-
If these simple rules are carefully followed, they will
pacity at the front axle next to the wheel to be remove
ensure maximum working life for your tyres.
(Fig.4-28b).
- To remove a rear wheel, use wooden wedges on the
If you notice any cuts in the tread or side walls, have
front axle to block completely any tractor swing. Use a
them vulcanized immediately to avoid further damage
jack lift of suitable capacity in the centre of the rear axle
to the tyre.
(Fig.4-28c).
- Loosen the nuts (bolts) fastening the wheel of about one
Drive slowly on roads if the pressure in the tyres has
turn by the provided wrench.
been reduced for use on soft earth.
- Before lifting the tractor, check there are no persons next
to it and do not touch the tractor again until it is not again
To obtain maximum efficiency, do not use tyres with
lowered to the ground.
more than 30-50% wear.
- Lift the tractor a few centimetres.
- Unscrew all nuts (bolts) that fasten the wheel and re-
NOTE: If the tractor is not going to be used for a long
move the wheel
period of time, support it on raised blocks to remove the
- Inflate the tyre if required. See the inflating procedure
load from the tyres.
in this chapter.
- Mount the wheel taking to exactly match the locating
NOTE: Avoid parking the tractor on floors which are
pins. Screw the nuts (bolts) down again.
covered with oil or diesel fuel. Also avoid parking the
- Lower the tractor to the ground. Remove the jack and
tractor where the tyres are permanently exposed to
fully tighten the nuts (bolts) alternating a nut (bolt) with
direct sunlight, especially if the tractor is not going to be
the opposite one.
used for some time.
- As soon as possible, take your tractor to the service
workshop to tighten the wheel nuts (bolts) to the pre-
WARNING: Use a suitable hoist or lifting
scribed torque.
device to handle, mount and dismount the
wheels.

Fig.4-28b Fig.4-28c

70
 Operation

Tyre inflation procedure

DO NOT inflate a tyre that has gone completely flat. If
the tyre has lost all air pressure, have a qualified tyre
mechanic service the tyre.

WARNING: A tyre must always be inflated wi-

thin a restraining device (tyre inflation cage)
(Fig. 4-28d).

Proceed as follows to inflate a tyre:

- Use a safety hose of suitable length, equipped with
air nozzle, double-valve gauge and graduated scale to
measure pressure. Fig.4-28d
- Keep a safe distance from the tyre and keep before
inflating the tyre completely.
- Inflate the tyre to the recommended air pressure. DO
NOT INFLATE THE TYRE MORE THAN THE RECOM-
MENDED PRESSURE.

Tyres for 2WD axle

The 2WD axle is available on requesto on a few markets NOTE: Tractors are supplied by the manufacturer with
only. tyres inflated at higher pressures then recommended.
The table below contains the provided tyre types and The pressure should be adjusted afterwards by the user
the allowable matches of front and rear tyres (Fig.4-29). according to values given in the tables of tyre manufac-
turers and to the use anticipated for the tractor.
4
MODEL FRONT TYRES REAR TYRES

6.50-16(6 Pr)/4.00E16 13.6R28(123A8)/W12-28
75-2WD
7.50-16(6Pr)/5.50F16 14.9R28(128A8)/W12-28
7.50-16(6Pr)/5.50F16 12.4R32(6Pr)/W10-32

7.50-18(6Pr)/W5.50F18 16.9R30(137A8)/DW14-30

80-2WD 7.50-16(6Pr)/W5.50F16 14.9R30(129A8)/W13-30
7.50-16(6Pr)/W5.50F16 16.9R30(6Pr)/W14L-30
7.50-18(6Pr)/W5.50F18 12.4R36(6Pr)/W11-36

7.50-18(6Pr)/W5.50F 16.9R30(137A8)/DW14
90-2WD 7.50-20(6Pr)/W5.50F 18.4R30(142A8)/DWW15
7.50-16(6Pr)/5.50F16 14.9R30(129A8)/W13-30
7.50-16(6Pr)/5.50F16 16.9R30(6Pr)/W14L-30
7.50-18(6Pr)/5.50F18 12.4R36(6Pr)/W11-36

9.00-16(8Pr)/W8 480/70R34(143A8)/DWW15
100-2WD
7.50-20(6Pr)/W5.50F 18.4R30(142A8)/DWW15
7.50-20(6Pr)/W5.50F 13.6R38(128A8)/W12-38

105-2WD
9.00-16(8Pr)/W8 480/70R34(143A8)/DWW150
110-2WD
7.50-20(6Pr)/W5.50F 18.4R30(142A8)/DWW15

Fig. 4-29 Matching tyres for 2WD.

71
Operation

Tyres
The table below contains the provided tyre types and the allowable matches of front and rear tyres. Contact your Dealer
for more information on matching tyres.

For tractors with overdrive gearbox 40 Kph, only use tyres marked «load index A8».

MODEL FRONT TYRES REAR TYRES

4WD Tyre Radius Rim Tyre Radius Rim

index index

12.4R24 (119 A8) 540 W12-24 16.9R30 (137A8) 695 DW14-30
75
11.2R24 (114 A8) 515 W10-24 12.4R36 (124A8) 690 W11-36
11.2R24 (114 A8) 515 W10-24 16.9R28 (136A8) 670 W14-36
11.2R 24 (114 A8) 515 W10-24 14.9R30 (129A8) 665 DWW13-30
12.4R20 (116 A8) 490 W11-20 14.9R28 (128 A8) 640 W12-28

13.6R24 (121 A8) 560 W12-24 16.9R34 (139A8) 745 DWW15-34

13.6R24 (121 A8) 560 W12-24 13.6R38 (128 A8) 740 DWW12-38
12.4R24 (119 A8) 540 W10-24 13.6R36 (127A8) 715 W11-36
80 360/70R24 (122 A8) 540 W10-24 480/70R30 (141A8) 695 DWW15-30
11.2R24 (114 A8) 515 W10-24 12.4R36 (124A8) 690 W11-36
11.2R24 (114 A8) 515 W10-24 16.9R30 (137A8) 695 DW14L-30
12.4R20 (116 A8) 490 W11-20 14.9R28 (128 A8) 640 W12-28
360/70R20 (120 A8) 490 W11-20 480/65R28 (129A8) 640 W14-28

13.6R24 (121 A8) 560 W12-24 16.9R34 (139A8) 745 DWW15-34
440/65R24 (122A8) 560 W13-24 540/65R 34 (140 A8) 745 DWW 15-34
380/70R 24 (125 A8) 560 W12-24 480/70R34 (143A8) 745 DWW15-34
13.6R24 (121 A8) 560 W12-24 13.6R38 (128 A8) 740 DWW12-38
90 12.4R24 (119 A8) 540 W10-24 13.6R38 (128A8) 740 DWW12-38
360/70R24 (122 A8) 540 W10-24 13.6R38 (128A8) 740 DWW12-38
12.4R24 (119 A8) 540 W10-24 18.4R30 (142A8) 720 DWW15-30
11.2R24 (114 A8) 515 W10-24 13.6R36 (127A8) 715 W11-36
11.2R24 (114 A8) 515 W10-24 16.9R30 (137A8) 695 DW14L-30
14.9LR20 (119 A8) - W11-20 16.9R30 (137 A8) 695 DW14-30
320/70R 24 (116 A8) 515 W10-24 16.9R30 (137A8) 695 DW14L-30

440/65R24 (122 A8) 560 W13-24 540/65R34 (140 A8) 745 DWW15-34
13.6R24 (121 A8) 560 W12-24 16.9R34 (139 A8) 745 DWW15-34
380/70R 24 (125 A8) 560 W12-24 480/70R34 (143A8) 745 DWW15-34
100 360/70R24 (122 A8) 540 W10-24 13.6R38 (128A8) 740 DWW12-38
12.4R24 (119 A8) 540 W10-24 13.6R38 (128A8) 740 DWW12-38
12.4R24 (119 A8) 540 W10-24 18.4R30 (142A8) 720 DWW15-30
11.2R24 (114 A8) 515 W10-24 13.6R36 (127A8) 715 W11-36
320/70R 24 (116 A8) 515 W10-24 16.9R30 (137A8) 695 DW14L-30
11.2R24 (114 A8) 515 W10-24 16.9R30 (137A8) 695 DW14L-30

13.6R24 (121 A8) 560 W12-24 16.9R34 (139A8) 745 DWW15-34

440/65R24 (122 A8) 560 W13-24 540/65R34 (140 A8) 745 DWW15-34
380/70R 24 (125 A8) 560 W12-24 480/70R34 (143A8) 745 DWW15-34
105 360/70R24 (122 A8) 540 W10-24 13.6R38 (128A8) 740 DWW12-38
110 12.4R24 (119 A8) 540 W10-24 13.6R38 (128A8) 740 DWW12-38
12.4R24 (119 A8) 540 W10-24 18.4R30 (142A8) 720 DWW15-30
11.2R24 (114 A8) 515 W10-24 13.6R36 (127A8) 715 W11-36
320/70R 24 (116 A8) 515 W10-24 16.9R30 (137A8) 695 DW14L-30
11.2R24 (114 A8) 515 W10-24 16.9R30 (137A8) 695 DW14L-30

Fig. 4-30 Matching tyres for 4WD,

72
 Operation

Ballast [4.2.h]

When the tyre is not sufficiently loaded in relation to the

traction the tractor must produce during work, it may
easily slip, causing loss of speed and wear on the tread
plus reduced efficiency on the job. To get the most out
of tractor power, it is therefore advisable to ballast the
tractor by applying cast iron rings to the driving wheels
or by filling the tyres with water.

Ballasting the front axle

If heavy implements that might destabilize the tractor
are hitched to the lift, cast iron plates can be added to
the front end to counterbalance their weight (Fig. 4-31).

The plates have handles so that they can be mounted

and demounted more easily. Fig.4-31
They should be applied to the radiator core support and
fixed with the relative rods.
WARNING: Due to the great weight of each
Combinations: ballast, manual lifting of front and rear ballast
7 cast iron plates, 36 kg each = 252 kg weights could be dangerous for your safety.

Use exclusively a hook or suitable equipment

Ballasting the rear wheels to lift front and rear ballast weights.

Two or three cast iron rings can be applied to each

wheel, see Fig. 4-32. The first is fixed straight on to the 4
wheel while the second is fixed to the first ring.

The total weight that can be applied is therefore:

4 rings (2+2) each weghing 60 kg: total 240 kg.

IMPORTANT:
- Do not ballast the tractor over its rated carrying
weight.
- When using the tractor for light work, transport and
on-road towing, remove the ballast to avoid unneces-
sary strain on the mechanical components.
- With semi-mounted and fully mounted implements
(which inevitably increase the load on the rear axle
of the tractor), ballast must only be used when strictly
necessary. There is no point in increasing grip beyond Fig.4-32 -Ballasting the rear wheels.
the level necessary for efficient work as this will redu- Max. 2 rings for each wheel.
ce tyre life.
- Carefully check the tyre inflation pressure since this
will make the tyre last longer and ensure a more
regular use.
- The softer the soil, the lower tyre inflation must be,
while the tyre should be inflated to a greater extent as
the soil becomes more compact.

73
Operation

Ballasting with water
The tractor can also be ballasted by filling the tyres with
water.
To lower the freezing point a few degrees in winter,
add calcium chloride to the water in compliance with
the proportions given in the following table. The ballast
should evidently be removed when the job does not re-
quire excessive draft, otherwise the soil could become
excessively compressed.
The following table gives approximate values for the
liters of water and kilos of calcium chloride required to
prepare the antifreeze solution used to three-quarters
(75%) fill each tyre.
In relation to ballasting with cast iron rings on the dri-
ving wheels, this type of weighting offers the following
advantages:
- Low cost.
- Easy preparation.
- Improved steering.
- The weight of the driving wheels can be regulated
according to the real requirements.
CAUTION: Ballasting with water and calcium chlori-
de antifreeze solution can increase corrosion of the
components that come into contact with the mixtu-
re.

Fig.4-33 TYRE CAPACITIES FOR BALLASTING WITH WATER

Ballasting with antifreeze solution
Capacity
Commercial
Tyre to valve
sodium Weight of
size level Acqua
chloride solution
(75%) litri
70-72% Kg
litres
Kg

12.4-24 77 24 66 90
13.6-24 120 30 103 133
420/70-24 166 44 149 193
16.9-24 210 57 187 244
14.9-24 150 40 134 174
480/65-24 213 58 189 247
380/70-24 130 35 116 151
380/70-28 130 35 116 151
13.6-28 140 38 124 162
14.9-28 180 49 160 209
16.9-28 210 57 187 244
16.9-34 276 86 238 324
13.6-36 180 54 155 209
13.6-38 190 56 164 220
16.9-38 280 76 249 325
18.4-34 360 97 321 418
18.4-38 370 100 329 429
480/70-38 310 84 276 360
520/70-38 380 103 338 441
16.9-30 239 74 206 280
18.4-30 248 77 214 291

NOTE: This table contains only indicative data. The operator should ballast wheels with water on the base of the tables
issued by the tyre manufacturer and according to the use anticipated for the tractor.

74
 Operation

How to fill the tyres with water
WARNING: when you prepare a solution of
calcium chloride to ballast the tyres, NE-
VER EVER pour the water on to the calcium
chloride since this could lead to a violent
reaction. This danger can be avoided by
adding the calcium chloride very slowly to
the water and stirring until it has complete-
ly dissolved.
How to deflate the tyres
– Jack up the tyre in question (Fig. 4-34) and set it
with its valve pointing downwards.
– Unscrew the mobile union of the valve and allow the
water to drain from the tyre.
– Tighten the relative union into the valve housing and
place the tube (4) in contact with the tyre.

Jack up the wheel and position it with the valve right at
the top (Fig. 4-34).
Unscrew the movable union of the valve and wait until
the tyre deflates.
Tighten the relative fitting (3 - Fig. 4-34) into the valve
housing (1) and apply the tube (2). Air will escape from
the little tube (4) as the tyre is filled with water.
The tyres are filled to the three-quarter mark when wa-
ter escapes from the small tube (4) if this is positioned
completely downwards.
To add less water, i.e. obtain a lower weight, turn the
wheel so that the valve is in a more downward position.
– Blow in pressurized air through the union (2): the
remaining water will drain through the tube (4).
– Remove the union (3), replace it with the valve retai-
ner and then inflate the tyre.
NOTE - Never use ballasting systems differing from the
ones indicated above.
CAUTION: Ballasting with water and anti-freeze
solution containing calcium chloride might cause
corrosion of the parts in contact with the solution.

Tighten the union on the valve casing again and inflate

the tyre with air until obtaining the prescribed pressure.

Take the following precautions when preparing the

4
water-calcium chloride mixture (antifreeze solution for
the cold season):

- Pour the necessary amount of water in a vessel and

then pour in calcium chloride until the established
quantity has been reached. Never pour water on to
the calcium chloride as this would cause a violent
reaction.

- Only use the solution after it has completely cooled.

To limit the acidity, add 1% of soda in proportion to
the calcium chloride used.

- After inflating the tyre, thoroughly rinse any metal

parts that may have been wetted with this corrosive Fig.4-34- Indicative layout for water ballasting.
solution, with water.
1 - Valve housing.
2 - Water tube union.
3 - Special fitting to pour in and drain out the water.
4 - Air bleeding tube.

75
Operation

Implement hitch
The three point linkage is used to connect the tractor to
implements controlled by the hydraulic power lift.

The three point linkage is suitable for connection to

Class 2 implements according to the layout and data
given in Fig. 4-35.

Hitching the implement

To allow the lift to operate in the correct way, you must
carefully check the dimensions of the implements to be
coupled to the tractor (Fig. 4-35).
These couplings must be the same standard size as the
three point linkage of the tractor to prevent the whole
assembly from being subjected to irregular stress dur-
ing work, caused by dimensional incompatibility.

Weight of the implement

To prevent the regular operation of the lifting system
from being impaired, the weight of the implements
must be less than the maximum load the lift can raise.
This value (given in the specifications) is only indicative, Fig.4-35 Implement hitch dimensions
since the distance at which the barycenter of the imple- a. Distance of the center of gravity of the implement.
ment is set in relation to the three point linkage can As small as possible (the heavier the implement, the
also exercise a notable influence. shorter the distance must be).
b. Retraction of the third point: 0-80 mm.
If an implement, even when lighter than the indicated c. Height of top link hitch ball: 460 mm.
weight, is set at an excessive distance from the tractor, d. Length of bar: 825 to 1.5 mm.
it will bear down on the three point linkage with a much
greater weight than the weight of the implement itself. NOTE: The plough shown in the figure is purely indi-
cative since the dimensions are valid for any type of
implement.
Three point linkage
The articulated device with three point suspension
mainly consists of the following components (Fig. 4-36)

Lower links
The lower links (1) transmit draft and support to the
implement. Different types are available:
- lower links with fixed ball-ends for all models;
- lower links with interchangeable ball-ends of 1st and
2nd Class, Mod. 75 only.
- lower links with quick couplings (available on re-
quest).

WARNING: Always keep clear of the imple- Fig. 4-36

ment operating area [4.2.b]. 1. Lower links.
Do not stand between the tractor and the 2. Lh vertical lift rod.
three point hitch when the hitch controls 3. Adjustable fork of lh lift rod.
are operated. 4. Lever to adjust length of rh lift rod.
Always check that all persons are well clear 5. Rh vertical lift rod.
of the operating area and the surrounding 6. Adjustable top links to limit the swing of the lower lift
areas. rods.
7. Adjustable top link.

76
 Operation

Interchangeable ball-ends - Mod.75-Fig.4-37

To make it easier to adapt the three-point hitch to the

various types of implement used, Class 1 and 2 interchan-
geable ball ends (A) are mounted on the ends of the lower
rods of the three-point linkage. Class 1 ball ends have a
22.4 mm inner diameter, while Class 2 ball ends have a
29 mm inner diameter.

To change, remove the safety pin (B) and turn the ball
end to align the shaped part with the race at the end of
the rod.

Mount the new ball end, then lock it in place with the
safety pin (B), checking to make sure that it is free to Fig. 4-37
turn in its housing.

Quick hitch couplings (on request) Fig.4-38

Open the latches (D) of the quick hitch couplings (C). Re-
verse the tractor and hitch the drawbar of the implement.
Release the latches.They will automatically engage the
ball ends on the drawbar. Then adjust the length of the
top link and hitch it too.

Adjustable lh lift rod (Fig.4-39 and Fig. 4-40)

The pin can be turned 90° to obtain two adjustments of

the fork (3) of the lh lift rod (2): One with fixed pin (E), and 4
one with the pin sliding within groove (F). The adjustment
Fig. 4-38
with sliding pin is useful with very wide implements (rotary
ploughs, harrows, etc.) that need a certain amount of free
side swing.
The length of the vertical rod can also be adjusted by
screwing or unscrewing the lower fork. Remove the safety
pin and draw the fixing pin out to release the fork.

Adjustable rh lift rod (Fig. 4-36)

The length of the rh adjustable lift rod (5) can be adju-

sted by means of the relative crank (4). This adjustment
is very useful since it levels the implement depending
on the type of work being carried out.

Turn the lever clockwise to shorten the rh vertical lift Fig.4-39

rod.

Turn the lever anticlockwise to lengthen the rh vertical

lift rod.

Fig. 4-40

77
Operation

Stabilizers to limit side swing - Fig. 4-36 Releasing the implement

The stabilizers (6) that limit the side swing of the
implements can be regulated in length by screwing or
tightening the relative sleeve. The top links must be
adjusted according to the type of implement and the
job in hand.
The top links must be lengthened to limit the side
swing of implements in order to:
• transport any type of implement
• work with: levellers, rollers, hoes, seeders, weeders
and similar implements.
The stabilizers must be shortened to allow freedom of
movement for work with: ploughs, harrows, etc.
The length of the stabilizers can be regulated for par-
ticular requirements so that the implement is off-center
in relation to the axis of the tractor. In this case, the
stabilizers must be adjusted at different lengths, always
making sure that the implement is blocked.
1. Lower the implement completely to the ground.
2. Shorten the side stabilizers to give maximum play
to the lower hitching links.
3. Remove the safety pins and release the coupling
bar.
Important recommendations when using and adju-
sting the three-point linkage.
Warning: Always stop the engine before mak-
ing any adjustments to the three point hitch
or the implement.
Warning: Always use the lift in position control
mode when transporting implements hitched
to the three point linkage.
Warning: Always use the lift in position con-
trol mode when an implement is hitched or
unhitched to or from the three point linkage..

Adjustable top link Warning: When the tractor is stopped, always

The adjustable top link (7 - Fig. 4-36) is connected to the
support by means of two holes. The correct hole to use
depends on the height of the implement.
The length of the link is varied so that the angle of the
implement can be regulated in relation to the ground.
Shorten the top link to increase the angle of attach-
ment, lengthen it to decrease the angle.
lower any implements connected to the three
point linkage [4.2.c].
Warning: Never work under an implement
that is kept raised only by the hydraulic hitch,
but always secure it with a suitable hydraulic
support and turn the engine off.

During work, the top link must slightly descend towards

the tractor, when the lower links are parallel to the
ground.

When work using lifting in draft control mode is carried

out, you must not forget that it is preferable to couple
the implement to the top hole when the towed load is
particularly heavy.

Hitching the implement

1. Allow the three point linkage to descend.
2. Adjust the top links so as to give the maximum side
play.
3. Back up the tractor.
4. Connect the coupling bar of the implement to the
ball-ends of the lower links and lock it in place with
the safety pins.
5. Adjust the length of the top links to give the imple-
ment freedom of sideways movement or lock it in
place according to the type of work required.

78
 Operation

Hydraulic power lift

The hydraulic power lift allows the implements connect-
ed to the three point linkage to be lifted and lowered.
It consists of a lifting unit that includes the ram and
controls, a gear pump and the connecting tubes.

The hydraulic power lift can operate.

1. In position control mode, i.e. when the work height

is controlled.

2. In draft control mode, i.e. when the work depth is

controlled depending on the tractive force.

3. Floating mode.
Fig.4-41 - A: Lift links control levers.
4. Mixed position and draft control mode - INTERMIX.

The operating mode is selected by combined use of the

The lift links are completely down when
lift link lever (1) and lever (2) used to select draft control,
the control lever is in this position.
position control and mixed «Intermix» control (Fig. 4-41).
The numbers on the control are used by the operator
as references so that he can make sure that the control
levers are in the exact position.
The lift links are completely up when
the lift links are in this position.
NOTE: During the running-in period, it is important
to clean the oil filter of the lift after the first 50 hours
service.
B. Selector lever for draft control, position 4
control and mixed draft and position control
(INTERMIX).

Adjusting the lowering speed (if

mounted) Knob at end of forward travel = full
draft control zone.
Turn the knob (1, Fig.4-41b) to adjust the lowering
speed according to the weight of the implement. Knob at end of backward travel = posi-
tion control position.
Clockwise direction = max. speed
Anti-clockwise direction = min. speed Knob between the two end of travel
INTERMIX positions = mixed draft and position
control zone divided into two parts:
blue zone = draft control increases
as the knob nears the end of forward
travel position
red zone = position control increases
as the lever nears the end of backward
travel position.

C.Nut to lock lever A.

Fig.4-41b

79
Operation

Work in position control mode

Position control mode allows the implement to be
brought to and kept in a determined position, which-
ever this may be. This includes the highest and lowest
positions either in or out of the soil.

Position control mode is used for:

• Mounted implements, i.e. without wheels or other

components allowing them to rest on the around (e.g.:
graders, scrubbers, drills, fertilizer-spreaders, etc.).

• Semi-mounted implements, i.e. equipped with wheels

or other components allowing them to rest on the
ground (e.g.: rotary ploughs, trenchers, weeders,
seeders, etc.).
Fig.4-42 - 1: Lift links control levers.
Use of the controls (Fig. 4-42)
• Move the lever (2) fully back to the position control
setting.
• To adjust the work position of the implement, progres-
sively move the control lever (1) downwards or upwards
until the desired position has been reached and then
lock the check nut (3) under the lever itself to obtain
the same work position on each run.

Work in draft control mode

Lift operation in draft control mode automaticaly keeps
the tractive force of the tractor at a steady rate regardless
of variations in the soil conditions.

Draft control mode is used with all mounted tractor im-

plements which do not rest on the ground (e.g.: skids,
wheels, etc.).

Use of the controls (Fig. 4-42)

• Move the lever (2) fully forwards to the draft control
position.

• Dig the implement down the desired depth at the be-

ginning of the furrow, progressively moving the control
lever (1) forwards. The depth reached by the implement
will be proportional to the movement of the lever.

• When the implement has reached the required depth,

lock the nut (3) in front of the control lever so that the
same depth is obtained on each run.

• Move the control lever (1) back to raise the implement

at the end of each run.
• Control lever travel must be very slight when working
at shallow depths.
To prevent the implement from digging into the soil too
slowly, it is advisable to move the lever fully forwards
and the beginning of each run, by-passing lock (3) and
to then progressively move the lever back to the de-
sired position, by-passing lock (3) again in the opposite
direction.
Fig. 4-43 Lift in full draft control mode (selector lever
fully forwards). The work depth of the implement may
vary considerably depending on the consistency of
the soil (e.g.: zone 1 = normal soil, zone 2 = very hard
and compact soil), while the depth remains more or
less uniform when the types of soil are similar (zone 1),
either on the flat or with humps and hollows.

80
 Operation

Mixed position and draft control

(Intermix)
When the lever (2 - Fig. 4-45) is moved completely
forwards, the lift will operate in full draft control mode
while full position control mode is obtained by mov-
ing the lever completely back. When the lever is set to
intermediate positions, the lift will operate in Intermix
mode, i.e. in mixed draft and position conditions.

The lever can assume as many positions as there is

space between the two ends of the sector. Its proxim-
ity to the front or rear part influences draft or position
control to a greater extent as shown in the examples.
The operator must therefore identify the best position
for the selector lever according to the type of soil being
worked, thus obtaining the best compromise between
draft variations and depth.
Work best carried out in mixed position and draft
control mode (Intermix) (Fig. 4-44).
Ploughing
a) When working soils of strongly different types (sandy
zones mixed with clayey ones) where full draft control
could lead to excessive depth variations.
b) When shallow depths are required.
c) To achieve the best work conditions when semi-
mounted ploughs with several shares are used.
Fig.4-44 Lift «Intermix» mixed position and draft control
mode. The maximum and minimum work depths of the
implement are limited to the average work value (e.g.:
zone 1 = normal soil, zone 2 = very hard and compact
soil) since movement of the lever towards position
control mode has reduced the operating sensitivity of
draft control mode and has partially activated position
control.
Swinging support
A further control on the sensitivity can be obtained by
correctly choosing the top link connecting hole (A) on
the swinging support (Fig.4-44b).

Work with other implements:

When draft control is required to a certain extent in
order to make the tractive force of the tractor more
regular. Even partial use of draft control mode leads to
work depth variations and it is thanks to these that the
tractive force of the tractor is kept at a more constant
level.
Set the top link in the lowest hole (1) to increase the
draft control sensitivity. 4
Set it in the top hole (2) for the least sensitivity.
WARNING: Never tow with the top link connec-
ted to the swinging support of the hydraulic
hitch.

Floating position
This is used for implements that must simply rest on
the ground and follow its contours (e.g.: roller, seeder,
etc.). In this case, the lift links are completely free to
swing and the lift just lowers and raises the implement
at the beginning and end of the run.
(Fig. 4-45) Use of the lift in float mode is obtained by
setting the lever (2) fully back in the position control
setting and the link control lever (A) fully forwards. Just
use the control lever (1) to lift or lower the implement.

Fig.4-44b- Holes (1 - 2) to connect the top link (A) with

the swinging support.

Fig.4-45 - 1: Lift link control levers.

81
Operation

Outer power lift control lever.

(On request)
The outer lever (1 - Fig.4-45b) controls a toothed sector
that releases 1 cm at a time.
Before using the outer lever, the lever controlling the lift
operating mode (2 - Fig.4-45) must be set in the position
control mode (excluding draft control).

To raise the lift

1 - Release the locking device (2)
2 - Lower the outer control lever grabbing the handgrip
(1) according to the required shifting.
3 - Turn the handgrip (1) to activate the movement.
4 - The power lift raises according to the shifting set by
the handgrip (1). Fig.4-45b - Locking device (2).

To lower the lift

1 - Turn the handgrip (1).
2 - Lower the outer control lever grabbing the handgrip
(1) according to the required shifting.
3 - The power lift lowers according to the shifting set
by the handgrip (1).
4 - Engage the locking device (2).

DANGER: External controls must be operated

at a safe distance, standing on one side out-
side the tractor and out of the overall width of
mudguards. It is expressly forbidden to ope-
rate the controls from the rear of the tractor Fig. 4-45c
or standing on the inner side of wheels.(Fig.
4-45c)

AUXILIARY CONTROL VALVES [4.2.f]

A maximum of four auxiliary control valves can be installed WARNING: The tractor must only be started
on request on the right side of the hydraulic power lift. with the auxiliary valve levers are in neutral.
These valves control the external rams and are coupled
to the hydraulic power lift system and use the same oil
of this system.

The levers of the auxiliary control valves connected to the

lift hydraulic circuit are mounted on the console on the
right-hand side of the driver’s seat (Fig. 4-46).

Joystick (1) - It is coupled, at request, to two auxiliary

control valves. If shifted forwards, it controls the 1st valve,
if shifted laterally it controls the 2nd valve. Pull up the knob
(2) to release the joystick.

Levers 2 are coupled each to its own control valve, with

locking device in neutral position and SA/DA adjustment.
Max. 3 levers without joystick.

Different types of control valve can be mounted, depen-

ding on the type of work involved:

• Standard control valve for single and double-acting

cylinders.
If released, the control lever automatically returns to
the hold position, locking the implement in the posi-
tion it has assumed. Fig. 4-46

82
 Operation

• Control valve with “kick-out” automatic release and

floating position (optional on some models), conver-
tible from single to double acting. The control lever
remains locked in the assumed position. Once the
cylinder has reached end of stroke, the pressure
automatically releases the lever, setting it back in the
neutral position.
The lever can be moved back to the neutral position
by hand before the cylinder reaches end of stroke.

• Control valve with floating position, used for im-

plements that need a continuous and automatic
adjustment of the work position. The floating posi-
tion is obtained by moving the lever forward to the
second setting, where it remains locked.

Lock and single/double-acting conversion knob
(Fig.4-46)
Pos A - Turn anti-clockwise for single acting (SE)
mode.
Pos B - Central position (DE) for double acting mode.
Pos C - Turn clockwise to lock the lever in neutral posi-
tion.
Quick couplings
(Fig4-47)
Each control valve has two quick coupling female half-
connections of the “Push-Pull” type that can be connec-
ted to male half-couplings of any make so long as they
are of the same size. The half-coupling is very simple
to couple and uncouple: push to connect and pull to
detach (Fig. 4-79a).
Red - delivery/lifted
Yellow - return/lowered
WARNING: Remove any pressure from the
circuit before hitching or unhitching the
quick couplings.
WARNING: When auxiliary control valves
are used, their quick couplings can reach
high temperatures. Therefore, safety glo-
ves suitable for such temperatures must be
worn every time the connected implements
are connected to or disconnected from the
couplings.
Fig.4-47 - Quick coupling for auxiliary control valves.
NOTE: To ensure that the hydraulic circuit operates in
a regular way, the level of the transmission oil must be
frequently checked and topped up if necessary, as indi-
cated in the “Checking the transmission oil lever” part of
the Maintenance chapter.
WARNING: Make sure that the hydraulic cylinders of
the connected implements contain the same type of
4
oil as the transmission unit of the tractor to pre-
vent this from being polluted and leading to faulty
operation.
Supplementary cylinders for
hydraulic power lift
On request (Fig.4-48)
The hydraulic power lift can be equipped (on request)
with one or two supplementary cylinders (1 - Fig.4-48)
directly powered by the control valve of the lift. The
lifting capacity increases of a 25% for each cylinder.
Contact your Dealer or Area Agent to have the supple-
mentary cylinders mounted and the relative hydraulic
connections made.

Flow divider (if installed)

On request, a flow divider is available (3 - Fig. 79a) that
is mounted on the input plate of the control valve pack
and is coupled with the first auxiliary control valve, of a
type specific for operation with a flow divider.
Flow regulation
This device regulates the oil flow to the first control
valve, and is specially useful for those implements that
require a very limited oil flow to obtain precise move-
ments, or to regulate the speed in a hydraulic engine.
It also maintains an oil flow sufficient to use the lift
system and the external circuit at the same time, if only
the first auxiliary valve is used. To regulate the flow,
simply turn the control knob on the flow divider. Fig.4-48

83
Operation

Safety structure
The tractor is equipped with a roll-bar safety structure
mounted behind the driving seat and approved accor-
ding to the CURRENT OCSE and EEC STANDARDS. The
protective structure is formed by two parts, one upper
and one lower, which are bolted together.
The tractor must only be used with the protec-
tive structure in the upright position (Fig. 4-49).

WARNING: The tractor could tip up if used
incorrectly. Protection is only guarante-
ed when the protective structure is in its
original upright position with the fixing
bolts tightened as described in the assembly
instructions.

WARNING: It is absolutely forbidden to tie
towing chains or ropes to the safety frame Fig.4-49
or the tractor could jack up. Always tow
owing the proper devices supplied with the
tractor. WARNING

Always wear the safety belt with the safety frame in the
upright position.
Never wear the safety belts when the protecti-
ve structure is lowered.
If the tractor must pass through low places or
be parked their for maintenance purposes and
the top part of the protective structure must
be folded at an angle, remember that there is
not enough protection for the tractor driver
in this position and that he could risk serious
injury. Remember that after use in low places,
it is absolutely necessary to set the protective
structure back in its upright position before
continuing with any work.
Avoid injury! Make certain all parts are installed
correctly if the safety structure is loosened or
removed for any reason.
The protection offered by the safety structure
will be impaired if it is is subjected to structu-
ral damage, as in an overturn accident, or is in
anyway altered by welding, bending, drilling or
cutting. A damaged safety structure should be
replaced, NOT reused. Always keep upper part
of the safety structure pinned in vertical posi-
tion (as in the above Figure) when operating the
tractor. If the tractor is operated with the safety
structure folded down (e.g. to enter a low bu-
ilding) drive with extreme caution and DO NOT
use seat belt.
Fold the safety structure up again as soon as
the tractor is operated under normal conditions.

Comply with the following procedure if it is essential WARNING: Use of the tractor with collap-
to fold down the protective structure for the above sed or removed safety frame is absolutely
reasons (Fig.4-49 and Fig.4-50): forbidden.

- Remove the beacon (4) to avoid damaging it.

- Remove the fixing pins (2).
- Overturn the protective structure (1) until it rests on
the rubber stopper (3).
- Fit the fixing pins and relative nuts (2) as illustrated.
- Before you use the tractor again in any way,
set the protective structure (1) back in the
upright position by carrying out the ope-
rations described above in reverse order.
Tighten the fixing pins and nuts (2) to 150
Nm (110.634 lbf ft).

Fig.4-50

84
 Operation

Tractor transport
Towing the tractor [4.1.j]
If you need to tow or push the tractor for a brief distance,
remember that the power steering system will allow you
to drive and steer it for a short way with the engine off.
Put the following controls in NEUTRAL (Fig. 4-51
and 4-52):

1- Reverse shuttle lever (1 - Fig. 4-51)

2- Gearshift lever (1- Fig. 4-52)

3- Range selector lever (2 - Fig. 4-52)

4- Ensure that the PTO lever in in disengaged position

(3- Fig. 4-52)
Fig.4-51
5- Disengage the parking brake (4 - Fig, 4-52)

How to drive the tractor

• To drive the tractor, you will need to excercise

greater effort if the engine is at a standstill.
• Slow and stop the tractor with the brake pedals
latched together (2 - Fig. 4-51)
• Tow or push the tractor at moderate speed.

How to safely drive the tractor 4

• Affix the slow moving vehicle card (SMV-Slow
Moving Veicle).
• Use the revolving beacon and the hazard lights.
• Strictly comply with the laws in force in the country
where the tractor is used.

Tractor transport
The tractor must be transported with a suitable vehicle
(Fig. 4-53).
Engage the parking brake (4 - Fig. 4-52). Fig.4-52
Firmly fasten the tractor to the transport vehicle using
suitable chains or straps.
Use the tow bar or its supports as rear fixing points for
the tractor.

CAUTION: Never hitch or connect chains around the

tractor components as these could be damaged by
the chains themselves or by excessive loads.

The trailer must be provided with the warning signs and

lights required by the local laws in force.

Fig.4-53

85
Operation
Towing the tractor
[4.1.j]
Towing the tractor is not recommended, but if it should be
absolutely necessary, the procedure is different depending
on the fact that the engine is on or off, and that the low
pressure hydraulic circuit is operating or not operating.
Use the following procedures as applicable, at the fol-
lowing conditions:
- Connect safely one the tow hooks of the machine to the
towing vehicle by means of a rigid drawbar, or a chain, or
a metal cable of suitable size.
- In the middle of the linking means a red flag is to be
hanged so that it is visible to other drivers on the road.
- The towing vehicle must keep the rotating beacon light
operating. The towed tractor must keep the flashing hazard
lights operating (turn indicators flashing contemporarily).
- Make sure that the brakes of the machine are operating.
- It is recommended that the machine is escorted by two
cars, one in front of it and one at the rear, at a distance of
75÷150 m from the machine. These cars must carry danger
signals according to the rules and laws of the country.
NOTE: For the tow hooks fixed on the machine, see the
Towing Attachments chapter in the Technical specifica-
tions section of this book.
CAUTION: Use only the appropriate tow hooks to
tow the tractor.
86
Towing the tractor with the engine off or low pres-
sure hydraulic circuit not operating.
WARNING: If the machine is towed with the
engine off (or with the low pressure hydraulic
circuit not operating), the brakes and steering
will not be power assisted if this depends on
the low pressure hydraulic circuit. The par-
king brake must be disengaged.
- The machine can be towed for max. 10 Km at a max.
speed of 8 Kph.
WARNING: Make sure that the weight of a trai-
led vehicle that is not equipped with brakes
NEVER EXCEEDS the weight of the tractor that
is towing the vehicle or any national weight
limitations which may apply. Stopping di-
stance increases with increasing speed as the
weight of the towed load increases, especially
on slopes.
Towing the tractor with the engine on or low pressure
hydraulic circuit operating.
- Check that all controls are in neutral.
- If possible, level the machine and lower the telescopic
boon completely.
- Check that the parking brake is disengaged.
- Do not exceed a speed of 20 Kph when towing the tractor
and check that the rear differential lock is disengaged.
- Run the engine at 1200 RPM at least, if possible.
 Maintenance

Chapter 5
Maintenance
5

WARNING: If you need to open the bonnet, follow the procedure indicated under “How to open the bonnet”.
WARNING: Always use specific personal safety devices for each operation.
WARNING: Maintenance operations must be carried out with the engine off. Check that the gear and the par-
king brake are both engaged and that the ignition key has been removed.
WARNING: Beware of burns caused by hot tractor and engine parts. [4.1.n]

87
Maintenance

ROUTINE MAINTENANCE TABLE

The numbers in the second column refer to the operations described in the following pages, listed on chronological
order.

Check for function

Operation number

Top up level

Lubrication
Work hours

Replace
Adjust
Description

Clean

Page
1 Engine oil level 94
2 Oil level in gearbox and power lift systems 95
3 Battery 96
4 Fuel filter 97
5 Engine coolant expansion tank 97
6 Radiator fins 98
7 Gearbox and hydraulic circuits oil radiator 98
Variable 8 Oil level in steering system 99
mainte- 9 Dry air filter drain valve 99
nance
10 Dry air filter cartridge 100
(4)
11 Alternator and fan belt 101
12 Clutch pedal 101
13 PTO clutch disengagement lever 102
14 Brake oil level 102
15 Brake pedals (6) 103
16 Parking brake 104
17 Oil level in rear final drive 104
18 Oil level in front differential housing and front final drives 105
19 Tyre pressure 106
Wheel nut tightness 106
Others

Tightness of nuts and bolts in general 106

20 Tightness of safety frame fixing pins 106
Every 100 21 General lubrication 107
hours 22 Lubrication of 4WD front axle 108
service 23 Lubrication of 2WD front axle (if installed) 109

Every 250
hours ser- 24 Oil filter on the intake of power lift pump (2) 110
vice

88
 Maintenance

Check for function

Operation number

Top up level
Work hours

Lubricate
Replace
Adjust
Description

Clean

Page
25 Engine oil sump (5) 111
Every 500 26 Engine oil filter (5) 111
hours ser-
vice 27 Fuel filter (7) 112
28 Front wheel hubs 2WD (if installed) 113
29 Clean oil filter in the steering system (3) 113

30 Engine valves 114
31 Injectors and injection pump 114
32 Oil in transmission and power lift hydraulic system (1) 114
33 Rear final drives 115
Every 34 Steering cylinder knuckle joint 115
1000 35 Replace oil in front differential housing and
hours front final drives 116
service or
36 Starter motor and alternator 117
1 year
37 Dry air filter 117
38 Engine cooling system 118
39 Drain sludge from fuel tank 119
40 Cleaning of oil reservoir in the steering system 119

Bleed air from fuel system 120

Bleed air from rear and front brake circuits 121

General mainte-
nance
Dashboard covering and controls 123 5
Electrical system 124
Long idle periods of the tractor 133

NOTES
Operations that must be performed by an authori-
zed dealer or service agent.
(1) CAUTION: Change the gearbox oil for the first time
after 500 hours, then change it after every 1000 hours
service (1000-2000-3000 etc...)
(2) CAUTION: To safeguard the power lift filter and the stee-
ring circuit, wash the filter on pump intakes and change
the filter on the steering circuit delivery for the first time
after 50 hours. After this, repeat the same operations after
every 250 hours service (250-500-750 etc...).
(3) CAUTION: Powershuttle - Change the filters for the first
time after 50 hours, then change them after every 250
hours service (250, 500, 750, etc...)
(4) CAUTION: Use your own discretion and experience
when deciding the actual intervals for variable interval
service and maintenance operations. Always remember,
however, that it is better to perform them too often than
not often enough.
(5) CAUTION: Change the engine oil and the oil filter for
the first time after 50 hours, then change them after
every 500 hours service (500-1000-1500 etc...)
(6) CAUTION: Adjust the brakes for the first time after 50
hours.
(7) CAUTION: Replace the fuel filter twice during the first 100
hours service (after 50 hours and after 100 hours). After
this, replace the fuel filter at the intervals specified in the
‘Routine Maintenance Table’.

89
Maintenance
WARNING: Do not carry out inspections,
maintenance work or adjustments on the
tractor whilst the engine is running. Wait for
all moving parts to come to a complete stop.
Lubrication and maintenance
Foreword
This section described the operations required to correctly
service your tractor and keep it in top condition. The
Routine Maintenance Table serves as quick reference.
Each operation is numbered for easier reference.
WARNING: Park the tractor and flat ground and, if
possible, extend all the cylinders before you check
the oil levels.
Safety precautions [4.1.h]
Read and comply with all the safety precautions in the
“Tractor maintenance” part of the Safety Notes Section.
NOTE: Old fluids and used filters must be disposed of
in the correct way.
Sealed units
Do not remove the seals from the following parts:
injection pump and overspeed screw.
If you need to repair or adjust any of these units, con-
tact your local dealer or authorized repair shop.
The warranty is automatically invalidated if these seals
are tampered with.
Running in
Fade-free efficiency and a long working life largely depend
on how the new tractor is treated during the running in
period. It is therefore extremely important to follow these
instructions:
- Your engine does not require any special running
in when new. You can use it at full power from the
start but you must never overload it. Avoid using the
engine at full power before it reaches an operating
temperature of at least 60°C (140°F).
- Every time you start the engine from cold, let it run
slowly without load for a few minutes to warm up.
This is particularly important with turbo-charged
engines.
90
- Avoid idling the engine for long periods.
- Regularly check for oil leaks.
- To ensure long clutch life, carefully run in the clutch
plates. To do this, operate the clutch frequently but
gradually during the first 15 hours’ service.
After the first 50 hours
• Change the engine oil and relative filter cartridge.
After this, change the engine oil and engine oil filter
at the intervals given in the ‘Routine Maintenance
Table’.
• Replace the fuel filter twice during the first 100
hours service (after 50 hours and after 100 hours).
After this, replace the fuel filter at the intervals spe-
cified in the ‘Routine Maintenance Table’.
• Hydraulic power lift: wash carefully the mesh filter
on the intake line.
• Wash carefully the mesh filter on the hydrostatic
steering circuit.
• Check clutch pedal travel.
• Check the brake pedal travel.
• Check all oil levels. If necessary, top up with oil of
the prescribed type.
• Check the tension of the fan belt.
• Grease all points with grease nipples.
• Check tightness of all bolts, screws and nuts.
• Check the tyre pressures.
How to prevent pollution
To prevent pollution when oil, filters and so forth are
changed, always clean the zone around fill, level and
drain plugs, dipsticks and filters. Before connecting the
auxiliary cylinders, make sure that the oil they contain is
clean, that it has not deteriorated owing to long storage
and that it is of the prescribed type.

Servicing intervals
The intervals suggested in the lubrication and maintenance
table are indications to use when the tractor is used in
normal conditions.
These intervals should be adapted to the real environmen-
tal and operational conditions. Servicing must be more
frequent in adverse work conditions (in the presence of
humidity, mud, sand, very dusty environments).
CAUTION: If carried out at the prescribed inter-
vals, the operations described in this section will
ensure that the tractor operates in a regular way.
However, remember to carry out the inspections
and adjustments (of variable frequency depending
on the environmental conditions and type of work
carried out) according to your discretion and expe-
rience.
Miscellaneous inspections
Periodically check the following components. If faults are
discovered, contact your Dealer’s specialized personnel
and have the damaged parts replaced if necessary :
· Hydraulic hoses: the hoses must not be squeezed or
cracked. The outer sheath must not be swollen. There
must be no oil leaks between the hoses and their
unions;
· Hand brake lever: make sure that the ratchet locking
mechanism is secure and reliable;
· Make sure that all nuts are well tightened;
· Make sure that the safety frame bolts are well tighte-
ned.
· Make sure that all other nuts and bolts are well tighte-
ned.
Indicator lights
Your tractor is equipped with indicator lights that keep
you informed about the condition of your machine. Some
of these indicate faults, so act promptly if they come on.
Maintenance
Fuel Injection Pump
Only your Dealer’s specialized personnel may be allo-
wed to work on the injection pump during the warranty
period. Removal of the seals from the pump will relieve
the manufacturer from all and every liability in relation to
warranty coverage.
Keeping the Environment Clean
When you need tofill the fuel tank or change the lubri-
cating oil, never forget to position a vessel under the
component in question in order to collect any fuel or oil
that spills out. These products are polluting, so it is very
important to protect the environment in this way.
Engine Cooling System
It is advisable to replace the fluid in the system at least
once a year even if you have not reached 1000 hours
service in total.
Radiator
To ensure that the cooling circuit operates in a perfect
way, it is important to prevent the radiator fins from be-
coming clogged.
These fins should be cleaned often, even several times a
day if the place of work is particularly dusty.
Lubrication
Before lubricating any parts provided with grease nipples,
carefully clean the nipples’ surfaces and be sure that their
seal ball moves freely.
After the lubrication, remove any trace of grease to avoid
it to collect dirt or dust.
5
91
Maintenance

Fuel tank filling Fuel storage

[4.1.l]
CAUTION: Comply with the following in-
structions when working with diesel fuel.
Do not smoke near diesel fuel. In no case
must petrol (gasoline), alcohol or mixtures
of diesel fuel or alcohol be added to the
diesel fuel as such action would notably
increase the risk of fire outbreaks or explo-
sions. In a closed vessel, such as a can, they
are even more explosive than pure petrol
(gasoline).
Never use such mixtures. Moreover, mixtu-
res of diesel fuel and alcohol are not appro-
ved since the resulting lubrication of the
fuel injection system is insufficient.
Take all the necessary precautions to ensure that stored
fuel does not become polluted with dirt, water or other
substances (Fig. 5-1).
- Store fuel in black iron cans. Do not store it in galva-
nized cans as the galvanizing treatment would react
with the fuel and form compounds that would spoil
the injection pump and injectors.
- Store fuel cans away from direct sunlight and slightly
tilted, so that any sediment inside is eliminated
through the outlet tube.
- To make sludge and condensation water easier to
remove, there should be a discharge plug in the
lowest point, on the opposite side to the drain tube.

Clean around the plug where the fuel is pou- - If the fuel is not filtered from the storage can, use a
red and keep it clean. funnel with a fine gauze mesh over the tank fill plug
inlet when fuelling.
Fill the tank at the end of the day to prevent
the formation of overnight condensation. - Plan your fuel purchases so that summer fuels are
not kept for too long and used in the winter.
Never remove the plug or fuel the tractor
whilst the engine is running. Keep control
of the pump nozzle whilst the tank is being
filled.

The tank must not be completely filled.

Allow space for an increase in volume. If the
original tank plug is lost, it must be replaced
with an original spare which must be fully
tightened.

Dry up any fuel spill immediately.

Fuel requisites

It is important to use good quality fuel if the engine is to

be long-lasting and give a good performance. The fuels
must be clean, well refined and non-corrosive for the fuel
system components. Make sure that you use fuel of a
known quality and reliable origin. Fig.5-1 Setting up a tank for fuel storage and decan-
ting.
Fuelling a. Slope 25%.
b. Condensation water.
Before you fuel the tractor, clean the zone around the fill c. Sludge drain plug.
plug to prevent foreign bodies from entering the tank. After NOTE: Never use galvanised containers to store fuel.
fuelling, screw on the plug and tighten it well.

92
 Maintenance

Fuelling Fig. 5-2

WARNING: Do not smoke while filling the

fuel tank. Keep clear of any sort of flames.

Access for inspection and mainte-

nance
It may be necessary to open the bonnet in order to ac-
cess the engine components and carry out inspections,
lubrication and servicing operations.

WARNING: The surfaces inside the bonnet

are hot. Be extremely careful and wait for the
surfaces to cool down before operating inside
the bonnet to avoid burns.

WARNING: Open the bonnet and remove the Fig.5-2

side panel only with engine off and rotating
parts completely at standstill.

WARNING: A gas ram controls opening and

closing of the bonnet. Replace the gas ram if
not properly operating to avoid accidental fall
of the bonnet.

WARNING: If the tractor is equipped with front

hitch and power take-off, before opening the
bonnet lower the links completely, whether
there are implements or not.

How to open the bonnet

- Park the tractor on hard, level ground and apply the
park brake.
- To open the bonnet, insert the tool (1-Fig.5-3a) in the front
slit and hook up the bonnet closure device. Fig.5-3a
5
- Release the locking mechanism.
- Raise the bonnet (1) that is kept raised by the gas ram
(Fig.5-3b).
- To shut the bonnet again, lower the bonnet against the
resistance of the gas ram (Fig.5-3b). Rest the bonnet and
close by turning the tool in the opposite direction.
- Remove the tool.

How to remove the side panels

(Fig.5-3b)
The side panels (2) can be easily removed for maintenance
operations on the engine or various organs.

Loosen the rear reatainer and pull the panels from the
front finxing pins.

To mount the panel again, insert the panels into the front
retainers, then fix the rear retainers.

WARNING: NEVER use the tractor without

the bonnet and side panels. Fig.5-3b - Tilting up the bonnet and removing the side
panels

93
Maintenance

WARNING: If you need to open the bonnet, follow the procedure indicated under “How to open the bonnet”.
WARNING: Always use specific personal safety devices for each operation.
WARNING: Maintenance operations must be carried out with the engine off. Check that the gear and the par-
king brake are both engaged and that the ignition key has been removed.
WARNING: Beware of burns caused by hot tractor and engine parts.

VARIABLE MAINTENANCE

WARNING: Use your own discretion and experien-

ce when deciding the actual timing for variable
interval service and maintenance operations. It is
obviously better to carry out these operations too
often than not often enough.

OPERATION 1
Engine oil level
Fig. 5-4
Leave the tractor parked on a flat surface for at least five
minutes before checking the level, to allow the oil to
settle in the sump:

- take out the dipstick (2), wipe it with a rag and then
dip it into the filler again;

- wait 10—15 minutes, then remove the dipstick again

and make sure that the oil level reaches and does not
exceed the level marked on it.

- If necessary, pour additional oil through the filler (1)

until the required level has been reached.

CAUTION: Never ever use the engine with the oil

level below the “MIN” mark. Fig.5-4 - Engine oil

WARNING: Possible hot surfaces. Wait for all

the components to cool down [4.1.n].

94
 Maintenance

OPERATION 2
Oil level: mechanical transmission,
power lift circuit and steering cir-
cuit (Fig. 5-5)

Check at regular intervals the oil level in the mechanical

transmission and in the power lift and steering circuits.

Park the tractor on flat ground, stop the engine and lower
the power lift links. Remove the dipstick (1) and check
the oil level .

NOTE: Allow the oil to settle in the transmission and

rear final drives before checking the level.
Fig. 5-5.
The oil level in the transmission must be over the midli- 1. Dipstick
ne, between the minimum and maximum marks of the A: Normal level marks
dipstick (Fig. 5-5) with the lift links in the up position. If Min. - no oil consumption
needed, fill up through the filler (2) to the required level Max. - max. consumption 5 litres
with oil of the prescribed type. B: Level to be maintained if using a front loader or
other hydraulic implements
When operating external hydraulics, such as hydraulic 2. Transmission oil filler
front loaders, rams, motors etc. that require a certain
amount of oil, top up the oil level to the B mark on the
dipstick (corresponding to about 10 litres). This ensures
a correct oil level in the transmission at any time.

NOTE: The level must never be under the Min. mark;

When using external hydraulics, the level must always
be between the Min. and Max. marks.

NOTE: When working with the tractor on slopes, add 5

extra litres of oil to guarantee a minimum oil level even
in the most difficult conditions.
5
NOTE: The hydraulic rams of the implements being
hitched to the tractor contain the same oil used in the
transmission of the tractor. This excludes any oil conta-
mination that could cause malfunction.

Oil in the gearbox

The tractor’s transmission and the steering and power
lift circuits contain the same type of oil. See Lubricant
and Fuel Chart.

NOTE: The Powershuttle contains a different oil from

the mechanical transmission. The two types of oil must
NEVER be mixed together.

95
Maintenance

OPERATION 3
Battery 1-Fig.5-6 [4.1.l]
Periodically check the level of battery acid and add distil-
led water if necessary. If you need to top up too often,
have the battery charging system checked by a qualified
technician.

WARNING: Battery electrolyte contains sul-

furic acid and can cause serious burns.
Avoid contact with the skin and eyes. Keep
naked flames, sparks and lighted cigarettes
well clear of batteries which are being char- Front Battery
ged. Keep the area in which batteries are being
charged well ventilated.

WARNING: When connecting the battery to a

charger, make sure that the positive (+) lead
of the charger is connected to the positive of
the battery and the negative (-) to the negative.
Incorrect connection will damage the diodes
and the other circuit components.

NOTE: The level of the electrolyte must be checked

with the engine off, the tractor parked on flat ground
and the battery cold. Side battery (depending on tractor’s model and equip-
ment).
NOTE: Make sure that the battery terminal nuts are well Fig.5-6
fixed to their terminals.

Battery master disconnect switch

WARNING:
Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer
and reproductive harm. Wash your hands after
handling these parts.
WARNING: Do not use acid to top up the bat-
tery. The electrolyte will boil over. Use only
deionised distilled water and top up to a level
of 5/6 mm over the battery cells.
IMPORTANT: Do not use the master disconnect switch
(2- Fig.5-6B) to STOP the Diesel engine, or the machine
power units will be damaged. Such operation can only
be considered as an emergency intervention.
Even if not actually required, it is advisable to insulate the
machine electric system at the end of each work day by
means of the master disconnect switch. This operation
increases safety and prolongs battery life.
NOTE: The master disconnect switch must be used for
any operation on the electric system. It is at any rate ad-
visable to disconnect the battery completely if welding
is carried out on the machine.

WARNING: According to the Law it is man-
datory to dispose of batteries in suitable
containers provided to this purpose at autho-
rized centres. DO NOT dispose of them in the
environment.
Proceed as follows to remove the battery:
- Operate the parking brake switch and check that all
electrical equipment is off;
- Open the bonnet and find the battery and the master
disconnect switch, that must be on OFF (see Fig.5-6B);
- Disconnect the negative cable first then the positive;
- Remove the screw and bracket that retain the battery;
- Proceed in reverse order to reassemble and reconnect
the cables.

IMPORTANT: In case of fire, immediately detach the

cable from the positive terminal or, if equipped, operate
the master disconnect switch.

96
 Maintenance

Front Battery Side Battery

Fig.5-6B

OPERATION 4
Fuel filter Fig. 5-7
Regularly drain off the water that collects in the
filter bowl through the valve (1 ) of the filter (2).
Regularly drain off the filter bowl through the
valve (3 ) of the filter (4).
This operation must be carried out with the engine on.

Replace the filter (4) for the first two times every
50 hours (at 50 and 100 hours) during the running
in period.
After this, replace the fuel filter after every 500
hours service.

Air is normally expelled automatically from this type of

system.
However, when the filters are removed, you should
bleed air from the whole system. Fig.5-7

For a complete bleeding of the fuel system, see “Fuel

bleeding” in the Maintenance section.
5
OPERATION 5
Cooling circuit expansion reservoir
Fig. 5-8
[4.1.n]

Periodically check the level in the reservoir (2).

Top up through the plug if necessary (1).

WARNING: NEVER remove the plug from the

reservoir while the engine is still hot.
Always unscrew the plug slowly by one po-
sition and allow the pressure to drop before
you loosen it completely.
Precautions against freezing temperatures
To prevent ice from forming in the radiator, add specific
products according to the instructions given by the anti-
freeze manufacturer.
Antifreeze also possesses antioxidant and rust-inhibiting
properties and is suitable for all seasons.
The following amounts are indicatively required:
Fig.5-8
ATTENTION:The transparent water tank should not
be filled up. Check the water level in the radiator
plug(1-Fig 5-8) and top up the water level through
the same fill plug (1) as necessary.
Degrees C° - 8° - 15° - 25° - 35°
Percentage of antifreeze
20 30 40 50
per volume %

97
Maintenance

OPERATION 6 - 7
Engine coolant radiator
Periodically check to make sure that the radiator (1 - Fig.
5-9) is not clogged. Clean with a jet of compressed air
directed from the inside towards the outside.

WARNING: These operations must be carried

out when the engine is cold. When hot, the
grilles and radiator will burn the hands and
fingers.

Transmission oil radiator (if instal-

led)
Periodically clean the surface of the radiator with a blast
of compressed air (2 - Fig. 5-9)
Fig.5-9
NOTE: The best results are obtained with a steam
cleaner that softens up the dirt. Use a lamp to check the
cleaning between the radiator fins. We recommend a
daily cleaning when front implements are used, espe-
cially front mower-conditioners.

OPERATION 6 - 7 turboAftercooler
Cleaning engine coolant radiator,
transmission oil radiator and air
conditioning condenser.
Fig. 5-9A and 5-9B
Periodically check to make sure that the radiator surfaces
is not clogged.

WARNING: These operations must be carried

out when the engine is cold. When hot, the
grilles and radiator will burn the hands and
fingers.

Lift the bonnet to access the air conditioning condenser

Fig.5-9A
(2), the engine coolant radiator (1), the transmission oil
radiator (3) and the aftercooler radiator (4) (if fitted).

1 - Open the hook (5) that holds the air filter (6).
2 - Push open the filter unit (6).
3 - Clean the aftercooler radiator (4) with an air jet
from the inside to the outside.
4 - Grasp both ends of the AC condenser (2) and lift it
carefully in order not to damage the cooling fins.
5 - Clean the engine radiator surface (1) by means of
an air jet from the inside to the outside.
6 - Clean also the condenser surface (2) in the same
way. Take care to direct the air jet from the inside
to the outside.
Fig.5-9B
Check that the surfaces you clean are not warped. In this
case the damage must be repaired.
NOTE: The best results are obtained with a steam
Proceed in inverse order to remount. Take care not to cleaner that softens up the dirt. Use a lamp to check the
damage the cooling fins. cleaning between the radiator fins. We recommend a
daily cleaning when front implements are used, espe-
cially front mower-conditioners.

98
 Maintenance

OPERATION 8
Steering system
Check the level in the hydrostatic steering system every
100 hours (Fig. 5-10).
Top up with oil of the prescribed type if required.

Fig.5-10

OPERATION 9
Air filter discharge valve Fig. 5-11

Discharge the dust deposits and sediments each day by

pressing the rubber valve (2) on the air filter housing (1).

Tipo A 5

Tipo B
Fig.5-11

99
Maintenance

OPERATION 10
External cartridge of dry air filter
Fig. 5-12

The filter cartridge can be cleaned with a blast of com-

pressed air.

WARNING: Always stop the engine before de-

mounting the filter elements.

Periodically release the clips (2), remove the cover (3) of

the filter housing (1), take out the external cartridge (4)
and clean it (this operation should be carried out more
frequently if you work in a very dusty environment):
Fig.5-12 Type A
- with a jet of compressed air at a pressure of no more
than 5.9 bar (6 Kg/cm2), directed towards the outside
of the filter cartridge;
or:
- with water and a non-foaming detergent. After clea-
ning, rinse the filter cartridge with a jet of water at a
pressure of no more than 2.9 bar (3 Kg/cm2) and dry
it with dry air at a temperature of no more than 50°C.

Never ever clean the cartridge with products other than

those indicated above, or by tapping it on a hard surface.

Thoroughly clean all the internal parts of the housing (1)

with a damp cloth before remounting.

Replace the external element (4) after three clea-

ning operations and at least once a year or after
every 1000 hours service. Fig.5-12 Type B
Replace the internal safety element (5) once a
year or after three cleanings of the outer element.

Always check to make sure that the filter housing is not

damaged and make sure that all the pipes and unions
are tight.

WARNING: The internal filter element must not be

replaced. NEVER attempt to clean the internal safety
element.

WARNING: NEVER attempt to clean the filter elements

with exhaust gas from the engine. NEVER EVER use
oil on a dry filter. NEVER EVER use wash oil, diesel
fuel, paraffin or solvents to clean the filter elements.

Fig.5-13 - Cleaning the filter by compressed air (max.

pressure 4 bar).

IMPORTANT: Dispose of filters correctly in accor- WARNING: Before cleaning the filter with
dance with local regulations. Be responsible for the compressed air, wear individual protections,
environment. in particular goggles and a mask to protect
your airways.

100
 Maintenance

OPERATION 11
Alternator and fan belt
Fig. 5-14

Periodically check the tension A of the alternator and fan

belt in the middle of its long side. It should give 10 - 15
mm.

To adjust the belt tension, loosen the fixing screws and

check nut (1) on the idler and move the alternator until
the correct tension has been obtained. Now tighten all
the screws and check nuts.

NOTE: Check the belt tension frequently. The belt must

be replaced if it is cracked or needs to be frequently
adjusted. This operation must be carried out by authori- Fig.5-14
zed service personnel.
electro-hydraulic reverse shuttle need no adjustment..

OPERATION 12
Mechanical gearshift clutch pedal

If you note that clutch pedal (1) operation becomes spongy

or if the clutch slips, check that the idle travel A of the
pedal is between 15 and 25 mm(Fig.5-16).

If necessary, adjust the travel in the following way (Fig5-

16):

- Loosen the check nut (2);

5
- Disconnect the adjuster fork (1) on the link (3) and
tighten it or loosen it to obtain the correct travel A;

- Lock the check nut (2).

Fig.5-15 Adjusting the clutch pedal travel. Pedal travel
NOTE: The electro-hydraulic clutch of tractors with A= 1.5 to 2.5 cm
electro-hydraulic reverse shuttle need no adjustment..

Fig.5-16

101
Maintenance

OPERATION 13
Adjusting the PTO clutch
Fig.5-18

Check at suitable intervals the free travel of the lever.

The free travel A should be 4-5 cm. (Fig.5-17)
To adjust, loosen the jam nut (2) and loosen or tighten the
fork (1) on the brake control rod.(Fig.5-18)
Lock the jam nut again (2).

Fig.5-17 - Check and adjustment of free travel “A” of the

PTO clutch disengagement lever.

OPERATION 14
Brake fluid reservoir
At suitable intervals, check the level of the fluid in the
brake reservoir. The reservoir (1 - Fig. 5-17) must always
be kept full. Top up only with the correct brake fluid, as
indicated in the Lubricants and Fuels chart. An indicator
light in the instrument panel (Fig.3-9) comes on whene-
ver the fluid level is too low; in this case top up to the
required level.

Bleeding air from the rear brake

circuit
It becomes necessary to bleed the circuit when air en-
ters owing to lack of oil in the relative reservoir or when Fig.5-18
the braking system is serviced.
This operation should be carried out by specialized
personnel. If, however, you decide to do it yourself,
proceed in the following way.

WARNING: When changing and topping up the fluid

in the brake reservoir (1 - Fig. 5-17), be absolute-
ly sure to use the correct type of fluid as different
varieties have totally different properties. These ma-
chines use a mineral-based. Never mix or exchange
these two types of brake fluid as this could rapidly
bring about brake failure.

Fig.5-19-Brake fluid reservoir (1).

102
 Maintenance

OPERATION 15
Adjusting the brakes

Check the brake control rods after the first 5o

hours then at suitable intervals according to the work
conditions.

The braking system must be adjusted when the free

travel of the pedals (A - Fig. 5-20) becomes excessive
and the pedals are near to end of travel.
Proceed in the following way to restore free pedal travel
to its normal value of about 3.5 cm (1.4 in.) (dimension
A):

WARNING: When you lift up the tractor follow

the directions for lifting in the Safety Notes
section.
Fig.5-20
1 - First make sure that there is no air in the hydraulic
brake circuit. Bleed if necessary. (The presence of
air in the circuit is normally denoted by a spongy
braking action).

2 - Jack up the rear wheels of the tractor.

3 - Make sure that the parking brake is off.

4 - Free the brake pedals by raising the lock (2 - Fig.

5-20).

5 - Unscrew the check nut (1 - Fig. 5-21). Slowly

tighten the adjuster nut (2) until you can no longer
turn the wheel by hand.

6 - Make a reference mark on the adjuster nut and on

the support, then slacken off the adjuster nut by 1
and 4/6ths of a turn (Fig. 5-22), i.e. until the wheel
5
can be freely turned. Now lock the adjuster with Fig.5-21 - Adjustment of free travel of brake pedals.
the relative check nut (1 - Fig. 5-21). 1 - Check nut;
2 - Adjusting nut.
7 - Check that the brake pedal has a free travel of 3.5
cm (1.4 in.) and repeat the adjustment if necessary.

8 - Repeat the procedure for the other side. Finally,

check that the free travel is the same for both
pedals and that the brakes engage simultaneously
on both sides.

9 - Check that the parking brake lever has not been

affected and adjust if necessary.

Front brakes

No periodic adjustment is required as the front brakes

are self-regulating.

Fig.5-22 - Brake adjusting nut (2).

103
Maintenance

OPERATION 16
Parking brake - Fig. 5-23
The parking brake hand lever is directly linked to the
brake pedals.
Make sure that free travel is identical for both pedals,
since free travel of the pedals determines the free travel
of the parking brake and left/right distribution of the
braking action when the brakes are locked.

Once you have adjusted the brake pedals, adjust the

free travel of the parking brake by means of the adjuster
nut (3 - Fig. 5-23) on the brake lever, so that the parking
brake engages after 2 clicks of the ratchet mechanism.

Fig.5-23 - Travel adjustment of the lh brake pedal and

parking brake hand lever.
1 - Fixing nut.
2 - Adjuster nut.
3 - Fixing and adjuster nut of the parking brake.

OPERATION 17
Rear final drives
Fig. 5-24
Remove the level plugs (1) from both final drives.
The oil level must reach the hole.
Top up if necessary with oil of the specified type through
the plugs (see Lubricant and Fuel Chart)

Fig.5-24 - Rear final drives.

104
 Maintenance

OPERATION 18
Front axle oil level

4WD front axle

Regularly check the oil level in the differential of the
front axle and in the front axle side final drives.

1. Park the tractor on level ground

2. Position the final drive plugs (1- Fig.5-25) on the wheel

center line. Remove the plugs and check the level.
Top up if necessary with oil of the specified type
through the plugs themselves..

3. Remove the level plug (2 - Fig. 5-26) from the central

Fig.5-25 - Front axle final drive: (1) Filler, drain and level
axle housing. The oil level must reach the hole. Top
plug.
up if necessary with oil of the specified type through
the plug (1 - Fig. 5-26).

NOTE: See the Fuel and Lubricant chart for the correct
type of oil.

Fig.5-26 - Front axle.

5

105
Maintenance

OPERATION 19
Miscellaneous inspections
• Power steering cylinder hoses: the tubes must not
be crushed or cracked. The outer sheath must not
be swollen in any way and there must be no oil
leaks between the tubes and unions.

• Hand brake lever: make sure that the ratchet mecha-

nism locks in a secure and stable way.

• Make sure that the wheel nuts are correctly torqued.

• Make sure that the safety frame screws are well
tightened.

• Check to make sure that all other nuts and bolts are
well tightened.

• Check the tyre pressures.

OPERATION 20
Safety frame

Have your Dealer’s specialized personnel check to make

sure that the safety frame fixing screws are correctly
tightened.

WARNING: The safety frame complies with

certain safety standards. It must never be
drilled or modified in order to install accesso-
ries or implements. It is FORBIDDEN to weld
on accessories or repair the safety frame by
welding.

106
 Maintenance

EVERY 100 HOURS SERVICE

WARNING: If you need to open the bonnet, follow the procedure indicated under “How to open the bonnet”.
WARNING: Always use specific personal safety devices for each operation.
WARNING: Maintenance operations must be carried out with the engine off. Check that the gear and the par-
king brake are both engaged and that the ignition key has been removed.
WARNING: Beware of burns caused by hot tractor and engine parts. [4.1.n]

OPERATION 21
General lubrication
Lubricate the grease points every 100 hours or more
often, depending on the working conditions.

- Grease nipples on brake control cross link, two

points (Fig.5-27)

- Three point linkage: 6 grease nipples (Fig.5-28)

- Front axle drive shaft thrust bearing (Fig.5-29).

- PTO clutch disengagement thrust bearing (1 - Fig.5-

30) max. 2 squeezes.

Fig.5-27 Brake control lever pivot pin. Inject grease of Fig.5-28 - Grease nipples of the three point linkage.
the prescribed type.

Fig.5-30. PTO clutch disengagement thrust bearing Fig.5-29 - Front axle drive shaft bearing nipple.
nipple (1).

107
Maintenance

OPERATION 22

4WD front axle greasing

Lubricate the following greasing nipples every 100
hours or more frequently, depending on work condi-
tions:

• Kingpins of 4WD axle (2 pcs). (1, Fig.5-31)

• Central pivot bushings of the front axle (1, Fig.5-32
and 2, Fig.5-33)

Fig.5-31

Fig.5-32 Front axle.

1 - Grease nipple of rear pivot bushing of the
front axle.

Fig.5-33 Front axle.

2 - Grease nipple of front pivot bushing of the
front axle.

108
 Maintenance

OPERATION 23
2WD front axle
(Optional for some markets only)

Lubricate the following greasing nipples every 100

hours or more frequently, depending on work condi-
tions:

Fig.5-34 Non-driving front axle kingpin (2 nipples).

Inject grease of the prescribed type.

Fig.5-34

Fig.5-35 Non-driving front axle kingpin (2 nipples). Inject

grease of the prescribed type.

Fig.5-35

109
Maintenance

EVERY 250 HOURS SERVICE

WARNING: If you need to open the bonnet, follow the procedure indicated under “How to open the bonnet”.
WARNING: Always use specific personal safety devices for each operation.
WARNING: Maintenance operations must be carried out with the engine off. Check that the gear and the par-
king brake are both engaged and that the ignition key has been removed.
WARNING: Beware of burns caused by hot tractor and engine parts. [4.1.n]

Oil filters of the transmission and of

the steering and power lift circuits
The operation 24 for the transmission oil filters must be
carried out not only at the prescribed intervals, but also whe-
never the indicator lights on the instrument panel come on.

Warning lights for transmission and hydraulic circuit

oil filter blockage (Fig.5-36)
1 - Fixed light: Red warning light for low pressure in tran-
smission hydraulic circuit. A warning buzzer will start
operating when this light comes on during work: contact
your Dealer’s Specialized Workshop if this occurs.
2 - Fixed light: Red warning light for blockage of the oil
filter of transmission and hydraulic circuits . The filter
is mounted on the intake part of the hydraulic pumps .
Fig.5-36

OPERAZIONE 24.
Oil filter of the transmission and po-
wer lift circuit, mounted on the inta-
ke part of the hydraulic pump
Fig.5-37
The power lift circuit oil filter (1 - Fig. 5-37) is placed
on the right-hand side of the tractor. It is provided with
a sensor (B) with a red light indicator that comes on
on the instrument panel when the filter is blocked and
needs cleaning (Fig. 5-36).

It is at any rate advisable to check and clean the

filter every 250.
Clean the filter as follows:

a - Remove the screws (6) that fasten the cover (5) on the
filter housing (3).

b - Remove the cover and the wire gauze filter cartridge

(4).
Fig.5-37 Hydraulic power lift oil circuit filter (A) for trac-
tors with cab.
c - Clean the filter with solvent, removing any filing depo-
B - Sensor indicating filter blockage.
sits from the cover (5).
1, 3 - Filter cover and housing.
2 - Wire gauze filter cartridge.
CAUTION: Replace the filter if damaged or excessively
clogged.

d - Clean the joints, check the seal ring and reassemble.

NOTE: After you have fitted the filter, allow the engine to
run and make sure that there are no leaks. Check the oil
level and top up if required.
NOTE: Use the oil prescribed in the Lubricants and Fuels
chart.
NOTE: Make sure that the hydraulic equipment con-
nected to the tractor’s hydraulic circuit uses the same
type of oil. Use of different types of oil could damage
the hydraulic circuit.

110
 Maintenance
EVERY 500 HOURS SERVICE
WARNING: If you need to open the bonnet, follow the procedure indicated under “How to open the bonnet”.
WARNING: Always use specific personal safety devices for each operation.
WARNING: Maintenance operations must be carried out with the engine off. Check that the gear and the par-
king brake are both engaged and that the ignition key has been removed.
WARNING: Beware of burns caused by hot tractor and engine parts. [4.1.n]

OPERATION 25
Engine oil sump Fig. 5-38
During the running in period, the engine oil and
oil filter must be changed after the first 50 hours.
Following this, change the oil and the oil filter
after every 500 hours service (500, 1000, 1500
hours, etc...)

1. Change the oil whilst the engine is hot.

2. Remove the 2 drain plugs (3 - Fig. 5-38) after having
parked the tractor on a flat surface.
3. Fit the drain plug back on and tighten it (3.5 daNm
driving torque).
4. Fill with oil of the recommended type until reaching
the maximum level mark on the dipstick (2).

NOTE: Allow the oil to settle in the engine sump before

checking the level. 500 hours is the maximum tolerated
frequency for oil changes. The oil must be changed Fig.5-38 - Engine oil
more frequently (e.g. every 250 hours) if the tractor is
used in heavy duty conditions).
If the tractor is used infrequently, change the engine oil
at least once a year regardless of the actual number of
hours worked.

OPERATION 26
Engine oil filter Fig. 5-39
5
During the running in period, the engine oil
and oil filter must be changed after the first 50
hours. Following this, change the oil after every
500 hours service (500, 1000, 1500 hours, etc...)

1. Unscrew the old filter (1) from its housing.

2. Dampen the housing in which the new filter is to
be mounted with clean oil. Make sure that the new
filter fits correctly into its housing.
3. Fully tighten the new filter into its housing, then
hand tighten a further half turn.
4. Top up the level with new oil (see operation 1).

NOTE: Consult the lubricant and fuel chart for the type
of oil required.
Fig.5-39
WARNING: Only use genuine filter cartridges. Use
of spurious cartridges could damage the engine and
shorten its working life.

111
Maintenance

OPERATION 27
Fuel filter Fig.5-40

When the engine is running in, during the first 100

hours service, the filter should be changed for
the first two times after every 50 hours. After this,
change the fuel filter cartridge after every 500 hours
service (500,1000, etc.).

To change the fuel filter

Proceed in the following way:
1 - Clean the outside of the filter.
2 - Open the drain cock (2) at the bottom of the filter
and drain out all fuel.
3 - Unscrew and remove the filter housing (1) and the
cartridge from the top of the filter. Fig.5-40
4 - Push against the spring the cartridge and turn it to
the left to release it from the housing.
5 - Fit a new cartridge into the housing, press it against
the spring and turn it to the right to lock it in the
housing.
6 - Fit a new packing into the housing. Lubricate it with
clean fuel.
7 - Check the inner threads of the cartridge for damage.
8 - Position the filter group on the filter top and screw
down by hand until both parts are touching. Then
tighten a further 1/4th of turn by hand, without using
any wrench.
9 - Close the drain cock (2).
10- Bleed the fuel circuit, if necessary. See General Main-
tenance.
11- Start the engine and check for leaks.

Air is normally expelled automatically from this type of

system.
However, when the filters are removed, you should
bleed air from the whole system.
For a complete bleeding of the fuel system, see “Fuel
bleeding” in the Maintenance section.

CAUTION: Do not operate the electric starter motor

for more than 20 seconds at a time to avoid overhe-
ating the windings.
Let the starter motor cool down before trying again.

112
 Maintenance

OPERATION 28
Front wheel hubs for 2WD front
axle - Fig. 5-41 (If fitted)

Front wheel hubs: inject grease of the prescribed type

by means of a pump (2 grease nipples).

Fig.5-41 - (If fitted)

OPERATION 29
Oil filter of the power steering cir-
cuit reservoir
Fig.5-42
1. Press upon the cover (1) and move it aside.

2. Remove the filter cartridge (2) of reservoir (3) and

wash in paraffin oil.

3. Fit the filter in its housing (3) again and fit the filter
cover (1)

4. Crank the engine and check the oil level. Top up if

necessary with oil of the prescribed type.
Fig.5-42 5

113
Maintenance

EVERY 1000 HOURS SERVICE OR ONCE A YEAR

WARNING: If you need to open the bonnet, follow the procedure indicated under “How to open the bonnet”.
WARNING: Always use specific personal safety devices for each operation.
WARNING: Maintenance operations must be carried out with the engine off. Check that the gear and the par-
king brake are both engaged and that the ignition key has been removed.
WARNING: Beware of burns caused by hot tractor and engine parts. [4.1.n]

OPERATION 30
Engine valves Fig.5-43

Have the tappet and valve gaps checked by your Dealer’s

authorized personnel.

OPERATION 31
Injectors and fuel system Fig. 5-44
Have these checked by your Dealer’s specialized per-
sonnel.

NOTE: Thoroughly clean the area in which you must

work before loosening or disconnecting any part of the
injection system.
Fig.5-43
NOTE: Place covers on all the tubes and injector orifi-
ces to prevent dirt from penetrating.

OPERATION 32
Oil changes for the transmission,
steering circuit and power lift
hydraulic circuit Fig. 5-45

NOTE: It is advisable to change the oil for the first

time after 500 hours. After this, after every 1000 hours
service.

Transmission housing Fig.5-45

Fig.5-44
1 - Lower the lift arms to the ground.

2 - Remove the plug (see Operation 2).

3 - Place vessels under all seven drain plugs to collect

the oil as it drains out.

4 - Remove the plugs and drain out the oil.

5 - Fit the drain plugs back in place, then pour oil of

the approved type into the transmission until the
correct level has been reached (see Operation 2).

NOTE: Let the oil stabilize before checking its level.

WARNING: See the Lubricants and Fuels chart for Fig.5-45

the type of oil to be used according to the transmis-
sion type.

CAUTION: Replace the filter if damaged or

excessively clogged.

114
 Maintenance

OPERATION 33
Rear final drives

Rear final drives Fig. 5-46

Remove the plug (2) from the right-hand and left-hand rear
final drives to drain out all oil.

Place a vessel under the plugs (2) and drain out oil from
the final drives.

Fill the drives with the prescribed oil (Fig. 5-46) until oil is
seen coming out.

NOTE: See the Lubricants and Fuels chart for the cor-
rect type of oil. Fig.5-46

OPERATION 34
4WD steering cylinder knuckle 5
joints
Have the knuckle joint nuts (1) checked by an authorized
service center after the first 50 hours and then after every
1000 hours service (Fig. 5-47).

Fig.5-47

115
Maintenance

OPERAZIONE 35
Oil changes in 4WD front axle
Axle housing Fig. 5-48
Place a vessel under the plug (1), Remove the plug and
drain out all oil.

Rear side final drives Fig. 5-49

Position the final drive plugs (1) downward. Place a vessel
under each final drive plug (1) (one for each final drive).
Remove the plugs and drain out all oil.

Oil filling in 4WD front axle

Fig.5-48
NOTE: See the Lubricants and Fuels chart for the cor-
rect type of oil.

Front axle housing

Fit the plug (1 - Fig.5-51) back when no more oil is coming
out and fill up with fresh oil through the filler (1- Fig.5-51)
up to the level of the plug (2 - Fig.5-51).

Wait for the oil to stabilize before checking the level. Top
up if necessary.

Fit the plugs back (1 and 2 - Fig.5-51).

Side final drives

Position the plugs (1 - Fig5-50) on the wheel center line. Fill
up with oil of the specified type to the level of the holes.
Wait for the oil to stabilize before checking the level. Top
up if necessary. Fit the plugs back (1 - Fig.5-50). Fig.5-49

Fig.5-50 - Front final drive: (A) filler plug

Fig.5-51 - Front axle

116
 Maintenance

OPERATION 36
Starter motor Fig. 5-52
The starter motor (1) should be thoroughly cleaned at
least once a year. Particularly check the condition of the
brushes and collector.

Alternator – Fig. 5-53 Fig.5-52

Have the condition and operation of the alternator checked

by a specialized workshop.

OPERATION 37
Dry air filter Fig. 5-54 A/B
Release the clips (2), remove the cover (3) and replace the
external cartridge (4) along with the internal safety car-
tridge (5). Carefully clean the filter cover (3) and bowl (1).

NOTE : The two filter cartridges should be replaced at

least once a year even if the tractor has not worked for
1000 hours.

WARNING: The internal cartridge (5) must always be

replaced. It must never be cleaned.
Fig.5-53
WARNING: Always stop the engine before demounting
5
the filter elements.

IMPORTANT: Dispose of filters correctly in accor-

dance with local regulations. Be responsible for the
environment.

Fig.5-54 Type A Fig.5-54 Type B

117
Maintenance

OPERATION 38
Cooling system
Fig. 5-55 and 5-56
Cleaning
Remove the filler cap (1) from the expansion reservoir (2)
to make coolant draining easier.

WARNING: NEVER remove the radiator cap

when the engine is hot. Unscrew the cap
very slowly to release the pressure before
taking it off completely.

Set a suitable vessel in position and drain out the coolant

through radiator plug and through plug (1 - Fig.5-56) of Fig.5-55
the engine block.

Shut off the drain plugs and fill the system with coolant
fluid until the level reaches 20-25 mm below the edge of
the fill plug (1 - Fig. 5-55) of the expansion reservoir (2).
Remove the fill plug (1) and allow the engine to run at
1000 RPM for a few minutes. Now check the level and
top up if necessary. Shut the fill plug (1) once the cleaning
operation has terminated.

NOTE : The coolant recovery container must not be

filled for system topping up and filling

NOTE : In an emergency, to make up for sudden leaks,

the system can be topped up with water by pouring this
through the fill plug (1 - Fig. 5-55)

CAUTION: Have the fault repaired as soon as possible.

Fill with mixture as indicated in the table below.
Fig.5-56

Precautions against freezing tem-

peratures
The system is filled with a mixture of water and antifreeze.
Add the proportion of antifreeze given in the following
table.
ATTENTION:The transparent water tank should not
be filled up. Check the water level in the radiator
plug(1-Fig 5-55) and top up the water level through
the same fill plug (1) as necessary.

Degrees C° - 8° - 15° - 25° - 35°

Percentage of antifreeze
20 30 40 50
per volume %

This mixture can be permanently maintained in the circuit

for 1 year so long as you have not totalized 1000 hours
service during this period. In this case, the mixture must
be changed.

Flush out the system whenever you change from using

pure water to antifreeze mixtures and vice versa.

118
 Maintenance

OPERATION 39
Fuel tank Fig. 5-57
The fuel tank is cleaned by removing the plug (1 - Fig. 5-57).

NOTE : Drain off the sludge when the tank is almost

empty and only after having placed a suitable vessel
under the drain plug.

NOTE : Air in the fuel circuit makes it difficult to start

the engine. Bleed the circuit as described under Gene-
ral Maintenance in this section.

Fig.5-57

OPERATION 40
Power steering reservoir
Fig.5-58

Have the reservoir (and filter) of the power steering system

cleaned by specialized personnel at your Dealer’s.

Fig.5-58
1 - Disconnect from the reservoir the oil return tube (1)
and drain all oil out.
2 - Clean the filter (operation 30).
3 - Fit on again and fill up with oil of the prescribed type.
4- Let the engine run and check the oil level.Top upthe
level if required.

5
Fig.5-58

119
Maintenance

GENERAL MAINTENANCE

WARNING: If you need to open the bonnet, follow the procedure indicated under “How to open the bonnet”.
WARNING: Always use specific personal safety devices for each operation.
WARNING: Maintenance operations must be carried out with the engine off. Check that the gear and the par-
king brake are both engaged and that the ignition key has been removed.
WARNING: Beware of burns caused by hot tractor and engine parts. [4.1.n]

Bleeding air from the fuel system

Air is normally expelled automatically from this type of

system.
However, when the filters are removed, you should ble-
ed air from the whole system. Proceed in the following
way (Fig. 5-59).

1 - Make sure that the fuel tank contains a sufficient

quantity of fuel.

2 - Slacken off one of the fittings (4) that connect the

injectors and allow the engine to turn over by me-
ans of the starter motor until bubble-free fuel flows
out of the bleeder.

CAUTION: Do not operate the electric starter motor

for more than 20 seconds at a time to avoid overhe- Fig.5-59 Injection pump, injectors and filters. The posi-
ating the windings. tion of the fuel filters may be different according to the
Let the starter motor cool down before trying again. type of engine.
1 - Fuel filter.
3 - Shut off the injector fitting (4) when the engine has 2 - Filter bleeder.
started 3 - Injection pump.
4 - Injectors.
4 - Check all the fuel lines and seals for leaks.

120

Brakes
Bleeding the air from the rear brake
circuit
It becomes necessary to bleed the circuit when air en-
ters owing to lack of oil in the relative reservoir or when
the brake system is serviced.
This operation should be carried out by specialized
personnel. If, however, you decide to do it yourself,
proceed in the following way.
1 - Make sure that the reservoir (1 - Fig. 5-60) is full.
2 - Thoroughly clean the area around the bleed screw.
3 - Fully depress the left-hand brake pedal.
Meanwhile, unscrew the bleed screw (2 - Fig. 5-61)
a half-turn and allow any air and oil to flow out. Re-
tighten the bleed screw and release the pedal.
4 - Repeat this operation until bubble-free oil flows
from the bleed screw.
5 - Make sure that the clutch pedal travel is firm and
not spongy.
6 - Carry out the operations described above for the
right-hand brake pedal.
7 - On completion of bleeding, top up the fluid level in
the reservoir (1 - Fig. 5-60).
NOTE: Never reuse previously bled oil without having
first filtered it.
Fig.5-61- Air bleeding for rear brake system.
B - Bleed screw.
Maintenance
Fig.5-60 - Brake fluid reservoir (1) and bleed screw (2)
on the front brake on-off valve (3).
WARNING: When changing and topping
up the fluid in the brake reservoir (1 - Fig.
5-60), be absolutely sure to use the correct
type of fluid as different varieties have total-
ly different properties. These machines use
an LHM mineral-based fluid. Never mix or
exchange these two types of brake fluid as
this could rapidly bring about brake failure.
WARNING: The oil in the brake circuits has
been studied to operate at a temperature of
100°C but only if not polluted by other sub-
5
stances, e.g. water in considerable quantities
will turn into vapour and prevent the bra-
king system from operating in the correct
way. Take the necessary precautions to pre-
vent water from penetrating into the system:
protect the front axle and the components
in the braking system when the tractor is
washed; store oil in sheltered places where
water cannot infiltrate. If you think that the-
re is water in the braking system you must
contact your dealer’s specialized personnel
and have it removed. In this case, the rear
brake cylinders will have to be demounted
and emptied and particularly the brake
housing of the front axle which, being the
lowest part of the system, is the one most
exposed to this type of fault.
121
Maintenance

Bleeding air from the front brake

circuit
After having carefully carried out operations 1 to 7 to
bleed the rear brakes, proceed in the following way:

1 - Depress both brake pedals at the same time. Use

the special coupling lock to keep the pedals toge-
ther. Unscrew the bleed screw (1 - Fig.5-63) on the
on-off valve (2) until bubble-free oil flows out.
Re-tighten the screw and release the pedals.

2 - Depress both pedals at the same time and slacken

off the two bleed screws (1 - Fig.5-62) at the rear
of the central part of the front axle. Fig.5-62 - Bleeding air from the front brake circuit.
Repeat this operation until bubble-free oil flows 1 - Bleeder screws (2 screws).
out.

NOTE: If the tractor is equipped with a valve for hydraulic

trailer braking, it will also be necessary to bleed off
any air in the piloting tube of this valve. A screw on
the body of the valve allows this operation to be easily
carried out.

3 - Check free pedal travel and that the front brakes

act at the same time. Do this by testing the action
on the road.

4 - After having done this, top up the level in the reser-

voir with oil of the prescribed type.

WARNING: Always keep the brake pedals

coupled for on-road driving in order to
ensure simultaneous braking on both sides.
Never use the brakes independently on Fig.5-63
public roads. 1 - Bleeder screw.
2 - On-off valve.
When working on slopes, avoid using the
brakes as much as possible. Instead, select a
lower gear and use engine braking.

Tractors with hydraulic contro of the front

differential lock (on request for some markets only)

The tractors can also be equipped with hydraulically

controlled diff lock. (Fig. 5-63a). In this case the circuit
must be bled through both bleeding screws (1) and (2),
which are placed on the diff lock control valve. Follow the
above described procedure.

Fig.5-63a

122
 Maintenance

Hydraulic trailer brakes

To brake the trailer along with the tractor, the flexible
tube of the trailer brakes must be connected to the
fitting at the rear of the tractor (1 - Fig. 5-64). Always
make sure that the two parts are clean before you
connect them, to ensure that the various components
operate in a perfect way.

WARNING. Trailer brake approved for ITALY. When

the tractor is operating, it is absolutely essential to
engage the parking brake when either connecting or
detaching the tube that links the tube of the trailer
braking system to the quick coupling (1 - Fig..5-64).

NOTE: Air may enter the hydraulic trailer brake circuit

during normal servicing operations such as oil changes,
cleaning of oil ducts. Air in the circuit leads to vibrations Fig.5-64 - Hydraulic trailer braking tap (1).
on the pedal when the brakes are used. Air can be
easily bled from the circuit by pulling the parking brake
lever and depressing the brake pedal several times.

Dashboard and control coatings

CAUTION: Use water and a neutral detergent to cle-
an the coatings, the controls and the PU dashboard. 5
Any commercial product to clean car interiors may
be used.
Do NOT use any products deriving from hydrocarbons,
ketonic or aromatic solvents, alcohols of any kind.

123
Maintenance

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Battery Fig.5-65a/b [4.1.l]
With a maintenance free battery, it is normally not
necessary to frequently check the electrolyte and
charge levels.
It is advisable, however, to periodically check the level
of battery acid and to add distilled water if required.
If you need to top up too often, have the battery
charging system checked.
Check the level of the electrolyte in each element. If
topping up is required, proceed as follows, with the engine
stopped, the battery at rest and cold, and the tractor
parked on level ground. Fig.5-65a - Front battery (1)
1 - Fig.5-65a - Open the bonnet to access the battery (1).
1 - Fig.5-65b - Remove the retaining knob and turn the
ladder. Remove the clips (2) and the guard to access
the battery (1).
2 - Remove the plugs and check the liquid level.
3 - Slowly pour in the distilled water, until the top edge
of the plates is completely covered.
4 - Fit the plugs back and close the battery compartment.

WARNING: NEVER top up with SULFURIC

ACID.
Fig.5-65b - Side battery (depending on tractor’s model
and equipment).
WARNING:
Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer
and reproductive harm. Wash your hands after
handling these parts.

Check the charge condition with a voltmeter. Do not use

quick battery chargers to recharge the batteries.
NOTE: See the Maintenance section of this manual for a
NOTE: if the battery must be topped up frequently or description of battery replacement procedure.
tends to discharge, have the electrical system of your
tractor checked by your area Dealer’s specialised per- CAUTION: Dispose correctly of batteries, piles and
sonnel. accumulators to places and containers provided for
separate waste collection according to local rules. DO
WARNING: Remember to disconnect the wires NOT dispose of them in the environment.
before you recharge the battery. It is advisable
to remove the battery from its housing and to
recharge it well away from the tractor.

WARNING:The place in which the battery is

recharged must be well ventilated. Do not
smoke or produce sparks whilst the battery
is being recharged.

124
 Maintenance

Recommendations
The following rules must be respected to preserve an
efficient battery:
- Keep the battery clean and dry, particularly on top.
- If the battery acid must be topped up, use distilled
water only,
- Make sure that the cable terminal nuts are well fixed
to the battery terminals.
- Always use a wrench and not pliers to tighten and
loosen the terminal nuts.
- Smear terminals with petroleum jelly (not grease) to
protect them from oxidation.
- Never let the battery run completely down. If possi-
ble, recharge monthly.

WARNING: Battery electrolyte contains sul-

furic acid and can cause serious burns. The
following good practices are therefore re-
commended.
- Wear leather heavy-duty gloves and protective clo-
thes. In case of contact with the skin, wash with plenty
of water.
- Batteries release flammable gases that can cause an
explosion.
- DO NOT go near the battery with naked flames or
cigarettes. 5
- In case of contact with the eyes, first flush with water,
then seek medical help.
- Keep batteries well out of children’s reach.
- It contains lead: NEVER dispose of batteries in ge-
neral waste.
- Deliver and dispose of exhausted batteries only in
suitable containers provided to this purpose at autho-
rized centres, according to local rules.

125
Maintenance
Starter motor
The starter motor should be thoroughly cleaned after
periods of 1000 hours or at least once a year. Parti-
cularly check the condition of the brushes and collector.
Alternator
The alternator keeps the battery fully charged.
The alternator is a brushless model and requires no special
maintenance. However, the following precautions must
be observed.
1 - When fitting a battery, make sure that the positive
and negative terminals are connected to the same
leads as the alternator. If the battery terminals are
inverted, you will short circuit the battery through
the alternator diodes.
2 - When connecting the battery to a charger, make
sure that the positive (+) lead of the charger is
connected to the positive of the battery and the
negative (-) to the negative. Incorrect connection
will damage the diodes and the other circuit
components.
3 - Never run the alternator unless it is properly
connected.
If the battery is not connected, high voltages can
build up inside the alternator that can be extremely
dangerous if the output terminal is touched.
Make sure that all connections are firm and tight
before carrying out any inspections or tests on the
electrical system.
4 - Never short circuit or earth any of the alternator
terminals. This could damage the electrical system.
5 - Never invert the alternator connections. The battery
and alternator earths must be of the same sign or
the alternator diodes will be damaged.
6 - Always disconnect both alternator terminals before
undertaking any electric arc welding on the tractor.
A B
Fig. 5-65B
126
Electrical system - Warnings
It is absolutely forbidden to make changes or connections
to the data interconnecting lines between control
units (CAN-BUS lines). They are to be considered as
INVIOLABLE. All diagnostic and maintenance operations
may only be carried out by authorized technicians, with
specific appliances approved by Landini.
Use only fuses with the rated capacity for their specific
function. Do not ever use fuses with higher rated capacity.
Replace a blown fuse only after correcting the relative
malfunction and turn off any keys and users before
replacing.
Please keep in mind that electrical systems made by
unqualified persons might severely damage the systems
on board the tractor (control units, harnesses, sensors
etc.), and jeopardize the riding safety and good operation
of the tractor. Such damages ARE NOT COVERED BY OUR
CONTRACT WARRANTY.
Never disconnect control unit and sensor connectors
while the engine is running and the control units are
powered.
Negative conductors connected to a grounding point
of the system must be as short as possible and star
connected with each other.
As a principle, the grounding connections of the tractor
may not be changed.
If the creation of further grounding points is required, the
holes already provided on the frame must be used, taking
care of the following
- remove lacquer from the frame
- use a suitable highly conductive lacquer between frame
and cable terminal
- connect the ground within 5 minutes from lacquer
application
THE POINTS PROVIDED FOR ENGINE CONNECTION
TO GROUND MUST BE ABSOLUTELY AVOIDED FOR
GROUND CONNECTIONS - Fig.5-65B
1 - Ground connection; A. Efficient grounding point;
B. Not efficient grounding point;
2 - Cable fastening: A. Screw; B. Cable terminal;
C.Washer; D. Nut
3 - Correctly grounded cable.
 Maintenance

Headlights
As you can use your tractor on public roads, the lighting
must comply with the applicable traffic and road regu-
lations. Periodically check headlight alignment in the
following way:

Checking headlight alignment (Fig. 5-67).

- Halt the tractor on level ground facing a shaded wall

(preferably white). The tractor must be unloaded and
the tyres correctly inflated. Mark two crosses on the
wall in front of the tractor headlights (Fig. 5-67).

- Reverse the tractor 5 meters (16.4 ft) away from the

wall.
Fig.5-66 - Headlight alignment adjusters.
- Switch on the main beam. The center of each beam
must be vertically aligned with the crosses on the
wall. A maximum outward divergence of 130 mm (5
in) is acceptable.

- Switch on the dipped beam. The line separating the

lighted area from the dark area must fall below the
crosses and must be separated from their centers by
at least 1/20th of the height of the crosses from the
ground.

- Adjust the headlight alignment screws to correct

alignment as necessary (Fig. 5-66).

Fig.5-67 - Checking headlight alignment.

127
Maintenance

How to replace the headlight bulbs

- Fig. 5-68

1 - Remove the connector (3).

2 - Remove the rubber guard (2).
3 - Slacken off the retention spring (4).
4 - Remove the defective bulb (1).
5 - Fit in a new bulb. Remember not to hold the bulb in
your hand. Use a cloth to handle the bulb whilst it is
being fitted.
6 - Fit the parts back in place by proceeding through the
instructions in reverse order.

Fig.5-68

How to replace the bulbs in the rear

side lights and hazard lights - Fig.
5-69

1 - Unscrew the screws (1 - Fig. 69a) and remove the

glass cover.
2 - Press down the bulb and turn it in the anti-clockwise
direction.
3 - Replace the faulty bulb (1,2 or 3 - Fig. 69b).
4 - Fit the glass again with the screws (1 - Fig. 69a)

Fig.5-69a Fig.5-69b

128
 Maintenance

How to replace the bulbs in the

front side lights and hazard lights -
Fig. 5-70

1 - Unscrew the screws (1) and remove the glass co-

vers.
2 - Replace the faulty bulbs
Ref.2- Intermittent turn indicator lights
Ref.3- Side lights
To replace the faulty bulb, press it down and turn it
in the anti-clockwise direction.
3 - Fit the glass again with the screws (1)

Fig.5-70

129
Maintenance

FUSES AND RELAYS - Techno WARNING: To carry out this operation, engage the
The electrical system of the tractor is protected against first gear, turn off the engine, engage the parking
short-circuits and excessive power draw by means of brake and remove the ignition key.
fuses. The number of the fuses in the electrical system
depends on the tractor model. WARNING: Always use specific personal safety devices
for each operation.
NOTE: Before replacing a blown fuse with a new,
equivalent one, the cause that led to the fault should be
ascertained and removed.

The front fuses have the following functions and

ampere ratings - Fig.5-71

Fuse Protected circuits Amp.

FU1 Primary 100

FU2 Alternator 80
FU3 Glow plugs 50

Fig.5-71

K1 - Power relay (glow plug pre-heater) - Fig.5-72

Fig.5-72

130
 Maintenance

Fuses and relays - Techno

fuses and relays are installed in the dashboard wiring

line - Fig.5-73

Fuse Protected circuits Amp.

FA1 Driving beams 15

FA2 Dipped beams 10
FA3 Lh side lights 5
FA4 Rh side lights 5
FA5 Side lights 10
FA6 Cigarette lighter 10
FA7 Brake lights 10
FA8 Ignition key 5
FA9 (Instrument, direct) 5
FA10 Auxiliary socket, key-activated 25
FA11 Turn indicators 10
FA12 Brake lights & differential lock
solenoid valve 10
FA13 Empty -
FA14 NAO plant 7.5
FA15 Air braking 5
FA16 Instrument, key operated 5
FA17 Front PTO 5
FA18 Emergency 15
FA19 Front loader 7.5
FA20 Diff lock solenoid valve 5
FB1 Pneumatic seat 10
FB2 Auxiliary socket (battery, direct) 5
FB3 Starter motor enabling 20
FB4 Horn & revolving beacon 10 Fig.5-73
FB5 Injection pump and fuel pump 7.5
FB6 Rear field light and sunroof lights

5
(if fitted) 10

Relay Function

KA1 Platform field lights, pneumatic seat,

headlights
KA2 Auxiliary socket, key-activated
KA3 Trailer air brakes, front PTO, turn indicator
lights, instrument, NAO power unit, diff lock.
brake lights
KA4 Cigarette lighter, injection pump and fuel
pump
KA5 Front PTO starting up safety
KA6 Front loader
KB1 Rear PTO starting up safety
KB2 Starter motor starting up safety
KB3 Dipped beams
KB4 Driving beams
KB5 Diff lock self-retainer
KB6 Brake pedal pressure switch control
KC1 Hand brake enabling for air braking
KC2 Starting safety
K1 Power relay (glow plug pre-heater)
(Fig.5-74)
HA2 Buzzer
Fig.5-74

131
Maintenance

7-pole power socket for trailer (Fig.

5-75 and 5-76)

A 7-pole power socket is installed on the rear of the

tractor (1 - Fig. 5-76). This socket is used to connect the
light circuits of the trailer.

Connections (Fig. 5-75)

1. Lh turn indicator; 2. Not used; 3. Earth; 4. Rh turn
indicator; 5. Rh rear side light; 6. Brake lights; 7. Lh rear
side light.

Fig.5-76

Fig.5-75 Connections and correspondances for

7-pole power socket according to ISO-SAE
standards.

Auxiliary power socket (Fig. 5-77)

On the rear of the dashboard, on the right of the operator,

is installed an 12v auxiliary power socket.

Connections (Fig.5-77)
1- Key-operated positive - Max. load 5A
2- Negative
3- Direct battery positive - Max. load 25A

Fig.5-77

132
 Maintenance

Long idle periods

Take the following precautionary measures when your CAUTION: At the end of the idle period, when
tractor is not going to be used for a long period of time. you start the engine again, pay particular at-
tention to the instructions about starting the
- Park the tractor in a dry, sheltered place. engine in the Operation chapter.

- Drain the coolant from the radiator and engine.

- Grease all points provided with grease nipples.

- Clean the fuel filter.

- Remove the injectors and squirt a small quantity of

engine oil into the cylinders. Turn the engine over by
hand, then fit the injectors back in place.

- Generally clean the tractor, particularly the bodywork

components. Protect the painted parts by applying
silicone wax and the unpainted metal parts by ap-
plying protective lubricant. Park the tractor in a dry,
sheltered and possibly ventilated place.

- Make sure that all controls are in neutral (including

the electric switches and parking brake controls).

- Remove the ignition key from the ignition switch.

- Make sure that the cylinder stems (of the power

steering, power lift systems, etc.) are positioned.

- Empty the fuel tank and fill it with new diesel fuel
until the maximum level is reached.

- Remove the battery, clean the cover and spread

Vaseline on the terminals and terminal caps. Now
connect the battery in a ventilated place where the 5
temperature is not liable to drop below 10°C and
where it is not exposed to direct sunlight.

- Check the battery charge with a voltmeter as descri-

bed in the battery part of this section. Recharge it if
necessary.

- Place stands or other supports under the axles in

order to take the weight off the wheels. When the
tractor is raised in this way, it is advisable to deflate
the tyres. If this is not possible, the tyre pressure
must be periodically checked.

- Cover the tractor with a tarpaulin (not plastic or

waterproof).

133
Maintenance

Page left blank intentionally

134
 Technical specifications

Chapter 6
Technical specifications
6

ARGO TRACTORS constantly updates its range of products and

therefore reserves the right to undertake modifications, if appro-
priate ad necessary, without prior notice.
All data and information contained in this publication could be
subject to changes.
Dimensions and weights are only approximate values and the
equipment shown by the pictures could not correspond to stan-
dard models.
Precise data and information about models and equipment are
available at your ARGO TRACTORS Dealer.

135
Technical specifications

Fig.6-1

Mod. 75 Mod. 80
General data

2 WD 4 WD 2 WD 4 WD
With tyres
- front 7.50-16 12.4-24 7.50-18 12.4-24
- rear 14.9 R28 14.9 R28 16.9R30 16.9R30

Weights

- In running order, without front

and rear ballasts
With steel rings................................................................kg 2690 2920 2930 3160

Dimensions

A- Height at safety frame..................................................mm 2430 2520 2430 2520

B- Wheelbase....................................................................mm 2192 2273 2341 2285

C- Max. length with front ballast
and rods with fixed knuckle joints................................mm 4093 4093 4105 4105

D- Ground clearance
(under front axle) .........................................................mm 475 385 475 385

E- Min. - Max. width on road............................................mm 1620-2200 1670-2200


F - Front track....................................................................mm See track See track
G -Rear track...................................................................... mm tables tables

136
 Technical specifications

Fig.6-2

Mod. 90 Mod. 100 Mod. 105-110

General data
2 WD 4 WD 2 WD 4 WD 2 WD 4 WD

With tyres 9.00-16 380/70R24 9.00-16 440/65R24 9.00-16 380/70R24
- front 18.4 R30 480/70R34 480/70R34 540/65R34 480/70R34 480/70R34
- rear

Weights

- In running order, without front

and rear ballasts
3090 3330 3090 3330 3130 3380
With steel rings........................................... kg

Dimensions

A- Height at safety frame..............................mm 2560 2560 2560 2560 2610 2610 6

B- Wheelbase................................................mm 2341 2316 2341 2316 2340 2340

C- Max. length with front ballast
and rods with fixed knuckle joints............mm 4136 4136 4136 4136 4160 4160

D- Ground clearance
(under front axle) .....................................mm 515 425 515 425 495 440

E- Min. - Max. width on road........................mm 1670-2200 1670-2200 1670-2200

See track See track See track
F - Front track................................................mm tables tables tables
G -Rear track..................................................mm

137
 Technical specifications

Engine 75 80 90 100 105 110

Type
Model
Fuel supply
Number of cylinders
Bore mm
Stroke mm
Displacement cm3
ISO Power rating HP/kW
Max. speed under load RPM
Max. torque rating Nm
Max. torque speed RPM
Idling speed RPM
Perkins Diesel, 4 stroke
direct injection
RS81543
1103D-33T 1104D-44 1104D-44T 1104D-44T 1104D-44T 1104D-44TA
Turbo Natural Turbo Turbo Turbo Turbo
LLVLV49036 Aftercooler
3 4 4 4 4 4
105 105 105 105 105 105
127 127 127 127 127 127
3.300 4.400 4.400 4.400 4.400 4.400
68/50 74,12/54.5 83/61 92.5/68 98,57/72,5 101,9/74,9
2200 2200 2200 2200 2200 2200
- 256 345 384 384 405
1400 1400 1400 1400 1400 1400
750 750 750 750 750 750

Timing system

Type Overhead valves, controlled by rocker arms

Fuel system

Firing order 1--2-3 1‑3‑4‑2 1‑3‑4‑2 1‑3‑4‑2 1‑3‑4‑2 1-3-4-2

Injectors Perkins Perkins Perkins Perkins Perkins Perkins

Cold starting device Thermostarter

Air filter dry type, with two extractable elements for service

Lubrication Cooling

Forced lubrication, by pump. Water cooling, forced circulation by centrifugal pump

driven by the timing gears.
Oil filtration by:
– Gauze filter on the pump intake. Vertical tube type radiator.
– Replaceable cartridge filter on engine delivery line.
Thermostat control from engine to radiator for water
Oil pressure (with engine at maximum rated power circulation.
speed): 3.5/4.2 bar (50-60 psi)
Normal rate: 77-850C (170-195 °F).
Engine starting
Antifreeze is required for very low temperatures (see
“Maintenance”).
Thermostarter for starting at low temperatures.

138
 Technical specifications

Transmission Reduction ratio of bevel gear pair and rear final

drives
Clutch
Mod.75 with standard final drives
Two single disk dry clutches in a single assembly: one
clutch connects the engine to the gearbox, the other Bevel gear pair...........................................................44/9
connects the engine to the PTO transmission.
Reduction ratio of side final drives..........................62/11
The two clutches have separate controls: the former by
pedal, the latter by means of a lever. Total reduction ratio of rear axle ...........................27,555

Mod. 75:.....................................11”(279,4 mm) standard Mod.80 with HD final drives; Mod.90-100

Mod. 80-90:................................11”(279,4 mm) standard
............................................... 12”(304,8 mm) on request Bevel gear pair...........................................................44/9
Mod. 100-105-110:.....................12”(304,8 mm) standard
Reduction ratio of side final drives..........................73/12
Disk materials:
Total reduction ratio of rear axle ............................29.74
•Gearbox clutch Mod. 75-80-90 .................. cerametallic
Mod. 100-105-110............. cerametallic Mod. 105-110
•PTO clutch . ........................................................ organic
Bevel gear pair.........................................................51/11

Gearbox Reduction ratio of side final drives..........................73/11

With infinitely meshed gears divided into two sections:­ Total reduction ratio of rear axle ..........................30,768
the first has four synchronized gears while the second
has a direct drive clutch,
.
The gearbox can be supplied with different specifica- Differential lock
tions.
Rear differential lock, controlled by a hydraulic system
Possible combinations and number of speeds available and mechanical engagement.
Max. 30 Kph For 4WD, simultaneous with front differential lock.
1 - Gearbox with reverse shuttle . ......................... 12+12
2 - Gearbox with reverse shuttle/creeper............. 24+12
3 - Gearbox with reverse shuttle/underdrive......... 24+12

Max. 40 Kph
1 - Gearbox with reverse shuttle/overdrive........... 24+12

139
Technical specifications

Power take-off Mod. 105-110

Standard type in compliance with A.S.A.E standards on
the rear part of the tractor.
Mod.75-80-90: fixed shaft.
Rated diameter of shaft: 34.9 mm (1 3/8”).
Number of splines: 6.
Mod.100-105-110: interchangeable shafts.
• 10,265 RPM with PTO at 540 RPM
• 14,479 RPM with PTO at 540E RPM
• 19,264 RPM with PTO at 1000 RPM
Brakes
Multidisc oil cooled brakes on rear differential half
shafts.

• 1 3/8” (34,9 mm) diameter shaft, 21 splines, for 1000
RPM PTO, standard.
• 1 3/8” (34,9 mm) diameter shaft, 6 splines, for 540
RPM PTO, supplied.
• 1 3/4” (44.4 mm) diameter shaft, 21 splines, for 540
RPM PTO, at request.
Operation: independent and synchronized with the
gearbox.
Mod.75-80-90-100-105-110 [4.2.d]
Number of discs for each brake unit:
Mod. 75-80.................................................. 4 discs
Mod. 90-100-105-110........................................... 5 discs
Hydrostatic braking control by means of two pedals
on the operator’s right: the two pedals can be coupled
together by a locking device to provide simultaneous
braking action on both sides.
Parking brake controlled by an independent hand lever
and linkages acting directly on main brakes.

Rotation speeds with independent operation:

Front axle for 2-wheel drive
• 540 RPM with a 1944 RPM engine rate
HD Heavy Duty - 58°
• 540E RPM with a 1392 RPM engine rate, at request
Box-shaped front axle swinging around the central pin.
• 1000 RPM with a 1916 RPM engine rate
Double-acting balanced steering cylinder mounted in
central position.
Rotation speed with synchronized operation (PTO shaft
revolutions per rear wheel turn):
Track adjustment by means of telescopic sliding of the
axle ends.
Engagement and selection of the PTO operating mode
by means of a lever on the left-hand side of the gear-
Maximum steering angle.............................................58°
box.
Max. load on axle
Mod. 75
Mod. 75................................................................ 1900 kg
Mod. 80-90-100-105-110...................................... 2300 kg
• 9,185 RPM with PTO at 540 RPM

• 12,822 RPM with PTO at 540E RPM

• 17,252 RPM with PTO at 1000 RPM

Mod. 80-90-100

• 9,914 RPM with PTO at 540 RPM

• 13,839 RPM with PTO at 540E RPM

• 18,620 RPM with PTO at 1000 RPM

140
 Technical specifications

4WD front axle Steering components

Front axle in spheroidal cast iron turning in the centre
Power steering
around two supports.
Power steering system controlled by the steering wheel
Max. turning radius..................................................... 52°
with independent hydraulic circuit. Double-acting con-
trol cylinder mounted on the axle assembly.
Front drive engagement by means of hand lever.
Gear pump operated by the drive shaft for oil supply.
Transmission shaft without universal couplings on longi-
tudinal axis of the tractor.
Pump flow rate with engine at top rate:..... 24 litres/min
Transmission through central differential and epyciclic
Pressure limiting valve setting:
final drives in the wheel hubs.
•2WD axle............................................................120 bar
It is possible, on order, to request a tractor equipped
with a front axle with hydraulic control and mechanical
•4WD axle............................................................150 bar
engagement of the differential lock.

Transmission unit on the gearbox with infinitely meshed

gears.

Bevel gear pair ratios:

•Mod.75-80.............................................................11/40

•Mod.90-100-105-110.............................................. 8/31

Reduction ratio of epyciclic final drives...................1:5.2 Minimum turning radius

Total reduction rate: 2WD tractors

•Mod.75-80......................................................... 1:18.91
Mod. 75 80-90 100-105-110
•Mod.90-100-105-110..........................................1:20.15
Without brakes 4.2 m 4.2 m 4.2 m

Track adjustment 4WD tractors
Track is adjustable on 2WD and 4WD front axles and Mod. 75 80-90 100-105-110
on rear axles. See the Tables in the “Operation” chapter.
Without brakes 4.2 m 4.2 m 4.2 m
Mechanical ratio of front and rear
axle 6
•Mod.75................................................................1.3632

•Mod.80-90-100................................................... 1.3807

•Mod.105-110.........................................................1.383

141
Technical specifications

Hydraulic power lift Seat

Draft control, position control, “Intermix” (combined
draft and position contro) and float mode. Padded, with adjustable suspension.
Two independent control levers; sensitivity regulation; The suspension, height and distance from controls can
oil tap for external single-acting rams. also be adjusted.
Open center hydraulic circuit with gear pump operated
by the gears of the timing system, gauze filter on the
pump intake.
Bonnet
Robust single piece pressed sheet bonnet. It can be
easily opened for full access to the battery, air filter and
Hydraulic system engine components.

Pump flow rate with engine at maximum power:

Electrical system
Mod.75: at 2250 RPM..............................49.0 litres/min
Voltage rating: 12 V negative earth.
Mod.80-90-100-105-110: at 2200 RPM.... 53.9 litres/
min
Alternator
•Pressure limiting valve setting ..........................170 bar
Type..................................................................55 Amp/h
Max. lifting capacity at ends of articulated rods in hori- Max. power at 2200 rpm engine rate...................500 W
zontal position [4.2.g]:
Built-in automatic voltage regulator in the alternator.
•without auxiliary rams......................................2400 Kg.
Remote charge indicator.
•with 2 auxiliary rams........................................3700 Kg.
•with 2 auxiliary rams Mod.105-110..................4350 Kg.
Starter motor

Continuous power................................................ 2.5 kW

Three-point linkage
Automatic pinion engagement by electromagnet.
Class 2 three-point linkage. Right-hand vertical link with
adjustable jack. Left-hand vertical link with two-position
top end: one fixed and the other one sliding. Adjustable Battery
stabilizers.
“Maintenance Free” type. Complies with SAE J537 stan-
dards.
• Class “C” rigid rear tow hook, adjustable in height: 4
positions.. Charge capacity .................................................... 92 Ah

• Class “A” rear tow hook with swinging bar (available

on request, as an alternative to the class “C” hook).

• Front tow hook (on request).

Safety frame
Safety frame approved according to OECD international
standards. Fitted on a platform suspended over Silent
Bloc.
Tighten bolts and nuts to fix the safety frame at a tor-
que of 9 daNm.

142

Lights
Front lights including:
• Two double filament headlights, 45/50 W.
• Two side lights (5 W lamp) with transparent lenses.
• Two orange lens turn indicators (21 W lamp).
Rear lights including:
• Two red lens tail lights (5 W lamp).
• Two orange lens turn indicators (21 W lamp).
• Two red lens stop lights (21 W lamp).
• Licence plate light (5 W lamp).
One adjustable rear field light (55 W halogen lamp).
7-pole rear power socket for trailer lights.
Technical specifications
Optional extras
• Towing device:
• Front pull hook
• Class A rear tow hook with swinging drawbar.
• Open-center auxiliary control valves with lines and
quick couplings of the «Push-Pull« type (max. 3).
Single or double-acting operation. Available in various
versions.
1. Three-position control valve convertible from
single to double-acting operation;
2. 4-position control valve: automatic release plus
floating position, convertible from single to
double-acting operation;
3. 4-position control valve: convertible from single
to double-acting operation, with floating posi-
tion.
• One or two auxiliary rams for hydraulic power lift.
• Front axle weights: 6-8 cast iron plates weighing 36
Kg
• Rear wheel weights: 4 cast iron rings, two per wheel,
weighing 60 Kg each for a total 240 Kg
• Mod.80-90: Auxiliary lift cylinders, max. 2, diameter
40mm.
• Mod. 80-90: on request, 12” (304.8 mm) dry double
disc clutch with cerametallic disc and organic PTO
disc.
• Mod. 80-90-100 with platform: on request, available
with exhaust under the platform.
• Mod.100-105-110: ejector to expel dirt from the engi-
ne air filter connected to the engine exhaust
6
143
Technical specifications

Noise levels as perceived by the operator [4.3]

THE FOLLOWING TABLES GIVE THE NOISE LEVEL VALUES,

MEASURED FROM THE DRIVER’S SEAT IN INSTANTANEOUS CONDITIONS
IN COMPLIANCE WITH STANDARDS EEC 2009/76/EC (dBA) - ANNEX II (without load) -
AND WHEN DRIVING BY IN COMPLIANCE WITH STANDARD EEC 2009/63/EC (dBA).

Tractors with safety frame

Model Noise level Noise level on driving
2RM/4RM at driver’s seat - dBA dBA
Mod. 75
Mod. 80 85,00 81,00
Mod. 90 85,00 83,00
Mod. 100 84,00 83,00
Mod. 105 85,00 85,00
Mod. 110 84,00 83,00

TRACTORS WITH CAB TECHNO

Noise level Noise level on
Model
at driver’s seat - dBA driving dBA
Porte chiuse Finestrini+Porta
post. aperta
Mod. 75
Mod. 80 81,00 83,00 81,00
Mod. 90 81,00 83,00 83,00
Mod. 100 81,00 83,00 83,00
Mod. 105 80,00 83,00 85,00
Mod. 110 81,00 83,00 83,00

TRACTORS WITH CAB TOP

Noise level Noise level on
Model
at driver’s seat - dBA driving dBA
Closed doors Open windows
+ rear doors
Mod. 75
Mod. 80 79,00 81,00 81,00
Mod. 90 79,00 81,00 83,00
Mod. 100 79,00 81,00 83,00
Mod. 105 78,00 81,00 85,00
Mod. 110 79,00 81,00 83,00

144
 Technical specifications

INFORMATION PAGE ON VIBRATION LEVELS OF THE TRACTOR

EXPOSITION TO VIBRATIONS [4.4]

WARNING: The vibration level transmitted to IMPORTANT: More information on Whole Body Vibra-
the body as a whole depend on different para- tion (WBV) on agricultural tractors can be found in more
meters, some of them relating to the machine, specific publications and the relative risks can be taken
others to the terrain and many specific for into account following the laws of the country. In order
the operator. The prevailing parameters are to correctly estimate statistical values based on your
the type of terrain or work surface and the daily work on the tractor, a specific measure instrument
ground speed. is required, such a three-axis accelerometer applied to
the seat.
WARNING:
- Vibrations cause discomfort for the opera- NOTE: Visit the dedicated Internet web sites for further
tor and in some cases put his/her health and information and documentation on risks of whole body
safety at risk. vibration.
- Make sure that the tractor is in good condi-
tion and that all routine servicing is correctly
and regularly carried out.
- Check tyre pressure and the steering and
braking systems.
- Check that the operator’s seat and adjustment
systems are in good condition, then adjust the
seat to the operator’s weight and size.

In accordance to EU Directive 78/764/EC the following table shows vibration levels measured on seats, in aws.

Seat type Vibrations * m/s2 at the (applied test weights)

Light-weight operator Heavy-weight operator

Grammer MSG83/520 aws* = 1,13m/s2 aws* = 1,00 m/s2

(Mechanical)

Grammer MSG93/520 aws* = 1,21m/s2 aws* = 1,05 m/s2

(Air suspension)

MT SC79-M20 aws* = 1,17m/s2 aws* = 0,81m/s2

(Mechanical)

MT LMO 10/81 aws* = 1,17m/s2 aws* = 0,81 m/s2

(Mechanical) 6
MT SC79-M97 aws* = 1,21m/s2 aws* = 0,98 m/s2
(Air suspension)

MT SC79-M91 aws* = 1,13m/s2 aws* = 0,75 m/s2

(Mechanical)

* aws = correct weighted value of the vibration acceleration (m/s2)

145
Technical specifications

‘CE’ DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY

“ Every tractor is accompanied by a CE Declaration of Conformity to Directive 2006/42/EC that you should receive in
original together with the tractor.
This Declaration indicates with which European Directive the machine complies”.

The following picture is a fac-simile copy of such CE Declaration of Conformity.

Argo Tractors S.p.A.

42042 Fabbrico [RE] Italia
via G. Matteotti, 7
E
t. +39.0522.656111
IL

f. +39.0522.656476
IM

webmaster@argotractors.com
www.argotractors.com
S
C
FA

146
 Technical specifications

Issue of authorization
To install any type of mounted or semi-mounted equipment not provided for by road traffic laws, it is mandatory to
request the express written authorization of the vehicle manufacturer.
We insist at any rate on our recommendation to mount always exclusively CE marked equipment complying with the
Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC.

Weights [4.2.h]

Maximum weight declared by the manufacturer for road circulation

IMPORTANT: DO NOT exceed the maximum load capacity of the tyres on your tractor. See Loads and Inflation Pressures
recommended by tyre manufacturers.

IMPORTANT: DO NOT exceed the local legal limitations of the axle loads and the total weight on the road.

Maximum permitted tractor operating weight

The MAXIMUM PERMITTED TRACTOR OPERATING WEIGHT includes the tractor, tractor equipment and ballast.

The MAXIMUM PERMITTED AXLE OPERATING WEIGHT includes the tractor, tractor equipment, ballast and three-point
hitch mounted equipment.

Model Front Rear Total Model Front Rear Total

STD 2WD kg kg kg STD 4WD kg kg kg

75STD 2WD 2300 3500 5800 75STD 4WD 3000 3500 6500
80STD 2WD 2300 3500 5800 80STD 4WD 3000 3500 6500
90STD 2WD 2300 3500 5800 90STD 4WD 3000 3500 6500
100STD 2WD 2300 3500 5800 100STD 4WD 3000 3500 6500
105STD 2WD 2300 3700 6000 105STD 4WD 3000 3700 6700
110STD 2WD 2300 3700 6000 110STD 4WD 3000 3700 6700

Model Front Rear Total Model Front Rear Total

LP 2WD kg kg kg LP 4WD kg kg kg

75LP 2WD 2300 3500 5800 75LP 4WD 3000 3500 6500
80LP 2WD
90LP 2WD
2300
2300
3500
3500
5800
5800
80LP 4WD
90LP 4WD
3000
3000
3500
3500
6500
6500 6
100LP 2WD 2300 3500 5800 100LP 4WD 3000 3500 6500
105LP 2WD 2300 3700 5800 105LP 4WD 3000 3500 6500
110LP 2WD 2300 3700 5800 110LP 4WD 3000 3500 6500

Model Front Rear Total Model Front Rear Total

HC 2WD kg kg kg HC 4WD kg kg kg

90HC 2WD 1900 3500 5400 90HC 4WD 1900 3500 5400
100HC 2WD 1900 3500 5400 100HC 4WD 1900 3500 5400
105HC 2WD 1900 3700 5400 105HC 4WD 1900 3500 5400
110HC 2WD 1900 3700 5400 110HC 4WD 1900 3500 5400

IT IS RECOMMENDED to use the tractor always with a load on front axle over 25% or not under 55% of the total weight.

NOTE: Data supplied by the manufacturer, approval values pending.

147
 Technical specifications

LUBRICANTS AND CAPACITIES

component Q.ty litres SPECIFICATI- AMBIENT TEM- AGROLUBE
ONS PERATURE
Techno

75* 90 100 105*

80 110

COOLING CIRCUIT AGROLUBE MUREX Concentrated antifreeze fluid to be used Degrees °C -8° -15° -25° -35°
15 15 15 15 in the following percentages:
Specifications: GM 1899M (1970); FORD ESE-M97B % 20 30 40 50

FUEL TANK 95 95 95 95 Viscosity at Viscosity at

40°C, cSt 100°C, cSt

Engine with filter 7 7 7 7 acea e7/E5/

E3/B3 ANY SOLEA 115 15,2
API CH-4/SL temperature LD 15W40
Oil-bath air cleaner
0.7 0.7 0.7 0.7
(if equipped)

API GL - 4 U.T.T.O
FORD M2C-86C
GEARBOX AND HITCH ALLISON C-4 ANY VELA/B 65
HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT (1) 33 34 36 36
LANDINI I-ENG- temperature
9.8
D-302

API GL - 5
REAR FINAL DRIVES (each) 3.6 3.6 3.6 4.2 mf1134m ANY CARINA 80W-90 174
** Mod.75 16.8
fordm2c 108c temperature
2.2** MIL-L-2105 D
DIFFERENTIAL HOUSING API GL - 5 ANY
FRONT AXLE WITH BRA- 5.8 5.8 5.8 5.8
ZF TE-ML temperature
CARINA LS 90 174 16.8
KES (1) 05C,12C,16E

DIFFERENTIAL HOUSING API GL - 5

FRONT AXLE WITHOUT 5.8 5.8 5.8 5.8 mf1134m ANY CARINA 80W-90 174 16.8
BRAKES (2) fordm2c 108c temperature
MIL-L-2105 D
API GL - 5
FRONT FINAL DRIVES 1.4 1.4 1.4 1.4 mf1134m ANY 174
(each) CARINA 80W-90 16.8
fordm2c 108c temperature
MIL-L-2105 D
ATF A-A
STEERING CIRCUIT 2.3 2.3 2.3 2.3 mf1110m ANY ALCOR T.A.S.A. 42 7.4
ALLISON C4 temperature
landini ANY
braking circuit 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 AZA 22.5 5.6
s/eng/i 102 temperature RED (3)
— — — — — ANY GENA GREASE — —
Grease Points temperature EP
* 75-105 For some markets only
(1) Use only lubricants that comply with LANDINI I-ENG-D-302, NEW HOLLAND M2 C 86 C, M-F 1135 specifications. LANDINI specifications
defines additives and anti-noise properties. The use of different types of oil, or mixing other types of oil into the oil supplied with the tractor
can lead to increased noise.
(2) The front axle without brakes (available as optional for some markets) uses oils complying with the following specifications: API GL 5,
MIL-2105D type KRIPTOS 80W90; MOBILUBE HD90; ESSO GEAR OIL GX 80W90; SHELL SPIRAX 80W90; BP Hypogear Oil 80 W90;
AGIP ROTRA MP 80W90.
(3) Mineral based oil for brake circuits complying with LANDINI S/ENG/I 102 specifications

NOTE: Alternative products must have the same quality, conforming to international specifications as indicated and in accordance with the
specifications of the tractor manufacturer.

148
 Technical specifications

Towing attachments

Front pull hook

[4.1.j]

The tractor is equipped with a front pull hook for emer-

gency pulling operations from the front and for towing
the tractor. (4 - Fig. 6-4)

WARNING: DO NOT raise the tractor using the tow-

ing hook.
Fig.6-4
CAUTION: Use exclusively the provided hooks to
tow the machine. Towing attachments
CAUTION: Refer to licensing documents issued by
the Ministry of Transport to know data relating to Front pull hook
max. vertical and horizontal loads on tow hooks and
max. trailer weights. The tractor is equipped with a front pull hook for emer-
gency pulling operations from the front and for towing
the tractor.

Class C and D2 tow hook

A class C tow hook (Fig. 60) may be fitted for towing
single or twin axle agricultural implements and trailers
(Fig. 6-5).
A class D2 tow hook is available on request.

To make hitching the implement easier, this device can

be adjusted in height. It can be set either over or under
the PTO shaft (Fig. 6-6).

To re-position the tow hook, pull out the securing pins

(1) to free the hook and move it to the desired height.

Positioning of the tow hook is extremely important. Ma-

noeuverability and stability in driving depends on imple-
ments and trailers being hitched at the correct height.

In the higher positions, the tow hook has a greater Fig. 6-5 Class C and D2 tow hook
towing capacity, but the risk of lifting the tractor’s front
wheels is also greater.
6
When using the four wheel drive, keep the tow hook in
one of the lower positions so that the drawbar remains
as horizontal as possible. This keeps the weight over
the front axle and improves tractive force.

Model 75 80 90 100 105-110 Sliding tow hook

440 468 517 552 552
Ground 540 568 617 652 652
clearance 665 693 742 777 777
765 793 842 877 877
A hook whose height is quickly adjusted is available
in certain European countries, where permitted by the
highway code.
The hook can be adjusted to various heights between
520 mm and max. 935 mm for Mod. 90-100-105-110
and between 470mm and 885 mm for Mod. 75-80.

149
Technical specifications

Ø25 12 holes CE tow hook

Available on request

4 pins Ø25

Screw M12 x 40-8.8 Fig. 6-7 CE tow hook.

Fig. 6-6 Class C and D2 tow hook adjustment.

Class «A» swinging drawbar

The tractor can be equipped with a class A swinging
drawbar (3) designed only for agricultural implements
with two or more axles (Fig. 6-8 and 6-9).

Never use this type of attachment to tow single axle

implements and trailers because they can apply enough
weight to the drawbar to pitch the tractor up at the
front. Fig.6-8 Class A drawbar.

Ground clearance:
Mod. 75-80: 560mm
Mod. 90-100-105-110: 610mm

Furthermore, the cross member allows the bar to be

amply regulated in a horizontal direction for those
implements, such as ploughs, that require freedom of
swinging movement.

This swinging action can be limited or reduced by

means of pins (2).

Warning: when implements connected to the

PTO are used, the drawbar must be regulated
in height so that it is between 150 and 300
mm (from 5.91 to 11.82 in.) below the axis of
the PTO shaft.
Fig. 6-9 Class A drawbar.

150
 Technical specifications

WARNING!
There are other types of tow hooks in addition to the ones listed below, always consult the documents
attached to the registration certificate of your tractor in order to know the towing capacity and maximum
vertical loads.

EEC approved tow hooks

Manufacturer and type Approval Item
V.ORLANDI; MH31H (manual) D*e11*2068* a
V.ORLANDI, AH31H (automatic) D*e11*3009* b
V. ORLANDI AH31H-S (automatic) D*e11*2067* c
V. ORLANDI EG 37 (drawbar) ST*e11*2061* d
CARPENFER (PUH) D*e11*2196 e
CBM (eec) D*e11*2058 f
ARIES (eec) D*e11*2111* g

2WD tractors - models: 80, 90, 100

Max. vertical load on hitch point (kg) [4.2.j]
Rear tyres Hook item:
a b c d e f g
16.9-R-30 (137A8)
13.6-R-36 (127A8)
18.4-R-30 (142A8)
13.6-R-38 (128A8) 1000 1000 1000 800 1000 1000 1000
16.9-R-34 (139A8)
420/85-R-34 (142A8)
480/70-R-34 (143A8)

2WD tractors - models: 105, 110

Max. vertical load on hitch point (kg) [4.2.j] 6
Rear tyres Hook item:
a b c d e f g
16.9-R-30 (137A8)
18.4-R-30 (142A8)
13.6-R-38 (128A8)
16.9-R-34 (139A8)
420/85-R-34 (142A8) 840 840 840 800 1000 1000 1000
480/70-R-34 (143A8)
14.9-R-38 (133A8)
380/80-R-38 (142A8)
18.4-R-34 (144A8)

150/1
Technical specifications

4WD tractors - ALL models

Max. vertical load on hitch point (kg) [4.2.j]
Rear tyres Hook item:
a b c d e f g
540/65-R-30 (143A8)
16.9-R-30 (137A8)
13.6-R-36 (127A8)
18.4-R-30(142A8)
13.6-R-38(128A8)
480/70-R-34(143A8)
16.9-R-34(139A8)
1000 1000 1000 800 1000 1000 1000
420/85-R-34 (142A8)
540/65-R-34(140A8)
420/85-R-34(142A8)
18.4-R-34(144A8)
520/70-R-34 (148A8)
14.9-R-38 (133A8)
380/80-R-38 (142A8)

Max. towable weights [4.2.l]

Hook type EEC (item: a, b, c, d, e, f, g)
Models 2WD 4WD

Trailers with no brakes 3000 3000

Trailers with mechanical brakes 6000 6000
Trailers with inertia brakes 8000 8000
Trailers with brakes assisted === 24000

150/2
 Technical specifications

2WD tractors: HC models

Max. vertical load on hitch point (kg) [4.2.j]
Rear tyres Hook item:
a b c d e f g
9.5-R-44 (131A8)
230/95-R-44(131A8)
13.6-R-38 (128A8)
14.9-R-38 (133A8)
380/80-R-38 (142A8) 125 145 145 550 500 400 400
9.5-R-48 (127A8)
230/95-R-48 (125A8)
16.9-R-38 (141A8)
420/85-R-38 (144A8)

4WD tractors: HC models

Max. vertical load on hitch point (kg) [4.2.j]
Rear tyres Hook item:
a b c d e f g
13.6-R-38 (128A8)
270/95-R-44 (143A8)
650 650 650 800 1000 1000 1000
9.5-R-48 (127A8)
230/95-R-48 (125A8)

Max. towable weights - HC Models [4.2.l] 6

Hook type EEC (item: a, b, c, d, e, f, g)
Models 2WD 4WD

Trailers with no brakes 3000 3000

Trailers with mechanical brakes 6000 6000
Trailers with inertia brakes 8000 8000
Trailers with brakes assisted === ===

150/3
Technical specifications

Attachment points for implements C max 80, 90, 100 [4.5.1.2]

Dimensions quoted in mm

150/4
 Technical specifications

Attachment points for implements C max 105, 110 [4.5.1.2]

Dimensions quoted in mm

150/5
Technical specifications

Attachment points for implements C max HC [4.5.1.2]

Dimensions quoted in mm

150/6
 Cab

CAB
All non-metallic components within the cab comply with the ISO 3795 standard.
The cab is approved according to OECD codes concerning ROPS test (protection against overturning) and safety belts.
The cab is also approved for FOPS test (protection against falling objects) according to the required code.

Fig.7-1

WEIGHTS AND DIMENSIONS 75 80 90 100 105-110

Fig. 7-1 Cab Cab Cab Cab Cab

12.4R24 12.4R24 11.2R24 13.6R24 380/70R24

Front tyres 16.9R30 16.9R30 16.9R34 16.9R34 480/70R34
Rear tyres

Total weight without ballast, 2WD....... Kg
Total weight without ballast, 4WD....... Kg
Height above cab............................... mm
Total length with ballast..................... mm
Wheelbase 2WD................................ mm
Wheelbase 4WD................................ mm
2810 3050 3210 3210 3250
3050 3290 3460 3460 3510
2458 2458 2508 2508 2533
4093 4105 4136 4136 4160
2298 2310 2341 2341 2365
2273 2285 2316 2316 2340

Front track widths

SEE TRACK WIDTH TABLES 7
Rear track widths

This section of the manual solely deals with the cab operation and mainte-
nance instructions

151
Cab

Cab

Cab components - Fig.7-2

1 - Openable windscreen
2 - Front field lights
3 - Transparent sun-roof with sun-shade
4 - Rotating beacon
5 - Adjustable rear view mirrors
6 - Rear field lights
7 - Rear door
8 - Left and right-hand side doors

Front and rear field lights

The lights operate when the ignition key has been tur- Fig. 7-2
ned to the contact position.

The field lights are adjustable. You can therefore direct

the light beam in the most suitable direction, depending
on the job in hand.
To turn on the lights, press down the switches (1 and 3,
Fig.7-3a) as indicated.
– (1) Front field light switch.
– (3) Rear field light switch.

Windscreen wiper/washer (2-Fig.7-

3a)
A 3-position switch (2) controls the front and rear win-
dscreen washer: Fig. 7-3a

1 - Front windscreen washer

0 - Off.
2 - Rear windscreen washer

Roof light (3-Fig.7-3b)

Rear window wiper (4-Fig.7-33b)

Internal air recycling (1-Fig.7-3b)

– Closed. Air sucked up from the outside.
– Open: Air sucked up from inside the cab.

Air vents (2-Fig.7-3b)

Fig. 7-3b

CAUTION: Do not open the front, rear or side

windows, nor any doors, during work. The noise
inside the cab would increase to such an extent as
to require the operator to wear ear muffs or other
individual protection gear against noise.

152
 Cab

Front windscreen wiper

(Operates when the ignition key has been turned to the
contact position) (Fig.7-4)

1-Fig.7-4 - Switch of front windscreen wiper and

washer

4 -Fig.7-3b- Switch of rear windscreen wiper and

washer

Operation of both switches:

Pos.0 - Wiper off

Pos.1 - Switch down to the first position: wiper on.
 
Ventilation – Fig. 7-5 [4.1.b] Fig. 7-4 - Windscreen wiper (1)
Handles to open the windscreen (2)
The cab ventilation is operated by means of 6 front air
vents (1). Position the air flow in the required direction
by turning the vents.

The air that flows into the cab can be drawn from either
inside the cab or outside by means of the vents.

Air vents
The 4 front vents (1), when open, let the outside air to
flow in the cab after being filtered.

Internal air recycling in the cab

The rear vent (2) allow the internal air to be recycled.
– Open vent: a great quantity of air is sucked up from
inside the cab by this vent and recycled through the
air vents.
– Closed vent: air is sucked up from the outside into
the cab after passing through the external filters.
Fig. 7-5
Air vents - Defrost (3)

Heating – Fig. 7-6 [4.1.b]

Use knob (1) to adjust the temperature of the hot air,
decreasing or increasing the circulation of fluid from the
engine.

When turned in the anti-clockwise direction (fully to the

left), temperature regulating knob (1) stops hot air from
circulating around the cab. Maximum heating is obtained
in the cab by turning the knob in the clockwise direction
(fully to the right).

Select the speed of the electric fan with knob (2), to adjust
the quantity of air let into the cab. 7
Turn the knob (2) clockwise to increase fan speed.
– = Fan off.
+ = Fan at maximum speed.

Fig. 7-6

153
Cab

AIR CONDITIONING CONTROLS

CAB (on request)
[4.1.b]
How to turn on the conditioner and
adjust the temperature
Conditioner activating button
(3-Fig. 7-7).
Operates when the ignition key has been turned to the
contact position.
Turn the electric fan knob (1) to the required speed,
then turn knob (2) to turn on the conditioner.
Turn the knob further in order to obtain the required air
temperature.

Fan control knob Fig. 7-7

(2-Fig. 7-7)
You can vary the amount of air let into the cab by selec-
ting one of the speeds provided by the electric fan.
Turn the knob clockwise to increase fan speed.
–= Fan off.
+= Fan at maximum speed.
Heater control knob
Turn the knob (1) fully in anti-clockwise direction, to
shut off the flow of water to the heater and turn the
function off when using the air conditioner.
WARNING: If the tractor is to remain unused for a
long period of time, or if the system is not used,
remember to allow the air conditioner to operate
for about 15 minutes each week. This precautionary
measure prevents gas from leaking from the com-
pressor
Use of the air conditioning system
Use of the air conditioning system allows you to obtain
cool and dehumidified air.
It is operated in the following way:

Air vents Starting

The flow of air let into the cab can be set in the required
direction by turning the front air vents (Fig.7-5).
Open the rear air vent (2 - Fig.7-5) to recycle the climati-
zed air inside the cab.
CAUTIONS:
The air conditioner will not operate when the engi-
ne is at a standstill as the compressor is operated by
the engine itself.
Make sure that the air conditioner control is in the
off position before starting the engine.
Always turn on the electric fan before operating the
air conditioner.
The conditioner cannot operate when the electric
fan is off.
Start the engine and turn on the electric fan, then press
the button (1 - Fig.7-7) to operate the conditioner.
Adjustment
To adjust the air conditioning in the cab, always open
the rear air vents when the conditioner operates and
keep the doors and rear window closed.
After a lengthy period exposed to the sun, bring the
temperature inside the cab to the correct level by
turning on the conditioner whilst the tractor is on the
move and by opening the rear window for about one
minute in order to allow the hot air to escape.
Stopping
Before you stop the engine, always turn off the condi-
tioner by depressing the button (1) to the off position
and turning the electric fan knob (2) off.

NOTE: See the cab maintenance section for filter use

and maintenance.

154
 Cab

AIR CONDITIONED CAB

The cab can be fitted with an air conditioning system on
request.
Besides being able to provide an optimum temperature in
the cab, this system also lowers the degree of humidity
in the air.

SAFETY NOTES
The air conditioner is a safe system that is able to ensu-
re lasting and risk-free use.However, it is important to
comply with certain simple precautions (listed below) in
order to prevent possible accidents.

• Never work on the conditioning system yourselves.

Always contact the specialized technicians of the
Assistance Service (Fig.7-8).

• Keep naked flames well away from the air conditioning Fig. 7-8
system (Fig.7-9) as leaking coolant could give rise to
a deadly gas: phosgene.

• The mixture of oil and coolant in the air conditioning

system is under pressure. Never ever loosen any
unions or tamper with the pipes. For the same reason,
you must never unscrew the compressor’s oil level
check plug.

• Coolant can freeze the skin and particularly the eyes.

Proceed in the following way if accidents occur:
– if coolant has splashed into the eyes, wash them out
immediately with a few drops of mineral oil, then
continue to wash them with a solution of boric acid
and water (one teaspoon of acid in 1/4 of a cup of
water) and immediately seek medical help;
– areas frozen by coolant fluid can be treated by
progressively warming the injured zone with cold
water and then applying a greasy cream. However,
always seek medical help if such accidents occur.

• Keep the air conditioning system well away from heat Fig. 7-9
sources as explosions could occur (Fig.7-10).

Fig. 7-10

155
Cab
PERIODICAL INSPECTIONS
At least once every three months:
– remove any foreign bodies from between the
evaporator and condenser fins;
– check the tension of the compressor belt;
– allow the engine to run at a rate of 1500 rpm. In
the meantime keep the dehydrator filter under
observation: the glass should be clear, without air
bubbles or white liquid.
– check the conditions of the pipes, unions and
supporting brackets;
– make sure that the drain pipes are efficient and remove
the condensation from the evaporator;
– make sure that the screws and fixing nuts of the
pulleys and compressor are well tightened.
MAINTENANCE
If the conditioning system remains unused for a long
period of time, it must be turned on for a few minutes
each month to allow the oil to circulate around the circuit
and to keep the seals in an efficient condition.
Only operate the conditioner when the engine is hot and
the temperature in the cab has reached 20°C.
YEARLY MAINTENANCE
Have your Dealer’s specialized personnel carry out the
following operations at the beginning of the season:
– check the level of the oil in the compressor and top it
up if necessary;
– make sure that the system is tight by means of a leak
tester and top up the HFC 134a gas if necessary, or
– replace the dehydrator filter only if strictly necessary;
– carry out a functional test on the system.
156
GENERAL CAB MAINTENANCE (ALL
VERSIONS)
After servicing the external parts of the cab, proceed
with the following inspections:
1. Periodically check to make sure that no water has
collected in the zones covered with mats or upholstery.
2. Protect the hinges and locks of the doors, sun roof
and openable windows with water-repellent lubricating
products.
3. Use special cleaning products to clean the windows,
or sulphuric ether, if necessary.
4. Detach the windscreen wiper and sprinkle talcum on
the rubber wiper.
5. Leave the doors or sun-roof partially open.
CAB UPHOLSTERY
CAUTION: Use water and a neutral detergent to cle-
an the polyurethane cab upholstery or the specific
products available on the market for cleaning car
interiors. Any commercial product for car upholste-
ry cleaning may be used.
Do NOT use any products deriving from hydro-
carbons, ketonic or aromatic solvents, or cleaning
spirits of any kind.
SPECIFICATIONS
Coolant fluid R134 A
Air conditioning system reloading
- Quantity of gas to be loaded: 1800 g (+/- 50 g)
- Keep the gas unit steady when filling the circuit,
in order to allow for a precise reading of the gas
weight.
- Operating pressure (20 bar).
IMPORTANT: This tractor uses a R134A coolant that
does not damage the ozone layer. Do not introduce any
coolant different from the prescribed one into the air
conditioning system. This could jeopardize the cooling
power and irremediably damage the system.
Check the tension of the compressor belt as indicated
in the Routine Maintenance chapter.
DANGER: Wear safety garments and gog-
gles in case of leaks. Coolant can injury the
eyes. The coolant produces a toxic gas if it
contacts a flame.
 Cab

Cab air filter Fig.7-11

WARNING: Remember that the cab filter is

not suitable for chemicals in general.
Absolute protection against these products
can therefore only be achieved by taking
the precautionary measures required by
the degree of harmfulness of the actual
products used.
It is essential to strictly conform to this lat-
ter precaution for all types of filter whose
use requires compliance with the envisaged
operation and maintenance instructions.
However, even use of filters to protect Fig.7-11
against chemicals in general does not ex-
empt operators from taking all the personal
precautions recommended for use of such
products.
These specific filters must only be mounted
when the actual chemicals are being used
and must then be replaced with the normal
paper filters supplied with the machine at
the end of each treatment.
Do not use them during the other process-
es since the dust would quickly clog them.
Carefully comply with the operating in-
structions on the filter packages or labels.
Contact your Dealer if specific filters
against chemicals must be used.

CAUTION:Take the filter off before washing the cab.

If the cab is washed and the special filter has not been
demounted, take care to prevent the jet of water from
splashing on to the protective grille (Fig.7-12) otherwise
your cab’s special filter will be irreparably damaged. Fig.7-12

CAUTION: If active carbon filters are used, mount only

original filters supplied in a sealed package: follow the
instructions for use on the container and attached to
any filter package. Carefully comply with the operating
Protection level [4.5.c]
instructions on the filter packages or labels. Replace the
filters at the intervals specified by the filter manufacturer.
Contact your Dealer if specific filters against chemicals
must be used.
Always wear individual protections suitable to the harm-
fulness of the actual product used.

CAUTION: The Manufacturer has no responsibility

whatever, either direct or indirect, for application of spe-
cial filters and/or changes to the air intake system of the
cab. Every change to the cab intake system can result
in a health hazard for the operator and significantly alter
the performance of the air conditioning system. In any
case, the cab is not guaranteed as perfectly dust-tight.
Always wear individual protections when working in
particularly dusty environment.
WARNING: Tractors with cab have no pro-
tection against harmful substances, but is
protected from dust (protection level 2).
If the tractor is used to spray phytosanitary
7
products or chemicals generally thought
of as hazardous to health, the operator
must wear individual protections (mask)
suitable to the harmfulness of the actual
product used.

157
Cab

CAB - MAINTENANCE ON REQUEST

Operation 1

Cab air filters Fig.7-13

2 filters mounted on the sides of the cab roof
1 - Fig.7-13 - Unscrew and remove the fixing knobs (2)
of the cover (1).
2 - Remove the cover.
3 - Unscrew the two knobs fixing the filter.
4 - Remove the filter (1) and clean as follows:

– delicately tap it on a flat surface with the external

side pointing downwards;
or:
– use a jet of compressed air at a pressure of less
than 6.9 bar (7 kg/cm2);
Fig.7-13
Clean the filter housing with a cloth.
When the filter is remounted, the cartridge (1) must be
oriented as indicated on the cartridge itself.

Operation 2

Compressor belt Fig.7-14

Check periodically the tension of the compressor belt (1).

If the belt (1) is slack, loosen the fixing screw and move
the idler until the correct tension is obtained.

NOTE: The belt must be replaced if it is cracked or

needs adjusting too frequently.

CAUTION: Always check the fan and alternator belt

Fig.7-14
first, and the air conditioning compressor belt after-
ward.

158
 Cab

Operation 3

Cleaning the engine radiator and

the air conditioning condenser Fig.
7-15; 7-16

Lift the bonnet to access the air conditioning condenser

(4), the engine coolant radiator (2) and the transmission
oil radiator.

1 - Loosen the two knobs (4) fixing the air conditioner

condenser (1).
2 - Grasp both ends of the condenser and lift it
carefully (Fig.7-16) in order not to damage the
cooling fins. Fig.7-15
3 - Clean the engine radiator surface (2) by means of
an air jet from the inside to the outside.
4 - Clean also the condenser surface (1) in the same
way. Take care to direct the air jet from the inside
to the outside.

Check that the surfaces you clean are not warped. In this
case the damage must be repaired.

Proceed in inverse order to remount (operations 4 to 1)

and put the condenser on its support again. Take care not
to damage the cooling fins.

Fig. 7-16

Operation 4

Window washer liquid reservoir

Check the window washer liquid level at regular intervals.

Fill it up if required.

159
Cab

CAB
AFTER EVERY 1000 HOURS
SERVICE OR ONCE A YEAR

Operation 5

Cab air filters Fig.7-17

Remove the cover (Operation 1) and replace the filter
cartridge inside (1).

NOTE: The filters must be replaced every time the

air conditioning system is serviced. In such occasions,
check the oil level in the compressor.
Fig.7-17
IMPORTANT: Respiratory protection equipment and
protective clothing appropriate to the environment that
the filter has been in contact with MUST be used during
the cleaning of the filters.

IMPORTANT: The old element MUST be put into a

sealed container and disposed of in accordance with
local regulations. Be responsible for the environment.

NOTE: Replace the element(s) with genuine parts.

Operation 6

Compressor Fig.7-18

Have the air conditioning system operation checked. Also

check the lubricating oil level in the compressor (1).

Fig.7-18

160
 Cab

Field lights 2 - Rotate the lamp in a clockwise direction and remove

Front field light - Fig.7-19 it,
3 - Fit a new lamp (1). Remember not to touch the lamp
Rear field lights - Fig.7-20 surface with your fingers.
1 - Turn the field light (1) to access the lamp to be replaced.
4 - Adjust the field light position as required.

Fig.7-19 Fig.7-20

Cab line fuse Fuses in the cab (7-21)

The fuse box in the box is installed on the rear post on
the left-hand side.

Fuse Function - Fig. 7-21

Amp.
1 AC solenoid valve 30
2 AC pressure switch and compressor,
radio 7.5
3 Rear window wiper, roof light 5
4 Windscreen wiper/washer 15
5 Front field lights 10
6 Rear field lights 10

Fig.7-20b - FU4 Cab line fuse, 60 Amp.

Fig.7-21

161
Cab

Cab relays Fig.7-21b

The relays are installed in the left-hand post of the cab
under the covering.

Relay Function

K15C Cab heating fan

K16C Air conditioning compressor
K17C Cab heating fan power
K18C Rear field lights on roof
K19C Front field lights on roof
K20C Window wiper and washer

Fig.7-21b

Adjustable steering wheel

(if equipped) Fig. 7-22
The steering column can be tilted and regulated by the
operator to suit requirements.

- Push the lock lever upward and keep it pushed.

- Move the steering wheel up or down to the required

position.

- Release the lever to lock the steering wheel in posi-

tion.

Fig.7-22

Second passenger seat (optional) -

Fig. 7-23

Fold the seat down when not used.

Fig.7-23

162
 Powershuttle

Section 8
Powershuttle & hydraulic PTO
(if equipped)

163
Powershuttle

Fig.8-1a

Cab
Instruments and controls
Version with Powershuttle and creeper - Fig. 8-1a and
Fig. 8-2a

1. Electro-hydraulic Powershuttle control lever

2. Control and instrument panel
3. Differential lock engagement button
4. Speed control lever
5. Declutch button
6. Powerfour-Overdrive button
7. Range selector lever
8. Joystick lever (optional)
9. Hydraulic PTO clutch engagement/disengagement
switch
10. Front drive engagement button
11.Auxiliary 12V power socket
12. Pick-Up Hitch control lever (optional)
13. Auxiliary control valve levers
14. Hydraulical power lift control levers
15. Auxiliary control valves adjustment knobs
16. Power lift lowering speed adjustment.
17. Lever to lock steering wheel tilt adjustment
18. Main clutch disengagement pedal
19. PTO speed selector lever Fig.8-2a
20. PTO control lever
21. Park-Lock engagement lever (optional)
22. Parking brake lever

164
 Powershuttle

Fig.8-1b

Platform
Instruments and controls
Version with Powershuttle and creeper - Fig. 8-1b and
Fig. 8-2b

1. Electro-hydraulic Powershuttle control lever

2. Control and instrument panel
3. Differential lock engagement button
4. Speed control lever
5. Declutch button
6. Powerfour-Overdrive button
7. Range selector lever
8. Joystick lever (optional)
9. Hydraulic PTO clutch engagement/disengagement
switch
10. Front drive engagement button
11.Auxiliary 12V power socket
12. Main clutch disengagement pedal
13. PTO speed selector lever Fig.8-2b 8
14. PTO control lever
15. Park-Lock engagement lever
16. Parking brake lever
17. Outer control lever of the power lift (optional)
18. Pick-Up Hitch control lever (optional)
19. Auxiliary control valve levers
20. Hydraulical power lift control levers
21. Auxiliary control valves adjustment knobs
22. Power lift lowering speed adjustment.
23. Lever to lock steering wheel tilt adjustment

165
Powershuttle

Fig. 8-3 Instrument panel - Powershuttle

Instrument panel - Powershuttle

Warning lights (Fig.8-3) 6 - Red warning light (steady) for low pressure in
hydraulic transmission system. If it comes on during
1 - Battery charging warning light. Should go out as work, consult your authorized Dealer’s
soon as the engine starts. for help.

2 - Engine oil pressure warning light. Should go out as
soon as the engine starts. It is quite normal for this
light to come on if a hot engine is left to idle.
3 - Red warning light. It comes on when the parking
brake is engaged.
4 - Warning light for low pressure in hydraulic circuit
of trailer brake (if mounted and depending on the
market).
5 - Dry air filter blockage warning light. It comes on
when the cartridge needs cleaning or replacing.
7 - Red warning light (steady) for Powershuttle filter
blockage (if applicable).
8 - Orange warning light. Check the oil level in the bra-
ke fluid reservoir. Top up with designated fluid.
9 - Red warning light (steady) for transmission and
hydraulic system oil filter blockage.
10- Red warning light for too hot engine coolant. (See
engine coolant temperature indicator)
11-Red warning light of immediate engine “STOP”. It
comes on together with engine oil pressure war-
ning light (2), tractor (7) and trailer (4) brake circuit
oil pressure warning lights, hydraulic system low
pressure warning light (6).

Warning buzzer

The buzzer comes on whenever the red warning light

for low pressure in hydraulic transmission system
should come on. In this case, ask your Dealer’s speciali-
zed workshop for help.

166

Fig. 8-4 Instrument panel - Powershuttle
Instrument panel - Powershuttle
Operation indicator lights (Fig.8-4)
1 - 4WD engagement indicator – orange (if mounted).
2 - 4WD engagement indicator – orange (if mounted).
3 - Diff lock indicator - orange.
4 - Main beam indicator – blue.
5 - Direction indicator light for 2nd trailer – green.
6 - Side light indicator – green.
7 - Direction indicator light for 1st trailer – green.
8 - Glow plugs pre-heating indicator (if mounted) -
orange.
9 - Rear independent PTO engaged indicator – oran-
ge.
Powershuttle
10 - Overspeed power take-off (only NAO markets).
NOTE: A flashing indicator light signals a problem with
the controller. In this case, ask your Dealer’s specialized
workshop for help.
11- Indicator of 540ECO RPM PTO engaged – orange.
12 - Synchronized PTO engaged indicator – orange.
13- PTO speed selector lever engaged indicator - oran-
ge.
14 - Front PTO engaged indicator (if mounted) - orange.
15 - Left turn indicator light.
16 - Right turn indicator light.
17-18 Buttons for adjustments.
8
167
Powershuttle

Power take-off speed indicator - Digital panel

[4.2.d]

Fig. 8-7

The indicator (1) displays the operating rate of the PTO

with great accuracy. The operating rate of implements for
which the rotation speed must be precisely selected can
therefore be kept under constant control.
Speed indicator of the PTO engaged (2):
540 RPM; 540 ECO RPM; 1000 RPM
Fig.8-5
Speedometer - Digital panel
RPM meter

The engine rate is displayed by a pointer on the outer

graduated scale. The pointer should never reach the
2450 RPM zone which shows excessive engine speed

Fig. 8-8
Clock and hour counter
The speedometer displays the ground speed of the
tractor without considering wheel slip.The speed can be
expressed in kph or mph, depending on the country in
Fig. 8-6 which the tractor is to be used.

NOTE: if the originally fitted tyres must be changed for

special jobs, the speedometer can be re-programmed
Clock (1) to suit the size of the new ones.
See “Instrument adjustments” to set hour and minutes.

Hour meter (2)

The hour meter (2) in the lower part of the instrument
shows the time actually worked, independent of the
engine speed rate.

• Hours are shown by 5 white digits.

• 1/10ths of an hour are shown by a yellow digit.
LCD - Powershuttle only
3 - Powerfour range indicator
1= Reduced range - Direct range
2= Overdrive

4 - Drive direction indicator

- Forward gear indicator
- Reverse gear indicator

5 - Powershuttle indicator
N = Powershuttle in neutral
F = Forward - Forward gears
R = Reverse - Reverse gears
P = Parklock engaged

168

Engine coolant temperature gauge
Fig. 8-9
• Blue area = ambient temperature. Wait for the
pointer to reach the green area, indicating the
normal operating temperature.
• Green area = normal operating temperature.
• Red area = temperature too high.
The overheating warning light (1) comes on at 105-110°C
(221-230°C). Possible causes of overheating:
a. Low engine coolant level.
b. Radiator caked with mud, dust, straw, etc.
c. Build-up of deposits in coolant circuit.
d. Loose fan belt.
e. Faulty thermostat.
CAUTION: If the engine temperature is too high, let
the engine idle immediately but do not switch it off.
If the temperature gauge stays in the red, identify
the cause immediately and seek expert advice if
necessary.
Fuel level gauge instrument
Fig.8-10
When the pointer moves into the yellow zone and the red
reserve warning light (1) comes on, there are still about
10 liters of fuel in the tank.
Powershuttle
Instrument controls
Fig.8-11a
LCD1, LCD2, LCD3 refer to the 3 digital displays, while
P1 and P2 refer to the left and right selection buttons,
respectively (Fig.8-11).
When the instrument is off (ignition key OFF), LCDs 2 and
3 do not display any character, while LCD 1 displays the
time and total hours of work.
By turning the ignition key from OFF to ON, the instrument
will conduct an initial check, it turns on all the lights and
the characters of LCDs 1, 2 and 3. After a few seconds,
it will be set to a default status, in which LCD 1 displays
the time, time worked and the powershift range direc-
tion of travel. LCD 2 displays the speed (in Km/h or MPH
depending on the country) and LCD 3 shows the PTO
type and speed.
By turning the key ON-OFF-ON, this always takes the tool
to the default condition illustrated above.
We will divide the actions set by keys P1 and P2 into
Normal Mode and Setup Mode.
Normal Mode
LCD2 involved only
Each time the P1 button is pressed (not for an extended
period of time), the LCD2 screen displays the Speed
(Km/h), the processed area (ha) and distance (Km).
Processed area
By briefly pressing the P2 key in the processed area
position, the count of the processed area is activated
(the symbol shown in Fig.8-11b starts to flash). By briefly
pressing the P2 key again, the count stops (the relative
8
symbol stops flashing and stays on).
Fig.8-11b
169
Powershuttle

Distance covered
By briefly pressing the P2 key in the distance covered
position, the count of the distance covered is activated
(the symbol shown in Fig.8-12 flashes). By briefly pressing
the P2 key again, the count stops (the relative symbol
stops flashing and stays on).

Continued pressure (more than 5 sec) of the P2 button Fig.8-12

allows to reset such measures.

By turning the ignition key ON-OFF-ON, this takes the

instrument to the default condition whilst keeping the
counts made.

Setup Mode
Access to the setup menu Fig.8-13.
To access the menu, follow the procedure below:
- Ignition key OFF (instruments cluster OFF).
- Press and hold the P1 button on the instruments cluster,
turn ignition key left to ON (cluster start-up)
NOTE: - Press and hold the P1 button P1 for at least 6
seconds after turning the ignition key to the ON position.
- The central display will indicate the software of the lin-
struments cluster for two seconds and will then display
the setup menu.
Fig.8-13
The central display show two lines:
- The top line indicates the number of the menu.
- The bottom line indicates the setup value for the menu
displayed.
Example Fig. 8-13b: The menu reported at the top in-
dicates number 2 (AC2). AC2 (corrisponds to the index
radious of the tyre), which is set to 800.
There are 8 menus listed as ACXX (eg.: AC01 is the first
one) (see Setup Menu Table). To switch from one menu to
the other, press the P2 button on the instruments cluster.
To change the value of a selected menu, press the P1 but-
ton for more than 2 seconds. The second line that shows Fig.8-13b
the value will start to flash.

Changing the setup values

After selecting the desired menu: - By pressing and holding the P1 button for 4-5 seconds,
- Press the P1 button to choose the number to edit (the the selected value will be selected and the lowest line
number is flashing). will stop flashing.
- Press the P2 button to change the number. - To exit the setup menu, turn off (ignition key set to OFF).

Setup Menu Table

NOTE: When the message "NOT in the Operator menu" is featured, DO NOT enter this menu.
Menu Description Operator Menu

AC1 Tool width Operator Menu

AC2 Rear tyre Operator Menu
AC3 Type of tractor NOT for the Operator menu
AC4 PdF type and PdF indication of the speed NOT for the Operator menu
AC5 Destination market NOT for the Operator menu
AC6 Operator presence switch NOT for the Operator menu
AC7 Speed reading method NOT for the Operator menu
AC8 Clock setup Operator Menu

170
 Powershuttle

Setup mode size of the tool, type of tyre and clock.

NOTE: if you wait more than 10 seconds without con-

ducting any operation, the panel automatically exits the
setup procedure. To resume the procedure, it is neces-
sary to start from the beginning.

P2 right button to change the menu

Fig.8-14
AC1 - Size of the tool - Fig.8-14
- Press the P1 left button to go to the next line: the digit
starts to flash.
- P2 right button to increase the number of centimeters.
- Press the P1 left button to go to the number of decime-
tres: use the P2 right button to change the value.
- Press the P1 left button to go to the the digit of the me-
tres: use the P2 right button to change the value.
- To save the width of the tool, press and hold the P1 left
button for 5 seconds.
Fig.8-15
AC2 - Size of rear tyres - Fig.8-15
To the figure corresponding to installed rear Table Fig.8-15b
tyres see table Fig.8-15b.
- Press the P1 left button to go to the next line: the digit Rear tyres R Index N.
starts to flash.
- P2 right button to to change the number from 0 to 5.
- Press the P1 left button to go to the next number: use 12.4 R 36 700 15
the P2 right button to change the value. 13.6 R 36 725 21
- Press the P1 left button to go to the next number: use 13.6 R 38 750 22
the P2 right button to change the value. 14.9 R 28 650 9
- To save the size of the rear tyres, press and hold the P1 14.9 R 30 675 13
left button for 5 seconds. 16.9 R 28 675 13
16.9 R 30 700 15
16.9 R 34 750 22
AC8 - Clock - Fig.8-16 18.4 R 30 725 21
- Press the P1 left button to go to the next line: the 480/65 R 28 650 9
minutes start to flash. 480/70 R 30 700 15
- P2 right button to increase the numer of minutes from 480/70 R 34 750 22
0 to 60. 540/65 R 34 750 22
- Press the P1 left button to go to the number of hours: P2
right button to change the value from 01 to 24h.
- To save the time press and width of the tool, press and
hold the P1 left button for 5 seconds.

8
Fig.8-16

171
Operation

Gearbox with electro-hydraulic re-

verse shuttle Power Shuttle
The gearbox with electro-hydraulic reverse shuttle is
available in two versions:

Powershuttle 40 kph

- 4 synchro gear gearbox for 3 ranges (Low - Normal -

High) and electro-hydraulic Powerfour for two HI-LO
ranges and electro-hydraulic reverse shuttle 24 FWD
+ 12 REV.

- 4 synchro gear gearbox for 4 ranges (Creep - Low

- Normal - High) and electro-hydraulic Powerfour
for two HI-LO ranges and electro-hydraulic reverse
shuttle 32 FWD + 16 REV. Fig.8-17
1 - Powershuttle and Declutch disengagement lever.
Functions of the electro-hydraulic reverse shuttles 2 - Gearshift lever.
Power Shuttle and Power Four (optional). 3 - Declutch disengagement button (orange).
4 - Power Four button (option).
Reverse shuttle under load: Allows the driving direc- 5 - Range selector lever: Creep(option), Low, Normal,
tion to be reversed by simply moving the small lever High range.
on the left hand near the steering wheel. The elec-
tronic control unit guarantees smooth and gradual
reversing. For safety reasons, the direction can only
be reversed at speeds of less than 10 Kph.

The Declutch system disengages the main hydraulic

clutch by means of the button on the actual gearshift
lever. With this button the driver can change mecha-
nical gears without using the clutch pedal.

The clutch pedal is only used for very small move-

ments of the tractor, e.g. to hitch or unhitch an imple- Gear lever
ment, and for greater safety, when sudden stops are The lever has four different positions. All four gears are
made or obstacles are encountered. fully synchronized (1 - Fig. 8-18).

Power Four. The standard mechanical gearbox can be

used both in Direct drive and in Overdrive.
Fig.8-18
The operator can shift from a range to another Four lever positions equivalent
without using the clutch pedal, under load and while to four fully synchronized ground
the tractor is moving, simply depressing the button speeds.
on the gearshift lever: depress + to increase speed, -
to slow down.

172
 Operation

Speed range selector lever Power Shuttle control lever

The speed range selector lever has four possible
positions corresponding to the creeper (option), low,
standard and high speed ranges.
Each speed range is identified by a symbol on the knob
of the lever (Fig.8-19).

Fig.8-19
Four lever positions
equivalent to four
speed ranges.

Fig.8-20. Shuttle control lever

Creeper range (option) A - Lever forward: Forward gears.

N - Neutral: Always move the lever to this position to
start the engine.
Low range R - Lever backward: Reverse gears.

Drive direction indicator lights with

Standard range Power Shuttle and Power Four-
Overdrive
High range
Two arrow-shaped lights on the instrument panel show
the drive direction (Fig. 8-21).
To change from one speed range to another, disenga-
ge the gearshift clutch pedal, and bring the tractor to 1 - Forward gears (green)
a complete standstill before moving the speed range 2 - Reverse gears (orange)
selector to its new position. 3 -Power Four indicator
1= Reduced range - Direct drive
2= Overdrive
4 - Power Shuttle range indicator
F= Forward gears
N= Power Shuttle in neutral
R= Reverse gears
P= Park lock engaged 8

Fig. 8-21

173
Operation
MOD. 80-90-100-4WD - Gearbox with electro-hydraulic reverse Powershuttle and Powerfour-Overdrive: 24 FWD
+12 REV (without creeper) - Speeds in Kph
MOD. 80-90-100-4WD - Gearbox with electro-hydraulic reverse Powershuttle and Powerfour-Overdrive: 32 FWD
+16 REV (with creeper) - Speeds in Kph

Direct 13.6 R36; 18.4 R30 13.6 R38;480/70 R34; 16.9 R34; 540/65 R34; 420/85 R34
Creeper*
1st 0,35 0,36
2nd 0,55 0,57
3rd 0,70 0,72
4th 1,03 1,07
Slow
1st 1,68 1,74
2nd 2,64 2,73
3rd 3,33 3,45
4th 4,92 5,09
Medium
1st 4,01 4,15
2nd 6,31 6,52
3rd 7,96 8,24
4th 11,75 12,15
Fast
1st 9,89 10,24
2nd 15,55 16,09
3rd 19,64 20,32
4th 28,98 29,98

Overdrive 13.6 R36; 18.4 R30 13.6 R38; 480/70 R34; 16.9 R34; 540/65 R34; 420/85 R34
Creeper*
1st 0,45 0,47
2nd 0,71 0,74
3rd 0,90 0,93
4th 1,33 1,37
Slow
1st 2,16 2,24
2nd 3,40 3,52
3rd 4,29 4,44
4th 6,34 6,55
Medium
1st 5,17 5,35
2nd 8,12 8,40
3rd 10,26 10,61
4th 15,14 15,66
Fast
1st 12,75 13,19
2nd 20,04 20,73
3rd 25,30 26,18
4th 37,33 38,62

Reverse 13.6 R36; 18.4 R30 13.6 R38; 480/70 R34; 16.9 R34; 540/65 R34; 420/85 R34
Creeper*
1st 0,36 0,37
2nd 0,56 0,58
3rd 0,71 0,73
4th 1,04 1,08
Slow
1st 1,70 1,75
2nd 2,67 2,76
3rd 3,37 3,48
4th 4,97 5,14
Medium
1st 4,05 4,19
2nd 6,37 6,59
3rd 8,04 8,32
4th 11,87 12,28
Fast
1st 9,99 10,34
2nd 15,71 16,25
3rd 19,84 20,52
4th 29,27 30,28
* Creeper option

174
 Operation
MOD. 105-110-4WD - Gearbox with electro-hydraulic reverse Powershuttle and Powerfour-Overdrive: 24 FWD +12
REV (without creeper) - Speeds in Kph
MOD. 105-110-4WD - Gearbox with electro-hydraulic reverse Powershuttle and Powerfour-Overdrive: 32 FWD +16
REV (with creeper) - Speeds in Kph

Direct 18.4 R30 13.6 R38; 480/70 R34; 540/65 R34 18.4 R34; 520/70 R34; 14.9 R38
Creeper*
1st 0,34 0,35 0,36
2nd 0,53 0,55 0,57
3rd 0,68 0,70 0,72
4th 1,00 1,03 1,06
Slow
1st 1,62 1,68 1,73
2nd 2,55 2,64 2,73
3rd 3,22 3,33 3,44
4th 4,75 4,92 5,08
Medium
1st 3,88 4,01 4,14
2nd 6,09 6,30 6,51
3rd 7,70 7,96 8,23
4th 11,36 11,75 12,14
Fast
1st 9,56 9,89 10,22
2nd 15,03 15,55 16,07
3rd 18,98 19,64 20,29
4th 28,01 28,98 29,94

Overdrive 18.4 R30 13.6 R38; 480/70 R34; 540/65 R34 18.4 R34; 520/70 R34; 14.9 R38
Creeper*
1st 0,44 0,45 0,47
2nd 0,69 0,71 0,74
3rd 0,87 0,90 0,93
4th 1,28 1,33 1,37
Slow
1st 2,09 2,16 2,24
2nd 3,29 3,40 3,51
3rd 4,15 4,29 4,44
4th 6,12 6,34 6,55
Medium
1st 4,99 5,17 5,34
2nd 7,85 8,12 8,39
3rd 9,92 10,26 10,60
4th 14,63 15,13 15,64
Fast
1st 12,32 12,75 13,17
2nd 19,37 20,03 20,70
3rd 24,46 25,30 26,14
4th 36,09 37,33 38,58

Reverse 18.4 R30 13.6 R38; 480/70 R34; 540/65 R34 18.4 R34; 520/70 R34; 14.9 R38
Creeper*
1st
2nd
0,34
0,54
0,36
0,56


0,37
0,58




8
3rd 0,68 0,71 0,73
4th 1,01 1,04 1,08
Slow
1st 1,64 1,70 1,75
2nd 2,58 2,67 2,75
3rd 3,25 3,37 3,48
4th 4,80 4,97 5,13
Medium
1st 3,92 4,05 4,19
2nd 6,16 6,37 6,58
3rd 7,77 8,04 8,31
4th 11,47 11,87 12,26
Fast
1st 9,66 9,99 10,33
2nd 15,19 15,71 16,23
3rd 19,18 19,84 20,50
4th 28,30 29,27 30,25
* Creeper option

175
Operation

Use of the Power Shuttle

Starting the engine

Gearbox in neutral:
1 - Orange reverse shuttle lever at the left of the stee-
ring wheel (N - Fig.8-22).
2 - PTO switch on the right-hand console (1 - Fig.8-22b)
3 - Turn the ignition key (2- Fig.8-22)clockwise to the
contact position 1, then to the ignition position 3.

Forward starting

WARNING: To start the tractor when the weather is

particularly cold, it is advisable to heat the tran-
smission oil by running the engine until it reaches a
temperature of 20°C. This ensures that Power Shut-
tle is able to operate correctly. During the first few
minutes of work with the tractor, only change gear Fig.8-22
with Power Shuttle when strictly necessary until the
normal operating temperature has been reached.

After engine ignition, select the range (Low, Standard

or High) with the relative lever according to the job on
hand.
Engage the required gear.
Move forward the orange shuttle control lever at the
left of the steering wheel.
Thus the tractor moves automatically forward without
using the clutch pedal.

Reverse starting
Proceed as described above, only moving the shuttle
lever back.
The tractor automatically starts in reverse.

Cab Platform

Fig.8-22b

176
 Operation

Starting with the clutch pedal (Fig. 8-23)

The clutch pedal should only be used for precision

approaches and manoeuvres.
1. Depress the clutch pedal (2) completely.
2. Move the reverse shuttle lever (1) forward or back-
wards.
3. Gradually release the pedal to control the tractor
movement as necessary.
Starting is usually in direct drive mode. Press the
relative buttons on the control lever handle to start the
tractor in Overdrive mode.

Clutch pedal (Fig. 8-23)

The clutch pedal (2) is only used for:

- Safety manoeuvres, sudden obstacles, etc. Fig.8-23
- Precision approaches, such as implement hitching.
- When the clutch pedal (or the Declutch button) is de-
pressed to select the gear, the gearbox remains in the
previously engaged range.

Declutch button (Fig. 8-24)

The Declutch system allows the gear to be changed

by pressing the relative orange button on the gearshift
lever handle.

Changing gear with the Declutch system.

The Declutch button (Fig. 8-24) practically acts as the
clutch pedal.

Press the button to disengage the hydraulic clutch, and

keep it depressed while engaging the required gear.
Release the button.

Gear change with the clutch pedal Fig.8-24

(Fig. 8-25)
8
When the clutch pedal (1) is depressed to change gear,
Deltashift remains in the range previously engaged.

Changing the range (creeper, low, standard, high)

with the clutch pedal

Depress the clutch pedal (1- Fig.8-25)and wait for the

tractor to stop before selecting a range (creeper - low -
standard - high).

Fig.8-25

177
Operation

Powerfour-Overdrive 40kph
The Powerfour-Overdrive 40kph (on request) is an
electric-hydraulic device.
The Powerfour engages while the tractor is in motion
without depressing the clutch pedal, simply depres-
sing the button (1-Fig. 8-26) on the knob of the speed
selector lever.

Direct range: The speed is reduced.

High range: The overdrive increases the speed for any

engaged gear.

Choosing Overdrive/Direct drive under load

The Power Four system provides the direct drive and

overdrive ranges (For instance, if the 4th gear is en-
gaged, the following speeds are available: 4th gear in Fig. 8-26
Direct drive; 4th gear in Overdrive -20%.

To select Overdrive/direct range, press the bottom gre-

en button on the gearshift lever: changes from direct
drive to Overdrive and from Overdrive to direct drive are
automatic and under load (Fig. 8-26).

The selected range is indicated by the relative indicators

(Fig. 8-27).

Reactions to control settings

The monitoring system automatically analyzes the

conditions in which the tractor is used and chooses
reaction times most suitable to any condition.

Indicators on the instrument

Fig. 8-27
1 - Forward gears - green
2 - Reverse gears - green
3 - PowerFour range engaged
1= Reduced range - Direct drive range
2= Overdrive
4 - N= Power Shuttle in neutral
F = Power Shuttle in Forward
R= Reverse
P= Park lock engaged

Fig. 8-27

178
 Operation

Use of reverse shuttle under load

The tractor’s driving direction is automatically reversed

by pushing the orange lever at the left of the steering
wheel forwards or backwards (1-Fig. 8-28).

The reverse shuttle is automatically controlled through

the following phases:
· DECELERATION
· STOP
· CHANGE OF DIRECTION
· ACCELERATION
The speed at which these phases take place by softwa-
re.

WARNING: Reversing can be obtained at any

speed. However, to protect mechanical parts
from damage and for operator’s safety, this Fig.8-28
operation should be made ONLY at speeds
UNDER 10 Kph.
A buzzer sounds to warn from reversing at
speeds over 10 Kph. To correctly engage the
reverse shuttle, reduce your speed to under
10 Kph.

Use of reverse shuttle with clutch pedal

The clutch pedal is used to obtain small and precise

movements for certain work requirements.

· Completely depress the clutch pedal (2 - Fig. 8-28).

· Shift the orange shuttle control lever.
· Wait for the reverse indicator LED to come on.
· Use your foot on the pedal to engage the clutch gra-
dually and let the tractor move forward or backward
as required.

179
Operation

Stopping the tractor

Fig. 8-29
Always stop the tractor safely: Engage the parking
brake (1), engage the Park-Lock (3), disengage the PTO,
bring all the gearshift levers to neutral position, lower
any implement to the ground, stop the engine and re-
move the ignition key BEFORE leaving the driver’s seat.

Park-Lock
Fig. 8-29
The Power Shuttle transmission is mechanically blocked
by the lever engaging the Park-Lock device (3). Therefore
the Park-Lock should be engaged every time you want
to stop the tractor with the engine stopped, particularly
when the tractor is on a slope.
To shift the lever (3), pull the block (2) upward.
To engage the Park-Lock (Fig.8-29)
1 - Engage the parking brake (1)
2 - Engage the Park-Lock: Release the locking device
(2) and pull up the engagement lever (3).
To disengage the Park-Lock (Fig.8-29)
1 - Release the locking device (2) and lower the lever
(3) to disengage the Park-Lock.
2 - Disengage the parking brake (1)

The Park-Lock must be disengaged before using

the reverse shuttle. Should the reverse shuttle be Fig.8-29
engaged in forward or reverse gear with the Park-Lock
still engaged, the buzzer sounds until the Park-Lock is
disengaged. Disengage the Park-Lock and shift the shuttle
switch to neutral.
Now the shuttle can be shifted to forward or reverse gear
and the tractor started.

ATTENTION: To avoid damage to the Park-Lock

system, proceed as follows. Brake first, then engage
the Park-Lock. Always disengage the Park-Lock first,
then the parking brake.

ATTENTION:When the Park-Lock is engaged, the en-

gine can be started, but not so the tractor, while the
buzzer sounds. The Park-Lock must be disengaged for
the tractor to start.

Powershuttle maintenance
Transmission oil: See Lubricant and Fuel Chart.
Carry out the same maintenance operations as described
for the standard transmission. The Powershuttle filter
should be replaced every 250 hours. This filter is placed
under the cab on the right-hand side, near the auxiliary con-
trol valves. See the Maintenance chapter for more details.

180
 Operation

Powershuttle troubleshooting
A buzzer sounds and the flashing message “AL” fol-
lowed by a two-digit number appears in the ground
speed and PTO RPM digital display on the instrument
panel (Fig. 8-30) if the Powershuttle system becomes
faulty. The number that follows the letters AL identifies
the incorrect manoeuvre or the Powershuttle operatio-
nal fault, according to the following scale of severity:

AL9+number: highly severe fault.

AL8+number: fault of medium severity.

Please contact your Dealer’s Service to have the problem Fig.8-30

solved.

PRIORITY 9 - Alarm code AL9.... is blinking on the digital display. Buzzer is on.

Code Function Note

AL99 Power fault (+) (-) of sensors Machine in neutral.

AL98 Faulty clutch pedal sensor Machine in neutral.

AL97 Faulty left-hand speed sensor. Machine remains in engaged mode.

AL96 Faulty right-hand speed sensor Machine remains in engaged mode.

AL95 Faulty engine RPM sensor Machine remains in engaged mode.

AL94 Faulty Park-Lock switch. Machine in normal mode.

AL93 PTO RPM sensor Machine remains in engaged mode.

AL92 Reverse shuttle lever sensor Buzzer operating. Machine in normal mode.

181
Operation

PRIORITY 8 - Alarm code AL8.... is blinking on the digital display. Buzzer is on.
Code Function Note

AL89 Reverse shuttle lever Machine in neutral.

- - -

AL86 REVERSE clutch control solenoid valve Machine in neutral.

AL85 DIRECT clutch control solenoid valve Machine in neutral.

- - -

AL83 Speedshift solenoid valve Machine in neutral.

AL82 Synchronized PTO switch PTO brake solenoid valve ON. Independent PTO engagement
is allowed. Further functions are active.

AL81 PTO brake solenoid valve No independent PTO.

Further functions are active.

AL80 PTO solenoid valve No independent PTO.

Further functions are active.

SPECIAL CONDITIONS

- Reversing at speed over 10 kph Buzzer operating

Reversing is possible.

- Reverse shuttle not in neutral with engaged Park-Lock Buzzer operating

- P TO b r a ke s o l e n o i d v a l v e , o p e n c i r c u - Buzzer operating
i t o r s h o r t c i r c u i t w i t h e n g a g e d P TO
switch
AL92 PTO brake safety - PTO brake does not stop rotation of Buzzer operating. Machine in normal mode.
rear PTO shaft

182
 Operation

Locking the differential

The tractors are fitted with a system for locking the
differential on the rear and front axles on 4WD models.
The system is used when a wheel slips because of lack
of grip. To lock the differentials, just press the button (1
- Fig. Fig.8-31a) under the control panel of the electronic
power lift for a second. If the tractor is fitted with 4WD
with Hydralock system, this control not only locks the
rear differential, but also the front one.

A yellow function indicator on the instrument panel

lights up to indicate that the diff lock is engaged (cab
versions only).

NOTE: For the best results, engage the diff lock before
the wheels are likely to slip. Do not engage the lock
while one of the wheels is actually slipping. Do not lock
the differential without previously depressing the clutch
pedal.

Keep the differential locked until the driving wheels do Fig.8-31a

not slip any more. Just depress both brake pedals to
unlock the differential.

WARNING: Disengage the diff lock when you
need to turn the tractor. Disengage the lock
when driving on a road.

Four-wheel drive
4WD increases traction on broken ground, muddy and
slippery surfaces, etc.

Press the button (2 - Fig. Fig.8-31b) to engage or disen-

gage 4WD.

Both operations must be carried out while the tractor

is on the move, on a straight stretch and never under
load.
Cab
NOTE: Only use four-wheel drive when strictly neces-
sary. Avoid use of 4WD when maximum traction is not
required, e.g. on hard ground, roads, etc., since this
would only increase tyre wear unnecessarily.

Platform
Fig.8-31b

183
Operation

Electro-hydraulic PTO
The rear power take-off is fully independent from the
transmission. It is engaged by means of a multi-disc
oil-cooled hydraulic clutch.

The PTO is engaged by means of the switch (1 Fig.8-32

and Fig.8-33).

An indicator light on the instrument panel comes on

when the PTO is engaged (9 - Fig.8-4).

Use: engagement/disengagement
Engage/disengage the front PTO (1 - Fig.8-32 and Fig.8-
33) by the ON/OFF button switch with engine at idling
speed.

Depressed button switch: disengaged PTO Fig. 8-32

Fully depress the ON/OFF switch (1). The PTO indicator

Released button switch: engaged PTO
light on the instrument panel (9 - Fig. 8-4) goes off.
To engage the PTO, release the switch (1) by pulling up
the locking collar (2) (Fig.8-33).

Always shift the switch in the OFF disengaged position

(Fig.8-32) after using the PTO or before starting the
engine.

NOTE: The engine can be started only if the PTO

engagement switch is in the OFF position and the PTO
engagement lever (2 - Fig.8-34) is in the neutral position.

Engage the PTO slowly to protect the clutch and driveline.

Select the operating mode and the required speed before

engaging the PTO.

IMPORTANT: For high-inertia implements (e.g. stone

crusher, mill etc.) the universal joint for cardan shaft
is to be used.

WARNING: When using the PTO with the

tractor at a standstill, always make sure
that the creeper lever of the gearshift in Fig. 8-33
neutral position and that the parking brake
is engaged. Pull up the locking collar (2) of the ON/OFF button, then
pull the button (1) to the ON position. Now the button
WARNING: High-inertia implements do not will remain on the ON position, while the PTO indicator
stop immediately after the independent PTO light on the instrument panel (9 - Fig. 8-4) lights up.
has been disengaged. Wait for the implement
to slow down or stop completely before
performing any cleaning or adjustment
operations.
IMPORTANT: When using implements with quickly
IMPORTANT: When using implements that cause shock moving parts (such as mowers, reapers, snowplows)
loads, always use a safety coupler between the implement ALWAYS fit an overrun device on the implement drive
and the PTO drive shaft. Before using the implement, check shaft, as a protection against possible PTO faults.
the correct operation both of the safety coupler and of the
implement.

184
 Operation

Hydraulic PTO engagement Hydraulic PTO control levers

1– Select the required PTO speed 540/540ECO/1000
RPM with selector lever (2 - Fig.8-34).
2– Engage the selector lever to operate the PTO (1 -
Fig.8-34).
3– Operate the switch to engage the PTO (1-Fig.8-33).
4– Engage/disengage the PTO during work by the
engagement control (1 - Fig.8-33).

PTO operation - All types

PTO operation selector lever (1 - Fig. 8-34)

Description of the symbols on the decal placed on the

right of the control lever (Fig.8-34).

A - Independent PTO engaged.

Directly driven by the engine.

IMPORTANT: Always keep the lever in position A

during work. Shift the lever to position B only if the
synchronized PTO has to be used. Shift the lever to
position A again after using the synchronized PTO.

B - Synchronized PTO proportional to ground speed

engaged. (On request)
Driven by the gearbox.
NOTE: The PTO operation selector lever (1-Fig.8-34) has
no neutral position. The mechanical neutral position is
obtained by bringing the speed range selector lever (2-
Fig. 8-34) in the middle position “O”.
IMPORTANT: The PTO mode selector lever,
independent or synchronized (optional), controls a
mechanical coupler that ensures the maximum safety
in both operation modes. The passage from a mode
to another, however, is only possible when the teeth
are aligned. The procedure is described under the
headings “Direct power take-off” and “Synchronized
power take-off” hereunder.
Fig. 8-34
1 - PTO operation selector lever
A- Independent power take-off
B- Synchronized power take-off
2 - PTO speed range selector lever
A - Economic 540 PTO or 1000 RPM
0 - Neutral
B - 540 RPM
Independent power take-off
All types
The PTO can operate at 540 RPM with a 1944 RPM engine
rate or at 1000 RPM engine rate with the engine at 1956
RPM. (On request 540ECO RPM with engine at 1375
RPM). It is driven directly by the engine, and its operation
is fully independent from the ground speed of the tractor.
8

Independent PTO engagement

The direct PTO should be engaged with the engine at

idling speed and without hesitation. Do not heed any
noises due to tooth meshing.
Always keep the lever (1) in “A” position (Fig.8-34), for
independent PTO engaged.
The synchronized PTO should be used only if necessary
(see “Synchronized PTO” section).

185
Operation

Synchronized Power Take-Off

(Optional)

Use of the synchronized rear power take-off with the

gearbox is solely designed for towing self-driven trailers
and, more generally, for all those farming implements
which have to operate synchronised with tractor move-
ment and which do not require more than 40 - 45% of
rated engine power.
Engage the synchronized power take-off with the tractor
at standstill. Depress the clutch pedal to disengage the
gearshift clutch and shift the lever (1- Fig. 8-36) to the
“B” position.

Synchronized PTO engagement

The synchronized PTO has to be engaged without applying

any force, with the engine at idling speed. Move the tractor
a little forward to make the engagement easier. Sometime
you may need to engage the hydraulic PTO clutch for an
instant in order to allow the gear teeth to align and make
their engagement easier. When the synchronized PTO is
not used, the lever should be shifted to the direct PTO
position (lever 1, position A - Fig. 8-36).

IMPORTANT: When using the synchronized PTO and

if you are forced to reverse once or several times,
remember that the driveline inverts its spinning direc- Fig. 8-36
tion. Thus, with certain implements, it is advisable to
disengage the PTO when reversing in order to avoid
major damage (lever 1, position O - Fig. 8-32).

Synchronized PTO revolutions (optional) Power take-off speed indicator - Digital

panel
Whichever forward gear is engaged, the splined shaft
of the PTO accomplishes, for each turn of the rear
wheels:

PTO driveline revolutions

Model
540RPM 540E RPM 1000 RPM

80-90-100 9.914 13.839 18.620

105-110 10.265 14.479 19.264 Fig. 8-35

The indicator (1) displays the operating rate of the PTO
with great accuracy. The operating rate of implements for
which the rotation speed must be precisely selected can
therefore be kept under constant control.
Speed indicator of the PTO engaged (2):
540 RPM; 540 ECO RPM; 1000 RPM

186
 Operation

Speed range selection

The speed range selector lever (2 - Fig. 8-37) allows to
change from 540 RPM PTO tp 1000 RPM (or 540ECO
RPM) and back. This lever has three positions:

A - PTO at 540 RPM

0 - PTO in neutral
B - PTO at 1000 RPM or 540ECO RPM

CAUTION: When the PTO is not used, the

speed range selector lever should always be
in neutral position (lever 2, position O, Fig.
8-37).

CAUTION: For the hydraulic PTO, disengage

the PTO clutch (switch 1, Fig. 8-32)”OFF”
before switching between two speed ranges.

WARNING: Only use PTO at 540 RPM (or

540ECO) or at 1000 RPM to drive implements
designed for such respective rotation speeds.
Never allow the PTO shaft to rotate at more
than 630 RPM with implements designed for
540 RPM.

Fig. 8-37

Economy PTO
PTO overspeed
A PTO speed of 540 RPM can be obtained for imple-
ments that do not require maximum power, such as
(NAO markets only)
The indicator light (1 - Fig.8-38) on the dashboard comes
fertilizer spreaders, sprayers, etc.) by using the PTO at
on if the max. allowed rated PTO speed is exceeded.
540ECO RPM and decelerating to 1375 RPM. The PTO
Reduce the engine rated speed to reduce the PTO
economy mode has a number of advantages, including
speed.
a reduction in fuel consumption, noise and vibrations.
NOTE: A flashing indicator light signals a problem with
WARNING: Economy PTO 540 ECO runs at
the controller. In this case, ask your Dealer’s specialized
1375 RPM. Never exceed 1890 RPM engine rate
workshop for help.
(corresponding to 630 RPM of the PTO drive-
line) to avoid major damages to the driveline
itself and the connected implement.

Fig. 8-38

187
Operation

Interchangeable PTO shaft

For Models 100-105 and 110 only( 1000RPM PTO
not available in NAO Market)
Different PTO output shafts are available (Fig. 8-39a):

• diameter 1 3/8” (34.9 mm.) shaft with 21 splines for

1000 RPM power take-off, standard assembly (2).

• diameter 1 3/8” (34.9 mm.) shaft with 6 splines for

540 RPM power take-offs, supplied with the tractor
(1).
• diameter 1 3/4” (44.4 mm.) shaft with 6 splines for
the 1000 RPM PTO (on request).

Remove the four fixing bolts (3) to replace the output Fig.8-39a - PTO driveline replacement - Mod. 100-105
shaft. and 110

After mounting the shaft, select the correct rotation

speed by means of the relative lever.

Caution: never use the PTO driveline for 540 RPM if

the implement used requires a power greater than 56
kW (75 HP) since damages to the driveline itself and
to the connected implements could injure bystanders.
Implements requiring 56 kW (75 HP) may be used only
with PTO drivelines at 1000 RPM.

North America: 1000 RPM PTO with 540 RPM

shaft, 6 splines. 1000 RPM PTO only allowe with
1000 RPM shaft, 21 splines.

To change the output shaft (1), first remove the spring

ring (2 - Fig. 8-39b) using special nippers.
Take out the shaft. Thoroughly grease the new shaft
and fit it in place, making sure that it is fully inserted in
its housing.
Fit the spring ring correctly back in place: replace it if it
is damaged or deformed.

After installing the required shaft, select the correct

RPM rate by means of the selector lever.

CAUTION: Only use the PTO driveline for 540 RPM if

the implement used requires a power greater than 56
kW (75 HP) since damages to the driveline itself and
to the connected implements could injure bystanders.
Implements requiring more than 56 kW (75 HP) may
be used only with PTO drivelines at 1000 RPM, 21 Fig. 8-39b - Changing the PTO driveline - NAO.
splines. 1 - PTO driveline.
2 - Spring ring.

188
 Operation

Precautions when using the PTO

WARNING: PTO drivelines and implements
operated by the PTO can be extremely dan-
gerous. It is important to comply with the
following instructions:

WARNING: Never drive without the PTO

caps (2) or protection (1) mounted. These
components protect the operators from
injury and the shaft splines from damage
(Fig. 8-40).

WARNING: Before connecting, adjusting or

working on implements operated by the
PTO, disengage the PTO, stop the engine,
remove the ignition key and engage the
parking brake. Never work under raised
implements.

WARNING: Make sure that all implements

operated by the PTO are fitted with the
correct protections, are in a good condition
and comply with the laws in force.

WARNING: Before driving an implement Fig.8-40 - PTO shaft guards

through the PTO, ALWAYS make sure that
all bystanders are well away from the trac-
tor.

WARNING: Fix the draw bar in the central

position when using implements operated WARNING: Never exceed 630 RPM
by the tractor’s PTO. with implements designed
for 540 RPM
WARNING: When using the PTO with the
tractor at a standstill, always make sure WARNING: Economy PTO 540 ECO runs at
that the gears are in neutral position and 1375 RPM. Never exceed 1890 RPM engine rate
that the parking brake is engaged. (corresponding to 630 RPM of the PTO drive-
line) to avoid major damages to the driveline
WARNING: Before starting up any PTO-dri- itself and the connected implement.
ven implement hitched to the three-point
linkage, lift the implement to its full height
and check that at least 1/4 of the total
length of the telescopic section of the drive
shaft is engaged. Adjust the height limiter
on the electronic power lift to limit the
maximum height of the stroke.
8
Paddy fields warning
When using the tractor in paddy fields or marshy
ground, where the water level could rise above the
height of the PTO, ask your dealer for instructions on
all necessary waterproofing and sealing measures. If
such measures are not taken, the guarantee could be
rendered invalid.

189
Operation

Tractor transport [4.1.j]

NOTE: See page 80 for further information.

Towing the tractor

If you need to tow or push the tractor for a brief distance,
remember that the power steering system will allow you
to drive and steer it for a short way with the engine off.
Put the following controls in NEUTRAL (Fig. 8-41
and Fig.8-42).

1- Reverse shuttle lever (1)

2- Gearshift lever (2)

3- Range selector lever (4)

4- (With Powershuttle only) Disengage the Park Lock (7

- Fig. 8-42)
Fig.8-41 - Controls with Powershuttle
5- Disengage the parking brake (8)

6- Ensure that the electro-hydraulic PTO switch is in

disengaged position (3 - Fig. 8-42)

7- Ensure that the PTO lever is in disengaged position

(6 - Fig. 8-42)

How to drive the tractor

• To drive the tractor, you will need to excercise
greater effort if the engine is at a standstill.
• Slow and stop the tractor with the brake pedals
latched together (5)
• Tow or push the tractor at moderate speed.
How to safely drive the tractor
• Affix the slow moving vehicle card (SMV-Slow
Moving Veicle).
• Use the revolving beacon and the hazard lights.
• Strictly comply with the laws in force in the country
where the tractor is used.

Tractor transport
The tractor must be transported with a suitable vehicle
(Fig.8-43).
Engage the parking brake (8 - Fig.8-42). Fig.8-42
Engage the Park-Lock (with Powershuttle only) (7 - Fig.8-
42).
Firmly fasten the tractor to the transport vehicle using
suitable chains or straps.(Fig.8-43)
Use the tow bar or its supports as rear fixing points for
the tractor.

CAUTION: Never hitch or connect chains around the

tractor components as these could be damaged by
the chains themselves or by excessive loads.

The trailer must be provided with the warning signs and

lights required by the local laws in force.

Fig.8-43

190
 Maintenance

POWERSHUTTLE
ROUTINE MAINTENANCE TABLE
The numbers in the second column refer to the operations described in the following pages, listed in chronological
order.
Operation number

Check operation

Lubrication
Check level
Work hours

Replace
Adjust
Maintenance

Clean

Page
Mainte- 1 Oil level in gearbox,
nance on
request (3) power lift and steering systems 193

2 Oil filter on the intake (2)

Every 250
work hours of steering and power lift systems 194
3 Oil filter on the delivery (2) of the steering and
Powershuttle (if installed) systems (2) 195
4 Transmission oil, hitch and steering systems (1) 196
Every 1000
work hours
4B Check and replace (if needed) oil filter on intake (2) of steering and hitch circuits 196

NOTES
Operations that must be carried out by an authori-
zed dealer or service agent.

(1) Change the gearbox oil for the first time after
500 hours, then change it after every 1000
hours service (1000-2000-3000 etc...)

(2) WARNING: To safeguard the power lift, stee-

ring and Powershuttle systems, wash the filter
on pump intakes and change the filter on the
steering circuit delivery for the first time after
50 hours. After this, repeat the same operations
after every 250 hours service (i.e. 250-500-750-
1000 hours…). 8
(3) WARNING: Use your own discretion and ex-
perience when deciding the actual intervals
for variable interval service and maintenance
operations. Always remember, however, that it
is better to carry them out too often than not
often enough.

WARNING: If you need to open the bonnet, follow the procedure indicated under “How to open the bonnet”.
WARNING: Always use specific personal safety devices for each operation.
WARNING: Maintenance operations must be carried out with the engine off. Check that the gear and the par-
king brake are both engaged and that the ignition key has been removed.
WARNING: Beware of burns caused by hot tractor and engine parts.

191
Maintenance

OPERATION 1
Oil level: mechanical transmission,
power lift circuit and steering cir-
cuit (Fig. 8-44)

Check at regular intervals the oil level in the mechanical

transmission and in the power lift and steering circuits.

Park the tractor on flat ground, stop the engine and lower
the power lift links. Remove the dipstick (1) and check
the oil level .

NOTE: Allow the oil to settle in the transmission and

rear final drives before checking the level.

The oil level in the transmission must be over the midli- Fig. 8-44.
ne, between the minimum and maximum marks of the 1. Dipstick and transmission oil filler
dipstick (Fig. 8-44) with the lift links in the up position. If A: Normal level marks
needed, fill up through the filler (1) to the required level Min. - no oil consumption
with oil of the prescribed type. Max. - max. consumption 5 litres
B: Level to be maintained if using a front loader or
To bleed air from the circuits when filling up the tran- other hydraulic implements
smission, remove the plug on the PTO hydraulic clutch 2. Air bleeding plug, version with hydraulic PTO
housing (2 - Fig.8-44).

When operating external hydraulics, such as hydraulic

front loaders, rams, motors etc. that require a certain
amount of oil, top up the oil level to the B mark on the
dipstick (corresponding to about 10 litres). This ensures
a correct oil level in the transmission at any time.

NOTE: The level must never be under the Min. mark.

When using external hydraulics, the level must always
be between the Min. and Max. marks.

NOTE: When working with the tractor on slopes, add 5

extra litres of oil to guarantee a minimum oil level even
in the most difficult conditions.

NOTE: The hydraulic rams of the implements being

hitched to the tractor contain the same oil used in the
transmission of the tractor. This excludes any oil conta-
mination that could cause malfunction.

Oil in the gearbox

The tractor’s transmission and the steering and power
lift circuits contain the same type of oil. See Lubricant
and Fuel Chart.

NOTE: The Powershuttle contains a different oil from

the mechanical transmission. The two types of oil must
NEVER be mixed together.

192
 Maintenance

Oil filters of the transmission and

of the steering and power lift circu-
its
The operations 2 and 3 for the transmission oil filters
must be carried out not only at the prescribed intervals,
but also whenever the indicator lights on the instrument
panel come on.

Warning lights for transmission and hydraulic cir-

cuit oil filter blockage (Fig.8-45)
1 - Fixed light: Red warning light for low pressure in tran-
smission hydraulic circuit. A warning buzzer will start
operating when this light comes on during work: con-
tact your Dealer’s Specialized Workshop if this occurs.
Fig.8-45
2 - Fixed light: Orange warning light for blockage of the
oil filter of transmission and hydraulic circuits . The filter
is mounted on the intake part of the hydraulic pumps.

EVERY 250 HOURS SERVICE

OPERATION 2
Oil filter of the transmission,
steering and power lift circuits,
mounted on the intake part of the
hydraulic pumps - Fig.8-46
CAUTION: Clean the filter on the intake of the
steering and power lift circuit pumps after the first
50 hours, then every 250 hours service.

1 - Loosen the screws (1) and remove the cover (3) of

the intake filter (2).
2 - Remove the filter cartridge (2) and wash it in a
suitable solvent. Be sure to remove any metallic
fragments from the filter cover and housing.

CAUTION: Replace the filter if damaged or

excessively clogged.

3 - Clean and mount the hose back in place (3).

4 - Check the oil level. Top up if necessary with oil of
8
the prescribed type. Fig. 8-46

NOTE: After you have fitted the filter, allow the engine
to run and make sure that there are no leaks. Check the
oil level and top up if required.

NOTE: Use the oil prescribed in the Lubricants and

Fuels chart.

NOTE: Make sure that the hydraulic equipment con-

nected to the tractor’s hydraulic circuit uses the same
type of oil. Use of different types of oil could damage
the hydraulic circuit.

193
Maintenance

OPERATION 3
Filter on the delivery (Fig. 8-47) of
the steering circuit (and of the Po-
wershuttle circuit, if installed)
WARNING: Change the paper filter on the delivery
after the first 50 hours service and then after every
250 hours.
Also change the filter whenever the red indicator
lights on the instrument panel come on (Fig.8-47)

Change the element of the filter on the delivery of the

steering circuit:

1 - Unscrew the holder (1), remove and discard the

filter element (3).

2 - Fit the new filter element (3) into the cover of the Fig.8-47 - Oil filter of steering, power lift and Powershut-
filter (2). tle (if installed) circuits.
1 - Holder.
To prevent the filter element from being dirtied (with 2 - Cover.
mud, etc.) only completely remove the plastic protec- 3 - Filter element.
tion after fitting. 4 - Washer.
5 - Ring seal.
3 - Mount the holder (1) after having oiled its threaded
part, the washer (4) and seal (5) with clean new oil.
Take great care to fit the individual parts in the right
directions.

Change the seal (5) and the washer (4) every

1000 hours service or whenever necessary.

4 - Fully screw on the holder (1) by hand.

NOTE: After changing the oil and filters, run the engine
for a while and make sure there are no leaks. Check the
oil level again and top up if necessary.

NOTE: Use the oil indicated in the Lubricants and Fuels

chart.

NOTE: Make sure that the hydraulic equipment con-

nected to the tractor’s hydraulic circuit uses the same
type of oil. Use of different types of oil could damage
the hydraulic circuit.

194
 Maintenance

EVERY 1000 HOURS SERVICE OR ONCE A YEAR

OPERATION 4
Oil changes for the transmission,
steering circuit and power lift
hydraulic circuit

NOTE: It is advisable to change the oil for the first time

after 500 hours. After this, change the oil after every
1000 hours service.

Transmission housing Fig.8-48 and 8-49

1 - Lower the lift arms to the ground.

2 - Remove the plug (see Operation 2).

3 - Place vessels under all seven drain plugs to collect

the oil as it drains out.
Fig.8-48
4 - Remove the plugs and drain out the oil.

5 - Fit the drain plugs back in place, then pour oil of

the approved type into the transmission until the
correct level has been reached (see Operation 2).

NOTE: Let the oil stabilize before checking its level.

WARNING: See the Lubricants and Fuels chart for

the type of oil to be used according to the transmis-
sion type.

OPERATION 4B
Check and replace (if needed) the
Fig.8-49
filter on the intake.

CAUTION: When changing transmission oil at 1000

hours service, carefully check the conditions of the
filter on the intake of the hydraulic pumps. Replace
the filter if clogged or damaged.

Fig. 8-50 8
1 - Drain all oil from the transmission. five drain plugs
(Fig. 8-48 and Fig. 8-49).
2 - Remove the screws (1) and remove the tube (3) of
the intake filter (Fig. 8-50).
3 - Remove and discard the filter cartridge (2). Remove
any metal fragments from the filter housing.
4 - Mount the new filter (2) and the intake tube (3).
5 - Clean and remount the five drain plugs (4), and fill
up with oil of the prescribed type to the right level.
Consult the Lubricant and Fuel chart for the oil
type.

Fig.8-50

195
 Maintenance

LUBRICANTS AND CAPACITIES

Q.ty litres

component PowerShuttle SPECIFICATIONS AMBIENT TEM- AGROLUBE

PERATURE
75* 90 100 105*
80 110

COOLING CIRCUIT AGROLUBE MUREX Concentrated antifreeze fluid to be used Degrees °C -8° -15° -25° -35°
15 15 15 15 in the following percentages:
Specifications: GM 1899M (1970); FORD ESE-M97B % 20 30 40 50

FUEL TANK Viscosity at Viscosity at

95 95 95 95
40°C, cSt 100°C, cSt

acea e7/E5/ ANY SOLEA 115

Engine with filter 7 7 7 7 E3/B3 15,2
temperature LD 15W40
API CH-4/SL

GEARBOX WITH POWER- API GL - 4

SHUTTLE U.T.T.O
33 34 36 36 FORD M2C-86C ANY 65
HITCH AND STEERING VELA/C 9.8
CIRCUITS (1) (2) ALLISON C-4 temperature
LANDINI I-ENG-
D-302
API GL - 5
REAR FINAL DRIVES (each) 3.6 3.6 3.6 4.2 mf1134m ANY CARINA 80W-90 174 16.8
fordm2c 108c temperature
MIL-L-2105 D
DIFFERENTIAL HOUSING API GL - 5 ANY
FRONT AXLE WITH BRA- 5.8 5.8 5.8 5.8 ZF TE-ML CARINA LS 90 174 16.8
temperature
KES (1) 05C,12C,16E

API GL - 5
FRONT FINAL DRIVES 1.4 1.4 1.4 1.4 mf1134m ANY CARINA 80W-90 174 16.8
(each) fordm2c 108c temperature
MIL-L-2105 D
landini ANY
braking circuit 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 AZA 22.5 5.6
s/eng/i 102 temperature RED (3)

— — — — — ANY GENA GREASE — —

Grease Points temperature EP

* 75-105 For some markets only

(1) Use only lubricants that comply with LANDINI I-ENG-D-302, NEW HOLLAND M2 C 86 C, M-F 1135 specifications. LANDINI specifi-
cations defines additives and anti-noise properties. The use of different types of oil, or mixing other types of oil into the oil supplied
with the tractor can lead to increased noise.

(2) The Powershuttle transmission uses AGROLUBE SINCROS / C oil, ACCORDING TO LANDINI SPECIFICATIONS. Alternative pro-
ducts must have the same quality, conforming to international specifications as indicated and in accordance with the specifica-
tions of the tractor manufacturer.

(3) Mineral based oil for brake circuits complying with LANDINI S/ENG/I 102 specifications

196
 Maintenance

FUSES AND RELAYS - Powershuttle WARNING: To carry out this operation, engage the
The electrical system of the tractor is protected against first gear, turn off the engine, engage the parking
short-circuits and excessive power draw by means of brake and remove the ignition key.
fuses. The number of the fuses in the electrical system
depends on the tractor model. WARNING: Always use specific personal safety devices
for each operation.
NOTE: Before replacing a blown fuse with a new,
equivalent one, the cause that led to the fault should be
ascertained and removed.

The front fuses have the following functions and

ampere ratings - Fig.8-51

Fuse Protected circuits Amp.

FU1 Primary 100

FU2 Alternator 80
FU3 Glow plugs 50

Fig.8-51

K1 - Power relay (glow plug pre-heater) - Fig.8-52

Fig.8-52

197
Maintenance

Fuses and relays - Powershuttle

Fuses and relays are installed in the dashboard wiring

line - Fig.8-53

Fuse Protected circuits Amp.

FA1 Driving beams 15

FA2 Dipped beams 10
FA3 Lh side lights 5
FA4 Rh side lights 5
FA5 Side lights 10
FA6 Cigarette lighter 10
FA7 Brake lights 10
FA8 Ignition key 5
FA9 (Instrument, direct) 5
FA10 Auxiliary socket, key-activated 25
FA11 Turn indicators 10
FA12 Brake lights & differential lock
solenoid valve 10
FA13 Solenoid valve, 4WD 5
FA14 NAO power unit 7.5
FA15 Air braking 5
FA16 Instrument, key operated 5
FA17 Front PTO 5
FA18 Emergency 15
FA19 Front loader 7.5
FA20 Diff lock solenoid valve 5
FB1 Pneumatic seat 10
FB2 Auxiliary socket (battery, direct) 5
FB3 Starter motor enabling 20
FB4 Horn & revolving beacon 10
FB5 Injection pump and fuel pump 7.5
FB6 Rear field light and sunroof lights Fig.8-53
(if fitted) 10
FC1 Transmission electronic control unit 7.5 Relay Function

KA1 Platform field lights, pneumatic seat,
headlights
KA2 Auxiliary socket, key-activated
KA3 Trailer air brakes, front PTO, turn indicator
lights, instrument, NAO power unit, diff lock.
\ brake lights
KA4 Cigarette lighter, injection pump and fuel
pump
KA5 Front PTO starting up safety
KA6 Front loader
KB1 Rear PTO starting up safety
KB2 Starter motor starting up safety
KB3 Dipped beams
KB4 Driving beams
KB5 Diff lock self-retainer
KB6 Brake pedal pressure switch control
KC1 Hand brake enabling for air braking
KC2 Transmission control unit
HA2 Buzzer

K1 Power relay (glow plug pre-heater) - Fig.8-54)

Fig.8-54

198
 Maintenance

Auxiliary power socket

On the rear of the dashboard, on the right of the operator,

is installed an 12v auxiliary power socket (1 - Fig. 8-55).

Connections (Fig.8-56)
1- Key-operated positive - Max. load 5A
2- Negative
3- Direct battery positive - Max. load 25A

Fig. 8-55 Platform

Fig. 8-56

Fig. 8-55 Cab

199
Maintenance

Page left blank intentionally

200
 HC

DANGER
HC tractors are designed for specific work. The tractor’s structure features a high height-width ratio,
resulting in an unfavourable barycentre position. For this reason a HC tractor has a lower stability than
a standard tractor. This kind of tractor should therefore be used only on perfectly level ground, without
any hindrances and unevenness, and should be driven very carefully, avoiding sharp turns and high
speed.

DANGER
Any trailed objects should be hitched up in the lowest position.
Due to the particular structure of the HC tractor, required for the high ground clearance needed for
special agricultural works, the height of implements to the ground is generally greater that in standard
tractors. Therefore the towing stability could be lower than in standard tractors. Refer and pay particu-
lar attention to the safety rules concerning overturning in the Safety Rules section of this manual.

IMPORTANT: This HC Tractors section contains all

general information distinguishing HC from stan-
dard tractors, i.e. dimensions and specifications.
For controls, use, servicing and safety, please refer
to the relative chapters of this manual.

Section 9 9
HC Tractors Alta Luce

201
HC

High Clearance (HC) tractors * only available in some markets.

Technical specifications 90HC 100HC 105HC* 110HC

Engine

Perkins, direct injection 1104D-44T 1104D-44TA 1104D-44T 1104D-44TA
Max. rated power, ISO HP/kW 83/61 92,5/68 98,6/72,5 101,9/74,9
Max. engine rate RPM 2200 2200 2200 2200
Max. Torque Nm 345 384 384 405
Max. torque speed RPM 1400 1400 1400 1400
Bore/stroke mm 105/127 105/127 105/127 105/127
Capacity/cylinders cm3 4400/4 4400/4 4400/4 4400/4
Water cooling STD STD STD STD
Dray air filter STD STD STD STD
Fuel tank capacity +suppl. litres 95 95 95 95

Clutch
Double plate, dry type inch/mm 12(304,8) 12(304,8) 12(304,8) -
Mechanical engagement STD STD STD -

Transmission
Shuttle + basic gearbox:12+12 STD STD STD -
Shuttle + supercreeper:24+12 OPT OPT OPT -
Shuttle + underdrive:24+12 OPT OPT OPT -
Powershuttle with Creeper 16+16 - - - STD

Power take.off
Mechanical engagement STD STD STD -
Electro-hydraulic engagement - - - OPT
540/750 RPM PTO STD STD STD STD
540/1000 RPM PTO OPT OPT OPT OPT
PTO shaft 1”3/8 (34.9 mm), 6 splines STD STD STD STD
Ground speed PTO STD STD STD STD

4 WD front axle
Epicyclic final drives STD STD STD STD
Mech. engagement/hydr. disengagement STD STD STD STD
Electro-hydraulic differential lock STD STD STD STD

Brakes
Hydrostatic control STD STD STD STD
10-disc oil cooled rear brakes STD STD STD STD

Hydraulic power lift

Position, draft, intermix, float mode STD STD STD STD
Mechanical control STD STD STD STD
Standard lift capacity kg 2600 2600 2600 2600
Lift capacity with2 auxiliary rams kg 3700 OPT 3700 OPT 3700 OPT 3700opt
Max. operating pressure bar 180 180 180 180
Pump flow rate litres/min 53.9 53.9 53.9 53.9
Class 2 three-point linkage STD STD STD STD
Auxiliary control valves 2 2 2 2

Optional equipment
6-8 front ballasts, 36 kg each OPT OPT OPT OPT
2 rear ballasts, 60 kg each OPT OPT OPT OPT
Hydraulic trailer braking system OPT OPT OPT OPT

202
 HC

Fig. 9-1

General data
90 HC 100HC 105HC*-110HC
* 105HC model only available in some markets. Plat Plat Plat

2 WD 4 WD 2 WD 4 WD 2 WD 4 WD

With tyres
- front 7.50-20 9.5R48 7.50-20 9.5R48 7.50-20 9.5R48
- rear 9.5R48 9.5R48 9.5R48 9.5R48 9.5R48 9.5R48

Weights

- In running order, with safety frame............................. Kg 3090 3480 3090 3480 3090 3480

Dimensions
-

A - Height at safety frame...............................................mm 3087 3087 3087
B - Wheelbase.................................................................mm
C - Max. length with front ballast....................................mm
2250 2230 2250 2230
4127 4127
2250 2230
4127 9
D - Ground clearance under front axle.......................mm 700 684 700 684 700 684

E - Min. width (according to tyres)..................................mm 1670 - 2200 1670 - 2200 1670 - 2200

F - Front track (according to tyres)..................................mm 2RM: 1420 - 1920 4 RM: 1382 - 2004
G - Rear track (according to tyres)..................................mm 1382 - 2004

203
 HC

Fig. 9-2

General data
* 105HC model only available in some markets. 90HC 100HC 105HC*-110HC
Cab Cab Cab

2 WD 4 WD 2 WD 4 WD 2 WD 4 WD
With tyres
- front 7.50-20 9.5R48 7.50-20 9.5R48 7.50-20 9.5R48
- rear 9.5R48 9.5R48 9.5R48 9.5R48 9.5R48 9.5R48

Weights

- In running order, with safety frame............................. Kg 3340 3750 3340 3750 3360 3750

Dimensions
A - Height at cab.............................................................mm
B - Wheelbase.................................................................mm
C - Max. length with front ballast....................................mm
D - Ground clearance under front axle.......................mm
E - Min. - max. width (according to tyres).......................mm
-
3087 3087 3087
2250 2230 2250 2230 2250 2230
4127 4127 4127
700 684 700 684 700 684
1670 - 2200 1670 - 2200 1670 - 2200

F - Front track (according to tyres)..................................mm 2 RM: 1420 - 1920 4 RM: 1382 - 2004
G - Rear track (according to tyres)..................................mm 1382 - 2004

204
 HC

Max. turning radius:

2WD............................................................... 52°
4WD............................................................... 32°

Turning radius
•with brakes 3.85 m 5.70 m
•without brakes 4.40 m 6.50 m

MODEL FRONT TYRES REAR TYRES

7.50 - 20 6Pr 230/95R48 (9.5R48) 127A8
2WD 7.50 - 20 6Pr 13.6R38 128A8
7.50 - 20 6Pr 12.4R38 125A8
7.50 - 20 6Pr 230/95R44 (9.5R44) 131A8
7.50 - 20 6Pr 270/95R44 (11.2R44) 143A8

MODEL FRONT - REAR TYRES

13.6R38 128A8
4WD 12.4R38 125A8
230/95R44 (9.5R44) 131A8
230/95R48 (9.5R48) 127A8
270/95R44 (11.2R44) 143A8

Ground speed table with standard 13.6R38 tyres and 2200 RPM engine rate
NOTE: for use of the gearbox with mechanical reverse shuttle, see the Operation chapter from page 52.

Range Speed Creeper Underdrive Standard Shuttle

Forward Forward Forward
(on request) (on request)

1 0.335 1.421 1.714 1.731
2 0.526 2.233 2.694 2.721
Low
3 0.624 2.820 3.402 3.436
4 0.980 4.161 5.020 5.071

1 0.799 3.393 4.094 4.135
2 1.256 5.333 6.435 6.500
Standard
3 1.587 6.737 8.128 8.210
4 2.341 9.939 11.991 12.112 9

1 1.972 8.372 10.101 10.203
2 3.096 13.157 15.874 16.034
High
3 3.915 16.622 20.005 20.257
4 5.771 24.505 29.565 29.864

205
HC

MOD. 110-4WD - Gearbox with electro-hydraulic reverse Powershuttle: 12 FWD +12 REV (without creeper) - Speeds
in Kph
MOD. 110-4WD - Gearbox with electro-hydraulic reverse Powershuttle: 16 FWD +16 REV (with creeper) - Speeds in Kph

NOTE: for use of the Powershuttle gearbox, see Powershuttle from page 172 to 182.
A few HC models are only available in the version with electro-hydraulic Powershuttle: your Dealer can provide more
information.

Direct 13.6 R38

Creeper*
1 0,35
2 0,55
3 0,70
4 1,03
Slow
1 1,68
2 2,64
3 3,33
4 4,92
Medium
1 4,01
2 6,30
3 7,96
4 11,75
Fast
1 9,89
2 15,55
3 19,64
4 28,98

Shuttle 13.6 R38

Creeper*
1 0,36
2 0,56
3 0,71
4 1,04
Slow
1 1,70
2 2,67
3 3,37
4 4,97
Medium
1 4,05
2 6,37
3 8,04
4 11,87
Fast
1 9,99
2 15,71
3 19,84
4 29,27

* Creeper option

206
 HC

Track widths in mm 2WD

•standard front 1511, 1611,1711, 1811,1911, 2011

•front, with turned disk 1654, 1754,1854, 1954,2054

HC - Wheel tracks for 4WD front axle in mm.

Mod. Tyres Rims A B C D E F G H

HC 13.6R38 DWW12-38 1481 1681 1733 1881 1933 2081 2133 2332
HC 9.5R44 W8-44 1507 1559 1855 1907 1907 1959 2255 2307
HC 9.5R48 W8-48 1507 1563 1851 1907 1907 1963 2251 2307

HC - Wheel tracks for rear axle in mm.

Mod. Tyres Rims A B C D E F G H

HC 13.6R38 DWW12-38 1300 1400 1504 1604 1700 1800 1904 2004
HC 9.5R44 W8-44 1400 1436 1544 1580 1740 1776 1884 1920
HC 9.5R48 W8-48 1382 1438 1542 1598 1722 1778 1882 1938

Maximum allowed weights

NOTE: for maximum allowed weights for HC tractors, refer to the table at page 147 in this manual.

207
 HC

Routine maintenance Rear Final Drives

Variable maintenance
Front axle 2WD
Remove plug (A1 to check the oil level. Top up the level
The routine maintenance operations are the same spe-
through the same plug (Fig. 9-4)
cified for standard 2WD axle.
SeeOperation 23,29 in the Maintenance Section.
1000 hours
(Fig. 9-4) Remove the plug (2) and allow the oil to drain
Front axle 4WD
out.
The routine maintenance operations are the same spe-
Pour in oil of the recommended type through fill plug (1)
cified for standard 4WD axle and front final drives.
until reaching the level of the plug itself.
SeeOperation 19,22,35 in the Maintenance Section.

Ball joints for 4WD steering cylinder

Have an authorized workshop check the ball joint fixing
nut (C) torque after the first 50 hours and following this,
after every 1000 hours service (Fig. 9-3)

Fig.9-3 Fig.9-4 - Mod. 90-100-105-110

208
 HC

Noise levels as perceived by the operator [4.3]

THE FOLLOWING TABLES GIVE THE NOISE LEVEL VALUES,

MEASURED FROM THE DRIVER’S SEAT IN INSTANTANEOUS CONDITIONS
IN COMPLIANCE WITH STANDARDS EEC 2009/76/EC (dBA) - ANNEX II (without load) -
AND WHEN DRIVING BY IN COMPLIANCE WITH STANDARD EEC 2009/63/EC (dBA).

HC Tractors with safety frame

Model Noise level Noise level on driving
2RM/4RM at driver’s seat - dBA dBA
Mod. 90HC 85,00 83,00
Mod. 100HC 84,00 83,00
Mod. 105HC 85,00 85,00
Mod. 110HC 84,00 83,00

HC TRACTORS WITH CAB TECHNO

Noise level Noise level on
Model
at driver’s seat - dBA driving dBA
Closed doors Open windows
+ rear doors
Mod. 90HC 81,00 83,00 83,00
Mod. 100HC 81,00 83,00 83,00
Mod. 105HC 80,00 83,00 85,00
Mod. 110HC 81,00 83,00 83,00

HC TRACTORS WITH CAB TOP

Noise level Noise level on
Model
at driver’s seat - dBA driving dBA
Closed doors Open windows
+ rear doors
Mod. 90HC 79,00 81,00 83,00
Mod. 100HC 79,00 81,00 83,00
Mod. 105HC 78,00 81,00 85,00 9
Mod. 110HC 79,00 81,00 83,00

209
HC

Vibration levels of the tractor relative to exposure to vibrations

For vibration levels as measured at the seats, see information and table at page 145.

Max. vertical load on hitch point - Max. towable weights

See the appropriate table on page 150/1.

210
Low Profile
The platform in the Low Profile version has the rear fen- Available versions
ders attached 80 mm lower that in the standard version.
Height is 1750 mm at the rear fenders with 16.9R30 SpeedFour for all 2WD and 4WD models.
wheels.
Powershuttle for 90LP-100LP-105-110LP with 4WD
The clearance between rear fender and tyre is 70 mm.

The rear final drives in Mod. 105-110 are the same as Mod.
100 to suit a 30” tyre.

2WD tyres

65 75 80 90 100 105-110

6.50-16 - 13.6R28 o o
7.50-16 - 14.9R28 * *
7.50-16 - 14.9R30 o o
7.50-16 - 16.9R30 o o * *
7.50-18 - 16.9R30 * *

* Basic o Optional

4WD tyres

65 75 80 90 100 105-110

12.4R20 - 14.9R28 * *
9
11.2R24 - 14.9R30 o o
11.2R24 - 16.9R28 o o
11.2R24 - 16.9R30 * * * *
14.9LR20 - 16.9R30 o o o
320/70R24 - 16.9R30 o o o o
405/70R20 - 540/65R30 o o o o

* Basic o Optional

211
 Page left blank intentionally

212
 Pick-up hitch

Supplement to the tractor’s operation and maintenance manual

PICK UP HITCH
(if fitted, on request on certain markets)
Connecting an implement
OPERATION 1

Mechanical power lift
Set power lift controls in position control mode.
WARNING: For tractors fitted with the Pick
Up Hitch hook (PUH) - For the correct op-
eration of the coupling/uncoupling system
of the PUH installed on machines with a
mechanical lifting device, conduct the cou-
pling/uncoupling amoevers with the lifting
device in a controlled position and without
using the system Ergonomic lift System
(ELS) if this is incorporated in the machine.

Lift links control lever unit.

• Move the selector lever (2) fully back on the unit to

the position control mode.
• Move the control lever (1) to the max. height position
to raise the hitch to the max. height.

Two types of pick-up hitches are available.

- Mechanical

- Hydraulic - Connect the hoses of the hydraulic pick-

up hitch to the rear hydraulic taps (1) of the auxiliary
hydraulic valve to be used.

Pick Up Hitch

213
Pick-up hitch

OPERATION 2 OPERATION 5

Raise the hitch to maximum height. Lower the pick-up hitch using the power lift controls.

OPERATION 6
OPERATION 3

Make sure the auto hitch is raised to maximum height.

Unlock the locking latches.

To unlock, pull the lever (1).

- Mechanical hitch - Reverse the tractor until the hook is

aligned under the implement towing eye.

- Hydraulic hitch.
Extend the hook rearwards, by moving the corresponding
hydraulic remote control until the hook is aligned under
the implement towing eye.

OPERATION 7

Raise the auto hitch until the hook is engaged in the

implement towing eye.

OPERATION 8

Fully retract the hook by moving the correct remote lever

rearwards.

IMPORTANT: Always make sure the hook is fully

retracted before raising the hitch.

OPERATION 9

Raise the pick-up hitch to max. height until the hitch stops
upward movement and the locking latches are latched.
Release the lift controls.

214
 Pick-up hitch

OPERATION 10 OPERATION 2

Lower the hitch onto the locking latches to take the weight
off the hydraulic system.

Remove the hitch/drawbar locating pins.

IMPORTANT: The hitch must always be supported on
the locking latches and NOT by the hydraulic system. OPERATION 3
If the locking latches do not lock, adjust the lift rods. If
after adjustment the locking latches still do not lock see
your dealer.

IMPORTANT: To prevent accidents, make sure the

hook is fully retracted and the frame is correctly latched.

Hook/drawbar change over

(if fitted, on request on certain markets)

OPERATION 1

Remove the hitch or drawbar. Stow away the removed

hitch or drawbar in a suitable recess for transport.

Install the hitch or drawbar..

Install the lock pins.

Retract the hydraulic hitch and raise the pick-up hitch until
locked, then lower onto latches.

Lower the auto hitch half way. Extend the hitch/drawbar

by moving the corresponding hydraulic remote control. WARNING: BEFORE DRIVING OFF AND
AFTER THE COUPLING, MAKE SURE THE
IMPORTANT: After lowering and extending the auto LOCKING HITCH IS FULLY RETRACTED AND
hitch, stop the engine, and engage the parking brake THE FRAME IS CORRECTLY LATCHED.
before leaving the tractor.

215
Pick-up hitch

Maximum Permitted Operating Weights

See page 150/3, item hook “e” (Carpenfer [PUH])
in the published tables.

NOTE: Ask your Dealer for further information.

Also comply with tyre capacity and local legal require-

ments.

NOTE: In certain markets pulling trailers on public roads

is not permitted unless a special approval note has been
supplied with the machine documents. Ask your Dealer
for further information.

CAUTION: Refer to licensing documents issued by the

Ministry of Transport to know data relating to max.
vertical and horizontal loads on tow hooks and max.
trailer weights.

216

A G
Adjustments, maintenance..................................81, 183
Air conditioning..........................................................154
Auxiliary control valves................................................ 82
B Gearbox with reverse shuttle and overdrive, 24x12... 57
Ballast.......................................................................... 68
Battery........................................................................124
Bleeding the air from the fuel circuit.........................120
Bleeding, brake circuit...............................................121
Brake fluid reservoir...................................................121
Brakes, maintenance................................................... 88
Brakes, operation........................................................ 61
C
Cab.............................................................................151
Cautions when using the PTO.................................... 60
Cautions.................................................................10, 13
CE Declaration of Conformity....................................146
Check your equipment................................................ 15
Cleaning...................................................................... 16
Controls and instruments........................................... 37
D
Danger symbols.......................................................... 10
Dangerous operations................................................. 25
E Maintenance..................................................16, 88, 191
Electrical system........................................................124
Engine dry air filter...................................................... 99
Engine oil filter, replacement...................................... 88
Equipment, checks..................................................... 15
F O
Four wheel-drive front axle.................................. 63 - 66
Four-wheel drive.......................................................... 63
Front axle, 2WD........................................................... 64
Fuel filter..................................................................... 88
Fuel.............................................................................. 92
Fuses..................................................................130, 197
Alphabetical index
Gearbox with Powershuttle........................................163
Gearbox with rev. shuttle and underdrive, 24x12....... 56
Gearbox with reverse shuttle 12x12........................... 54
Gearbox with reverse shuttle and creeper, 24x12...... 55
Gearbox, maintenance.........................................88, 191
General information...................................................... 7
General Maintenance.................................................120
Headlights............................................................44, 127
Hydraulic hitch with mechanical control..................... 79
Hydraulic power take-off............................................184
Hydraulic trailer brake................................................. 62
I
Idle periods................................................................133
Instrument panel......................................................... 40
Instruments and controls............................................ 37
L
Locking the differential............................................... 63
Lubricants and capacities..................................148, 196
Lubricants...........................................................148, 196
M
Main clutch, control pedal.......................................... 51
Maintenance at request.............................................. 94
Maintenance, 100 hours............................................107
Maintenance, 1000 hours..........................................114
Maintenance, 250 hours............................................110
Maintenance, 500 hours............................................111
Mechanical power take-off......................................... 58
Operation.................................................................... 49
217
Alphabetical index
P T
Parking brake............................................................... 61
Periodical maintenance table...............................88, 191
Power steering circuit oil filter.............................88, 191
Power take-off clutch, operation................................. 58
Powershuttle, hydraulic power take-off.....................163
Pre-delivery.................................................................... 7
Protective clothing...................................................... 13
Pull hooks...................................................................149
R
Risk of overturning...................................................... 21
Risks from noise ........................................................ 31
Road circulation rules................................................. 27
Road transport.......................................................27, 85
Routine maintenance guide.................................88, 191
Running in................................................................... 90
S Warranty........................................................................ 7
Safety decals............................................................... 32
Safety frame . ........................................................12, 84
Safety notes.................................................................. 9
Safety.......................................................................... 10
Seat ............................................................................ 45
Starting and stopping the engine............................... 50
Starting and stopping the tractor................................ 51
Starting the engine in cold weather............................ 50
System checks............................................................ 14
218
Tappet gap................................................................... 81
Technical specifications.............................................135
Three-point linkage..................................................... 76
Towing attachments...................................................149
Tractor identification..................................................... 6
Transmission and hydraulic circuit oil filter..........88, 191
Travel speed, HC................................................205, 206
Travel speed, Powershuttle.................................174,175
Travel speed, Techno ................................54, 55, 56, 57
U
Use of the tractor on public roads.............................. 27
Use of the tractor.................................................7, 9, 49
W
Warning and caution................................................... 11
Weights and dimensions...................................136, 147
Wheel track adjustment....................................... 64 - 68
Wheel track adjustment....................................... 64 - 68
Wheel tyres................................................................. 70
Wheels and tyres........................................................ 70
Working in safety........................................................ 19
 Contents Directive 2010/52/CE

Operator's manual C max

No. 2010/52/EEC Section

4.1 In particular or in addition to the requirements in standard ISO 3600:1996, the operator’s manual
shall cover the following:
a adjustment of the seat and suspension related to the ergonomic position of the operator with 3
respect to the controls and in order to minimise the risks from whole body vibration;
b use and adjustment of the system for heating, ventilation and air-conditioning, when provided; 7
c starting and stopping of the engine; 2, 4
d location and method of opening of emergency exits; 3
e boarding and leaving the tractor; 2, 3
f the hazard area near to the pivot axis of articulated tractors; NA
g use of special tools, if any are provided; 2
h safe methods used for service and maintenance; 2,
i information about the interval of inspection of hydraulic hoses; 2
j instructions about how to tow the tractor; 4, 6, 8
k instructions about the safe use of jacks and recommended jacking points; 2
l hazards related to batteries and fuel tank; 2, 5
m prohibited use of the tractor, where overturning hazards exist with mention that the list is not 2
exhaustive;
n residual risks, related to hot surfaces, such as filling of oil or coolant in hot engines or transmis- 2, 5
sions;
o the level of protection of the Falling Objects Protective Structure, if applicable; 1, 2
p the level of protection against hazardous substances, if applicable; 1, 2
q the level of protection of the Operators Protection Structure, if applicable; 1, 2
4.2 Attaching, detaching and working with mounted machinery, trailers and interchangeable towed
machinery:
a a warning to strictly follow the instructions outlined in the operator’s manual of the mounted or 2
trailed machinery or trailer, and not to operate the combination tractor-machine or tractor-trailer
unless all instructions have been followed;
b a warning to stay clear from the area of the three-point linkage when controlling it; 2, 4
c a warning that mounted machinery must be lowered on the ground before leaving the tractor; 2, 4
d speed of the power take-off drive shafts in function of the mounted machinery or trailed vehicle; 3, 4,
6, 8
e a requirement to use only power take-off drive shafts with adequate guards; 2
f information about hydraulic coupling devices and their function; 4
g information about the maximum lift capacity of the three-point linkage; 6
h information about the determination of the total mass, the axle loads, the tyre load carrying capacity 4, 6
and the necessary minimum ballasting;
i information about the available trailer braking systems and their compatibility with the trailed vehicles; 4
j the maximum vertical load on the rear hitch, related to the rear tyre size and type of hitch. 6

219
Contents Directive 2010/52/CE

k information about using implements with power take-off drive shafts and that the technically pos- 2
sible inclination of the shafts depend on the shape and size of the master shield and/or clearance
zone, including the specific information required in case of PTO type 3 with reduced dimension;
l a repeat of the data on the statutory plate about maximum allowed trailed masses; 6
m a warning to stay clear from the area between tractor and trailed vehicle. 2
4.3 Noise declaration: 6, 9
The operator’s manual shall give the value of the noise at the operator’s ear, measured according
to Directive 2009/76/CE of the European Parliament and of the Council and the noise of the tractor
in motion measured according to Annex VI to Directive 2009/63/CE of the European Parliament
and of the Council.
4.4 Vibration declaration: 6
The operator’s manual shall give the value of the vibration level measured according to Council
Directive 78/764/EEC;
4.5 Relevant operating modes of a tractor that can reasonably be expected and identified as containing
particular hazards are the following:
a work with front-end loader (risk of falling objects); 2
b forestry application (risk of falling and/or penetrating objects); 1, 2
c work with crop sprayers, mounted or trailed (risk of hazardous substances). 1, 2, 7
4.5.1 Front-end loader:
4.5.1.1 The operator’s manual shall outline the hazards associated with front-end loader work, and explain 2
how to avoid those hazards.
4.5.1.2 The operator’s manual shall indicate the fixation points on the body of the tractor where the 6
front-end loader must be installed, together with the size and quality of the hardware to be used.
If no such attachment points are foreseen, the operator’s manual shall prohibit the installation of
a front-end loader.
4.5.1.3 Tractors fitted with programmable hydraulic sequencing functions shall provide information on how NA
to connect the loader hydraulics so that this function is inoperable.
4.5.2 Forestry application:
4.5.2.1 In case of use of an agricultural tractor in a forestry application, the identified hazards are the fol- NA
lowing:
a toppling trees, primarily in case a rear-mounted tree grab-crane is mounted at the rear of the NA
tractor;
b penetrating objects in the operator’s enclosure, primarily in case a winch is mounted at the rear NA
of the tractor.
4.5.2.2 The operator’s manual shall provide information about the following:
a the existence of the hazards described in point 4.5.2.1; NA
b any optional equipment that might be available to deal with those hazards; NA
c fixation points on the tractor where protective structures can be fixed, together with the size NA
and quality of the hardware to be used. When no means are foreseen to fit adequate protective
structures, this shall be mentioned;
d protective structures may consist of a frame protecting the operating station against toppling NA
trees or (mesh) grids in front of the cab doors, roof and windows;
e the Falling Objects Protection System level, if provided; NA

220
 Contents Directive 2010/52/CE

4.5.3 Work with crop sprayers (risk of hazardous substances):

The protection level against hazardous substances, in accordance with EN 15695-1:2009, must be 1
described in the operator’s manual".

NA: Not Applicable

221
 NOTE
This manual has been published for worldwide circulation. The standard
and optional equipment and the availability of individual models may vary
from one country to the next. Argo Tractors reserves the right to undertake
modifications without prior notice to the design and technical equipment at
all times without this resulting in any obligation whatsoever to make such
modifications to units already sold. Whilst every effort is made to ensure
that the specifications, descriptions, photographs and illustrations in this
manual are correct at the time of going to print, these are also subject
to change without prior notice. The photographs and illustrations used in
this manual may show optional equipment or may not show all standard
equipment. Any reproduction or translation, even partial, is forbidden
without the written authorization of Argo Tractors.

222
 To ensure
long and efficient
service from your tractor
use only

spare parts

recommended lubricants

223